JP6460951B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine called a pachinko gaming machine is known, and this pachinko gaming machine is generally composed of a gaming area in which a game ball launched on a gaming board can roll, and a starting area provided in the gaming area. And a symbol display device and variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball passing through a start area (game ball start opening winning) is established, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device, and the symbol display device Identification information (for example, a special symbol described later) is variably displayed on the display area. When the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device has a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the game state is a jackpot gaming state (so-called “big jackpot” advantageous to the player). )).

  Conventionally, pachinko gaming machines having a function of performing various presentation operations in accordance with the above-described game operations are known, and for example, a display device, a light emitting device, a sound generation device, or the like is used as the presentation function. There are known production functions and production functions using a movable body driven by a motor (hereinafter referred to as “movable accessory”).

  Therefore, heretofore, a gaming machine having a function of changing the execution cycle of the effect control processing according to the type of the effect device when the effect operation by the effect devices is controlled by the effect control unit (sub-control unit) is known. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1). Specifically, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a technique is proposed in which the execution cycle of the control process of the rendering operation by the movable accessory and the execution cycle of the control process of the rendering operation by the light emitting device or the audio device are different from each other. ing. When this technique is used, it is possible to reduce the burden on the production control unit (sub control unit) that controls these production operations.

JP 2007-296117 A

  As described above, conventionally, in a gaming machine having a function of performing effects using various effect devices, a technique for reducing the burden on the sub-control unit that controls these effect operations has been proposed. However, for example, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, in practice, the control process of each effect device is an interrupt process for an effect device that needs to be controlled in a short execution cycle, regardless of the type of effect device. It is running. And in the interruption process, the determination process of whether to perform the control process of the rendering device that can be controlled in a long execution cycle is performed.

  That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the interrupt process for performing the control process of each effect device is performed in a short execution cycle regardless of the type of the effect device, and at that time, the control is performed with a short execution cycle. For the rendering device that needs to perform the control process, the control process is executed for each interrupt process. However, for the rendering device that performs control with a long execution cycle, for example, the control process is performed every two interrupt processes. It is the composition which does. Therefore, the method proposed in Patent Document 1 cannot necessarily be said to reduce the control burden on the sub-control unit.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the control load of the rendering operation using the rendering device in a gaming machine including the rendering device, and to provide the rendering device. It is to provide a technique that enables more detailed performance operations.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

Main control means (for example, a main control circuit 70 described later) capable of executing a lottery transition from a normal gaming state unfavorable to the player to a special gaming state advantageous to the player;
Sub-control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200 described later) capable of controlling the production based on the result of the transition lottery,
An effect device (for example, various movable accessories described later) driven at the time of execution of the effect,
The main control means includes
Game information transmission means capable of transmitting game information (for example, various command data described later) from the main control means to the sub-control means;
The sub-control means is
Rendering device control means capable of controlling the rendering device;
Based on the game information transmitted from the main control means, effect data (for example, excitation data to be described later) used for controlling the effect is set, and a control command for the effect device is sent to the effect device control means ( For example, it has production control means (for example, a host control circuit 210, which will be described later) capable of outputting an article request described later,
The effect device control means includes:
A first effect device control circuit unit (for example, a host control circuit 210 to be described later) that can control the effect device in a first cycle (for example, about 33 msec to be described later) when a control command for the effect device is acquired. When,
When the control command for the effect device is acquired, the effect device can be controlled in a second cycle shorter than the first cycle (for example, about 12 msec described later), and the first effect device control circuit unit A second rendering device control circuit unit (for example, a sound / LED control circuit 220 described later) provided separately from
The rendering device includes at least a first movable body (for example, a first sword-shaped member 301 described later) and a second movable body (for example, a shutter accessory section 302 described later) capable of executing a predetermined rendering operation. Including
In the execution period of the predetermined rendering operation, the first rendering device control circuit unit controls the operation of the first movable body, and the second rendering device control circuit unit operates the second movable body. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the game machine.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the second movable body is integrally formed with the first movable body,
Wherein according to the second effect device control circuit portion and the second operation control of the movable body, may be performed simultaneously operation and control of the first movable body by the first effect device control circuit unit.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first movable body is different from the first movable body in the performance operation of the first movable body when the specific rendering operation is performed by the rendering device. And a second production operation,
The second production operation is a production operation finer than the first production operation,
When the first movable body is driven by the first presentation operation during the execution period of the specific presentation operation, the first presentation device control circuit unit controls the operation of the first movable body. When the first movable body is driven by the second presentation operation, the second presentation apparatus control circuit unit may control the operation of the first movable body.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the sub control means controls the first movable body in a first specific control period that is a minimum control period of the first movable body in a specific performance operation. The second movable body is controllable in a second specific control period that is a minimum control period of the second movable body,
When executing the specific performance operation,
A first period that exceeds the first specific control period and is closest to the first specific control period in a period obtained by multiplying the first period in the first rendering device control circuit unit by an integer; and Of the second period that is longer than the first specific control period and is closest to the first specific control period in the period obtained by multiplying the second period in the second rendering device control circuit unit by an integer, The first movable body can be controlled using an effect device control circuit unit that can obtain a period closer to the first specific control period,
A third period that exceeds the second specific control period and is closest to the second specific control period in a period obtained by multiplying the first period in the first rendering device control circuit unit by an integer; and Of the fourth period that exceeds the second specific control period and is closest to the second specific control period in a period that is an integral multiple of the second period in the second rendering device control circuit unit , The second movable body may be controllable using an effect device control circuit unit that can obtain a period closer to the second specific control period.

  According to the present invention configured as described above, in a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device, it is possible to reduce the control burden of rendering operations using the rendering device and to perform more detailed rendering operations using the rendering device.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the audio | voice / LED control circuit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the display control circuit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit random number determination table (at the time of the 1st start opening winning a prize) in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit random number determination table (at the time of a 2nd starting opening prize) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table (at the time of a 1st starting opening winning) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table (at the time of a 2nd start opening winning) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table (the 1) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table (the 2) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table (the 3) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table (the 4) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prize information effect information determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation production pattern determination table in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production table in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding | maintenance effect table in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch effect table in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic block diagram of the command data in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the information contained in the structure of the demonstration display command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a demonstration display command. It is a figure which shows the content of the information contained in the structure of the special symbol effect start command and the special symbol effect start command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the information contained in the structure of the 1st power failure reset command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a 1st power failure reset command. It is a figure which shows the content of the information contained in the structure of the 2nd power failure reset command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a 2nd power failure reset command. It is a figure which shows the content of the information contained in the structure of the pending | holding addition command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and a pending | holding addition command. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the outline of the main-sub command control processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a schematic block diagram of the ring buffer provided in the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the production | generation operation | movement of the various requests in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the animation request construction | assembly process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the animation request construction | assembly process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the drawing process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration operation | movement in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic block diagram of the access data used by the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration operation | movement in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the lamp | ramp (LED) lighting operation | movement in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a schematic connection configuration diagram among a voice / LED control circuit, an LED driver, and LEDs in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a SPI connection block diagram between the voice / LED control circuit and the LED driver in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, it is a schematic block diagram of the serial data transmitted to a LED driver from a voice and LED control circuit. It is a schematic block diagram of the LED driver in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the data input operation | movement of the LED driver in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the address setting operation | movement of the LED driver in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between each SPI channel (physical system) and the device address and output terminal of the LED driver connected thereto. It is a figure which shows the format (data type) of LED data in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the output control example of LED data in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 of the LED animation in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 2 of the LED animation in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 3 of the LED animation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example 3 of the LED animation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the reproduction | regeneration channel and expansion channel in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the reproduction | regeneration channel and expansion channel in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the various examples of the switching reproduction pattern of LED animation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the switching reproduction | regeneration aspect (flow on a time axis) of LED animation in the switching reproduction | regeneration pattern 2 of LED animation of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the switching reproduction | regeneration aspect (flow on a time-axis) of LED animation in the LED animation switching reproduction | regeneration pattern 4 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the LED animation switching reproduction | regeneration aspect (flow on a time axis) in the LED animation switching reproduction | regeneration pattern 6 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the switching reproduction | regeneration aspect (flow on a time-axis) of LED animation in the switching reproduction | regeneration pattern 7 of LED animation of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the switching reproduction | regeneration aspect (flow on a time axis | shaft) at the time of continuous reproduction | regeneration of LED animation in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of reproduction | regeneration of the LED animation when there is no "ODONLY" designation | designated in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the reproduction example of the LED animation at the time of "ODONLY" designation | designated in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the accessory driving | operation operation | movement in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an I2C connection block diagram between a host control circuit and a motor driver in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the production | presentation (special production E) using the sword combination performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (special effect F) using the sword thing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (special effect G) using the sword thing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (special effect G) using the sword thing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (special effect H) using the sword thing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (special effect H) using the sword thing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (shutter opening / closing effect) using the shutter accessory performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the effect (shutter rocking | fluctuation effect) using the shutter accessory performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the control flow of the effect (special effects EG) using the various movable actors performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the control flow of the effect (special effect H) using the various movable actors performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation data output to a 1st sword object by the effect (special effect H) using the various movable actors performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation data output to a 2nd sword object by the effect (special effect H) using the various movable actors performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement flow of the speaker check function with which the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing executed by a main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory | storage check process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval process in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on process executed by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sub control main process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the initialization process performed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing executed by a host control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup return initialization process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control initialization process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LED registration process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation means input process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the individual setting execution process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the interruption process at the time of the operation input performed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation input timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the button switch input detection process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command reception process (reception interruption) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command parameter check process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation request construction | assembly process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the moving image command creation process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation data reading process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of all the command list creation processes in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drawing process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the audio | voice control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lamp control process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the object process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start command reception in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration counter update process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory process at the time of the demonstration command reception in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration confirmation process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the excitation time monitoring process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, it is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process performed by the audio | voice / LED control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, it is a flowchart which shows an example of the serial data output process to the LED driver via SPI performed by the audio | voice and LED control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of serial data output processing to the motor driver via the I2C interface executed by the host control circuit. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a voice control process according to Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lamp control process in Modification 2. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lamp control process in Modification 3. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a data setting process for each port in Modification 3. It is a SPI connection block diagram between the audio | voice / LED control circuit and LED driver in the modification 4. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an input / output operation of serial data between a sound / LED control circuit and an LED driver in Modification 4; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an input / output operation of serial data between a sound / LED control circuit and an LED driver in Modification 4; 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of serial data input / output processing executed between a voice / LED control circuit and an LED driver in Modification 4; It is a figure which shows the output control example of the LED data in the modification 5. It is a schematic block diagram of the excitation state detection part of the accessory in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process in the modification 6. It is a schematic block diagram of the 1st sword object in the modification 7. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the control flow of the effect using the 1st sword object performed in the modification 7. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial position return process in Modification 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation time after a stop set in the production using the sword thing performed in the modification 9.

  Hereinafter, a configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Function flow>
First, the function of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation and a game ball payout control process is performed when the game ball has won various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. When it is a “hit” in a special symbol game or a “hit” in a normal symbol game, the probability that a game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control process is more likely to be performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, there is a special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable symbol display in the special symbol game, and a single condition for the variable symbol normal symbol display in the normal symbol game. Some regular symbol starting prizes are also included.

  In this specification, “variable display” is a concept that can be displayed in a variable manner. For example, “variable display” that is actually changed and “stop display” that is actually stopped and displayed. Is possible. Further, in the “variable display”, for example, “derivation display” in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. In other words, in this specification, the operation from the start of “variable display” to “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”. Furthermore, in this specification, “identification information” means “designs” used in pachinko games such as special symbols, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, identification symbols, etc., and identification symbols or ornaments used in pachislot or slot games. This means that it can include symbols used to display or suggest the results of a game when a player plays a game, such as symbols, and various symbols in the embodiments and various modifications described below are also included. May be included.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

(1) Special symbol game When there is a special symbol start winning in a special symbol game, random numbers (random number for jackpot determination and random number for symbol determination) are extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by a special symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is established with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable symbol special display is started, the jackpot determination random number extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination is made. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the counter for symbol determination and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determining counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol for the stop display described above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special display to be stopped, the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect pattern associated with the special symbol variable display are referred to, and the variable display control processing for controlling the special symbol variable display And the effect control process which performs a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached. In this determination process, if it is determined that a “hit” is reached, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been reached, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the game is not “big hit”, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state in a normal time different from the big hit gaming state is performed. As a normal gaming state, for example, in the jackpot determination described above, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “probability changing gaming state”) or a special symbol start winning is likely to be obtained. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “short-time gaming state”). Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start variable symbol special display is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a start during a special symbol change display, various data acquired at the time of the start win (a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random number, etc. ) Is put on hold. In other words, if a game ball wins a start during a special symbol variation display, the special symbol variable display (variation display) corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The variable display of the special symbol that is put on hold is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol that is on hold is also referred to as “holding ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get a hold ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment determines whether or not a holding ball is won (whether or not “big hit” is won) based on the above-described information on the holding ball, and further, A function for performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a pre-reading effect function is also provided.

(2) Normal symbol game When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the counter for hit determination and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol game in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). (Refer to the flow of the symbol start winning process).

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when starting normal symbol variable display, the random number value extracted from the counter for hit determination is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not “win” is set. Thereafter, variation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, referring to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that “winning” is achieved, a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed. In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings as described above, in particular, the possibility of special symbol start winning of a game ball in a special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be “winning”, the winning game control process is not executed. Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball depends on the conditions such as whether or not the game is a “hit” in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the game is the “hit” in the normal symbol game. The ease of processing changes.

  In this embodiment, as a random number extraction method, a soft random number method for generating random values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number value is determined from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the random number may be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random values. When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined period.

<Structure of pachinko machine>
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2, and a glass door that can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 3. 4.

[Main unit]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side edge of the main body 2, the base door 3 The opening 2a is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3 a. The opening 3a is formed from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and has a size that occupies most of the region.

  In addition, a speaker 11, a game board 12, a display device 13 (production means, display means), a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout device 16, and a substrate unit 17 are attached to the base door 3. It is done.

  The two speakers 11 are arranged on the upper part (near the upper end) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is disposed so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light permeability. In addition, as resin which has a light transmittance, an acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, a methacryl resin etc. can be used, for example.

  In addition, a game area 12a in which a game ball fired from the launching device 15 rolls is formed on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 4 to be described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular. Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 4 described later) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  The display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy the whole or a part of the surface of the game board 12. In the display area 13 a of the display device 13, various images such as an effect identification symbol, an effect image, and a decoration image (decoration symbol) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the display device 13. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the display device 13, for example, a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the display device 13 (surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). A space serving as a flow path for the game ball rolling in the region 12a is formed. The spacer 19 is made of a light transmissive material. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a light-transmitting material or may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material. .

  The dish unit 14 is disposed below the game board 12. The dish unit 14 includes an upper dish 21 and a lower dish 22 disposed below the upper dish 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are respectively formed with a payout port 21a and a payout port 22a for lending out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls). When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a and the payout opening 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are launched into the game area 12 a by the launching device 15.

  The plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed using the effect button 23, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display area 13a of the display device 13 is urged to operate the effect button 23. An image is displayed.

  Further, two speaker covers 27 are provided in the dish unit 14. One of the two speaker covers 27 is attached to one side of the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, and the other of the two speaker covers 27 is attached to the other side of the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a corresponding speaker is provided on the back side of each speaker cover 27 (the side opposite to the side facing the player).

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the two speakers 11 (provided on the back side of two speaker covers 29 described later) provided on the upper portion of the base door 3 and the back surfaces of the two speaker covers 27. Two speakers provided on the side are provided, and a total of four speakers are provided. In the present embodiment, two speakers 11 provided on the back side of two speaker covers 29 described later are constituted by high-frequency speakers, and the two speakers provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 27 are low sound. It is composed of a speaker.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the launching operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a touch sensor is provided at the peripheral portion of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. Thereby, it is detected that the player has gripped the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator. When the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (when viewed from the player side), the resistance of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. The electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 4 described later) and released to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

  The dispensing device 16 and the substrate unit 17 are disposed on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout device 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition. The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70 and a sub control circuit 200 described later (see FIG. 5 described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-like member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, two speaker covers 29 are provided in the upper frame portion (upper region) facing the two speakers 11.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4 a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12 a is formed in an area facing the game area 12 a of the game board 12. The opening 4a of the glass door 4 is attached with a protective glass 28 having a light transmission property, thereby closing the opening 4a. Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12.

  Further, a selection button 36 and a determination button 37 are provided on the lower frame portion of the glass door 4 (below the protective glass 28) as operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, when a plurality of options such as a menu are displayed on the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13, the selection button 36 allows the player to select a predetermined option from the plurality of options on the display screen. It is a button used in the operation when doing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2, the selection button 36 includes four movement buttons that enable the player to perform a selection operation on the display screen in the vertical and horizontal directions. The determination button 37 is a button that is pressed when determining an option selected by the player on the display screen of the display device 13.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the front surface of the game board 12, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first start port 44, a second start port 45 (start region), and an ordinary electric accessory 46 And are provided. In addition, on the front surface of the game board 12, there are a plurality of general winning holes 51, a first grand prize opening 53 (variable winning apparatus), a second large prize opening 54 (variable winning apparatus), an out opening 55, and a plurality of winning holes. And a game nail 56 are provided.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (special symbol display means, identification information display means) and a normal symbol display device are arranged above the display area 13a of the display device 13 disposed substantially at the center. 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 12 includes two sword actors 31 and 32 (hereinafter referred to as a first sword actor 31 and a second sword actor 32) and a shutter accessory as movable accessories. 33 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first sword object 31 is attached near the upper side of the game board 12, and the second sword object 32 is one side of the game board 12 (on the front side in FIG. 4). It is attached in the vicinity of the left side as viewed from the (player side). When the first sword object 31 is not movable, the first sword object 31 is disposed on the back surface of the upper frame portion of the glass door 4, and when the second sword object 32 is not movable, the second sword object 32 is disposed. Is arranged on the back surface of one side frame portion of the glass door 4 (the left side frame portion as viewed from the player side in FIG. 4). That is, when each sword object is disposed at the corresponding initial position (reference position) (when each sword object is disposed at a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 4), In the case where an effect by an object is not performed, each sword character is hidden behind the frame part of the glass door 4 and is placed in a position where it cannot be seen by the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the shutter accessory 33 includes a first start port 44 and a general winning port 51 disposed near the lower left portion of the game area 12 a as viewed from the player side. Installed between.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, an effect 7-segment counter is also provided on the front surface of the game board 12. The production 7-segment counter is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. In this embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that is turned on when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that shows the number of rounds in the big hit game, and the like are provided. Also good.

[Various components of game area]
The guide rail 41 includes an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape that partitions the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape disposed on the inner side (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Is done. The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are disposed so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, and thereby, between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b, A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  In addition, a ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip. And the ball | bowl return prevention piece 42 is provided in the front-end | tip part of the inner rail 41b so that the ball | bowl discharge port 41d may be plugged up. The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part of the game area 12a toward the lower part. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first start opening 44, the second start opening 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is arranged on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 5 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43. In addition, when a game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it is “winning”, and based on the result of the lottery, a normal symbol variation display is started.

  The first start port 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start port 45 is disposed below the first start port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball. Hereinafter, a game ball entering or passing through the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is referred to as “winning”. When the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a first predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of game balls is paid out. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start opening 45, a lottery for determining whether or not the game is a “big hit” is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, a special symbol variation display is started.

  The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 5 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the first starting port 44. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 5 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through a recovery port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to a game ball recovery unit (not shown). .

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second start opening 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second start opening 45, and an ordinary electric agent solenoid 46a (see FIG. 5 described later) for driving the pair of blade members. Have. This ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and opens the pair of blade members to make it easier to win a game ball in the second start opening 45, and closes the pair of blade members. One state of a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won is generated at the second start opening 45. In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in a closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. Also good.

  Two of the three general winning ports 51 are arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. In addition, the remaining one general winning opening 51 is disposed below the ball passage detector 43 and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. The general winning opening 51 is composed of a member capable of receiving a game ball. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters or passes through the general winning opening 51. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 51, a second predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is paid out.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51 a (see FIG. 5 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 51.

  The first big winning port 53 and the second big winning port 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting port 44 and the general winning port 51 provided on the right side thereof. The first grand prize port 53 and the second grand prize port 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first grand prize port 53 is arranged above the second grand prize port 54. The Both the first grand prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are so-called attacker-type opening / closing devices, which are shutters 53a and 54a that can be opened and closed, and solenoid actuators that drive the shutters (first 1 in FIG. 5 described later). A large winning opening solenoid 53b and a second large winning opening solenoid 54b).

  Each of the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state), and plays when the shutter is closed (closed state). Do not accept the ball. In the following, it is also referred to as “winning” that a game ball enters or passes through the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54. When game balls win the first big prize opening 53, a third predetermined number of balls (10 balls in the present embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins the second grand prize opening 54, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 balls in this embodiment) are paid out.

  In addition, the first grand prize opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 5 described later) for counting the game balls won in the first big prize opening 53. Further, the second grand prize opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 5 described later) for counting game balls won in the second big prize opening 54.

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 receives a game ball that has not won any of the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the general winning port 51, the first major winning port 53, and the second major winning port 54.

  When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 4, when a game ball is thrown into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when it is hit right), A game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by the game nail 56 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the winner of the second start opening 45 is more likely to receive a “hit” lottery that is advantageous to the player than when the first start opening 44 is won. Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, which will be described later, where winning at the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, the possibility of winning at the first starting port 44 (disadvantageous to the player) is achieved by making a right turn. The possibility of entering a gaming state) can be reduced.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device 61 is disposed in the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the display device 13.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays special symbols as symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display apparatus 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball has won the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the special symbol stop display after performing the variable symbol special symbol display for a predetermined time. Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. The special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (“big hit” mode), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit gaming state which is a state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is “big hit” that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning port 53 or the second big winning port 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 becomes an open state. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the second big winning port 54 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period (for example, 30 sec) elapses. And if the elapsed period of the open state of each big prize opening satisfy | fills any of these conditions, the big prize opening which was the open state will be in a closed state.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening is closed. A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of “losing”), the gaming state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44 while the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. The display (holding ball) is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (the number of holding balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed in the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device for variably displaying normal symbols (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. In the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern constituted by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol by turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the normal symbol stop display after performing the normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a “win” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed below the normal symbol display device 62.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of variable display of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the number of normal symbols that are variably displayed by turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED.

  Specifically, when the number of holdings of the normal symbol variable display is 1, the normal symbol holding display LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol holding display LED from the left) Lights up, and other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 2, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 3, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 4, all the normal symbol hold display LEDs are lit.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol hold display device 64 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 13 a of the display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the first special symbol being held (the hold ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol hold display device 64 has four LEDs (first special symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of reserved pieces as viewed from the player side. Lights up.

  Note that the configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 4, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol. .

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first special symbol hold display device 64 as viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 13 a of the display device 13.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information relating to variable display of the second special symbol being held (the hold ball of the second special symbol). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second special symbol hold display device 65 includes four LEDs (second special symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the hold number when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

  Note that the configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 4, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display holds of the second special symbol. .

[Display device]
The display device 13 is composed of a liquid crystal display device as described above, and performs various image display effects in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for a specific case, for example, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) including numbers 1 to 8 and various characters are used. (Design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as a jackpot symbol to be described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”), the player can grasp that it is “big hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a. As an effect for causing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13 a of the display device 13. For example, the display area 13a displays hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings for variable display of special symbols. In addition, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on the information on the reserved ball of the special symbol, and a notice of notification at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image that causes the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area 13a of the display device 13. A function may be further provided.

[Various movable objects]
Next, the configuration of various movable objects (first sword combination 31, second sword combination 32, and shutter combination 33) provided on the game board 12 will be briefly described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first sword object 31 includes a first sword-like member 31a that imitates the shape of a sword, and a first rotation mechanism 31b that rotationally drives the first sword-like member 31a. .

  The first rotation mechanism 31b includes a first rotation gear group 31c attached to an end (handle) opposite to the tip of the first sword-shaped member 31a, and a first rotation gear group 31c through the first rotation gear group 31c. And a first motor 31d for rotationally driving the single sword member 31a. The first motor 31d can be configured by a stepping motor. The first rotation mechanism 31b is attached near the right corner of the game board 12 when viewed from the player side.

  In this embodiment, when the first sword object 31 is arranged at the initial position, the extending direction of the first sword-shaped member 31a is that of the game board 12 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The sword tip portion of the first sword-shaped member 31a is opposed to the left side portion of the game board 12 so as to be substantially parallel to the upper side. Then, during the performance using the first sword object 31, the first rotation mechanism 31b is centered on the handle portion of the first sword member 31a to which the first rotation mechanism 31b is attached. When the first sword member 31a is viewed from the player side, it is counterclockwise (arrow A1 direction in FIG. 4; hereinafter referred to as reverse rotation direction) or clockwise (arrow A2 direction in FIG. 4; hereinafter forward rotation). (Referred to as direction).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the second sword object 32 includes a second sword-like member 32a simulating the shape of a sword, and a second rotation mechanism portion 32b for rotationally driving the second sword-like member 32a. . Note that the second sword bonus 32 is smaller than the first sword bonus 31, and the weight of the second sword bonus 32 is lighter than the weight of the first sword bonus 31.

  The second rotation mechanism portion 32b includes a second rotation gear group 32c attached to an end (handle portion) opposite to the tip of the second sword-shaped member 32a, and a second rotation gear group 32c through the second rotation gear group 32c. And a second motor 32d for rotationally driving the two sword member 32a. The second motor 32d can be configured by a stepping motor. The second rotation mechanism 32b is attached near the left corner of the game board 12 when viewed from the player side.

  In the present embodiment, when the second sword object 32 is arranged at the initial position, the extending direction of the second sword-shaped member 32a is the direction of the game board 12, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. It is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the left side, and the sword tip portion of the second sword-shaped member 32 a is in a state of facing the lower side portion of the game board 12. During execution of the performance using the second sword object 32, the second rotation mechanism 32b is centered on the handle portion of the second sword-like member 32a to which the second rotation mechanism 32b is attached. The second sword member 32a is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction (the direction of arrow A3 in FIG. 4) or in the normal rotation direction (the direction of arrow A4 in FIG. 4).

  The shutter accessory 33 includes two plate-like members 33a and 33b (hereinafter referred to as a first panel member 33a and a second panel member 33b) whose main surface is rectangular, and the first panel member 33a and the second panel. A third rotation mechanism 33c (see FIGS. 68A to 68C described later) for simultaneously rotating the member 33b is provided.

  The first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b are attached so as to be fitted into the shutter accessory opening 34 provided in the game board 12. At this time, the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and one long side portion (lower side in FIG. 4) of the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b. One long side part (the upper side in FIG. 4) is arranged to face each other.

  Each panel member has a shutter so as to be rotatable about a central axis (one-dot chain line A5 in FIG. 4) connecting the center of one short side and the center of the other short side. It is attached to a frame that defines an opening 34 for an accessory.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the third rotation mechanism portion 33c includes a third rotation gear group including a gear member attached to the center of the short side portion of one of the panel members (right side in FIG. 4), A third motor (not shown) for rotationally driving each panel member via a rotating gear group (see FIGS. 68A to 68C described later). Note that the third motor can be formed of a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect using the shutter accessory 33 is not performed, the shutter accessory opening 34 is closed by the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b. That is, the initial position of each panel member is the position when the main surface of each panel member faces the player side (front). Then, during execution of the effect using the shutter accessory 33, the third rotation mechanism 33c moves the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b attached to the third rotation mechanism 33c in FIG. Is driven to rotate (open / close drive) in one rotational direction or the opposite rotational direction with the one-dot chain line A5 as the central axis.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of LEDs 35 (see FIG. 68C described later) are provided on the back surface side of the shutter accessory 33, and each panel member is driven to open and close in the effect using the shutter accessory 33 ( When rotated, the light from the LED 35 is emitted to the outside or shielded from the shutter accessory opening 34. In the present embodiment, four LED groups in which a predetermined number of LEDs 35 are arranged in a horizontal row are provided on the back surface side of the shutter accessory 33, and these four LED groups are arranged vertically. (See FIG. 68C described later).

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, a detection device (position detection means) for detecting whether or not the movable accessory is present at the initial position is provided for each movable accessory (movable body). This detection device is configured by, for example, a photosensor.

  In the production operation using each movable accessory described above, the rotational position of the rotating member (sword-shaped member and panel member) of the movable accessory is a multiple of that step (step number) with a predetermined angular resolution as one step. ). At this time, the rotation reference position (position of 0 step) of the rotating member (sword-shaped member and panel member) of the movable accessory is the position when the movable accessory is present at the initial position. For example, if the angular resolution is 1.5 degrees (1 step), the position where the rotating member is rotated 45 degrees from the initial position (0 step) is 30 steps. In the present embodiment, the motor (stepping motor) provided in each movable accessory described above is driven by the corresponding motor driver (see FIG. 60 described later).

<Circuit configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, the configuration of various circuits provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main control circuit 70 (main control means, game control means) that mainly controls game operations, a payout / launch control circuit 123, and the progress of the game. A sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means, effect control means, movable body control means) for controlling the effect operation;

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a one-chip microcomputer 77, a clock generation circuit 74, and an initial reset circuit 75. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery process is performed when the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is won, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  The one-chip microcomputer 77 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73, and a serial communication unit 76. The main CPU 71, the main ROM 72, the main RAM 73, and the serial communication unit 76 may be provided separately.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the main ROM 72 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 70 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ROM board on which the main ROM 72 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 70. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, various circuits (various means) in the main control circuit 70 may be formed integrally or separately. Further, the main ROM 72 may not be configured to be installed in the gaming machine but may be configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine.

  A clock generation circuit 74 and an initial reset circuit 75 are connected to the one-chip microcomputer 77. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 82 to 91 described later) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 9 to 18 described later), and the like. ing.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the main CPU 71 for various processes. In this embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. .

  The clock generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication unit 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Is done. Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  The main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first big prize opening solenoid 53b, and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state. Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the second big prize opening solenoid 54b, respectively, so that the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are opened or closed. To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and switches, and receives output signals from the various sensors and switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c and 54c, a general winning ball sensor 51a, a passing ball sensor 43a, a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, and a backup clear switch. 121 etc. are connected.

  The count sensor 53 c counts the game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 53 and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54 c counts the game balls that have won the second grand prize opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The general winning ball sensor 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 51.

  The passing ball sensor 43 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first start port winning ball sensor 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the first start port 44. The second start opening winning ball sensor 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45. In addition, the backup clear switch 121 sends a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 123 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation of an administrator of a game store or the like at the time of power interruption. Output.

  Further, a payout / launch control circuit 123 is connected to the main control circuit 70. The contents of the payout / launch control circuit 123 and various peripheral devices connected thereto will be described in detail later.

[Discharge / Launch Control Circuit and its Peripherals]
The payout / firing control circuit 123 is connected to the prize ball case unit 170, the payout state notification display device 178, the lower pan full switch 179, the firing device 15, the external terminal board 140, and the card unit 150. The external terminal board 140 is connected to the data display 141, and the card unit 150 is connected to the lending operation unit 151.

  Based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the payout / launch control circuit 123 inputs and outputs signals and the like to these peripheral devices, and controls the operation of each peripheral device. For example, the payout / launch control circuit 123 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a lending ball control signal to be described later transmitted from the card unit 150, and gives a predetermined ball to the prize ball case unit 170. Send a signal. Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out a game ball.

  The prize ball case unit 170 is a device for paying out game balls. The first 15-ball collateral switch 172a, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172b, the first counting switch 181a, the second counting switch 181b, and the payout A motor 174 is included. Note that these components included in the prize ball case unit 170 are connected to the payout / firing control circuit 123, respectively.

  Although not shown here, two ball supply passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172a detects a game ball supplied to one of the ball supply passages, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. The second 15-ball collateral switch 172b detects a game ball replenished in the other ball supply passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  Further, although not shown here, two payout passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first counting switch 181 a detects a game ball paid out to one payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. The second counting switch 181b detects the game ball paid out to the other payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  The payout motor 174 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven according to a control signal input from the payout / firing control circuit 123. The payout motor 174 rotationally drives a sprocket (rotating member) (not shown) provided in the prize ball case unit 170. Then, by the rotation of the sprocket, the game balls accumulated in each ball supply path move one by one to the corresponding payout passage.

  The payout state notification display device 178 is a device for notifying the type of abnormality when an abnormality occurs with respect to the payout of the game ball, and is configured by a 7-segment display. The payout state notification display device 178 is attached at a position where only the administrator of the game store (game room) can visually recognize, for example, at a predetermined location on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the game ball stored in the lower plate 22 becomes full, the lower plate full tank switch 179 detects this and outputs the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  When the signal indicating that the lower pan is full is input from the lower pan full switch 179, the payout / launch control circuit 123 displays the payout state notification display device 178 indicating that the lower pan is full. And a signal indicating that the lower pan is full is output to the main control circuit 70. Thereafter, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 uses the speaker group 10, the lamp group 20, the display device 13, etc., for example, so that the lower plate 22 is full. Notify that.

  The launching device 15 has a launching handle 25 that can be turned by the player when the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a. The payout / firing control circuit 123 is connected to a solenoid actuator (not shown) of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the launching handle 25 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. Supply power. Thereby, the launching device 15 launches a game ball. Note that a motor may be used instead of the solenoid actuator as the driving means of the launching device 15.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the game store. The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an ancillary facility of a game store in the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 150. The card unit 150 determines the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170 (the number of loaned balls) based on a signal for requesting the rental of game balls output from the lending operation unit 151. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined lending ball number to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication unit 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210 described later) controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands (information relating to the progress of the game) transmitted from the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the sound reproduction operation by the speaker group 10, the image display operation by the display device 13, and the lamp group 20 including LEDs (based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70). Control of lamp lighting / extinguishing operation by the rendering means), control of rendering operation by the accessory group 30 (decorative member), and the like are performed. That is, the sub control circuit 200 controls various effect devices based on commands from the main control circuit 70, and executes various effects according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. It may be provided with various configurations.

  The speaker group 10 includes, for example, two speakers 11 provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 29, two speakers (not shown) provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 27, and the like. .

  The lamp group 20 includes, for example, various LEDs attached to the frame portion of the glass door 4 and a plurality of LEDs 35 described later provided on the back side of the shutter accessory 33. Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 20 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED (see FIGS. 36 to 38 described later).

  Further, the accessory group 30 includes, for example, a first sword accessory 31, a second sword accessory 32, a shutter accessory 33, and the like provided on the game board 12.

  Next, the internal configuration of the sub control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub-control circuit 200 and a connection relationship between the sub-control circuit 200 and its various peripheral devices.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 200 includes a relay board 201, a sub board 202, a control ROM board 203, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 204. The sub board 202 is connected to the relay board 201, the control ROM board 203, and the CGROM board 204.

  The relay board 201 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 202.

  The sub-board 202 includes a host control circuit 210 (host control means, effect control means, first effect device control means, movable body movement control means), and sound / LED control circuit 220 (light emission control means, second effect device). Control means, sound control means), display control circuit 230 (display control means), SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and built-in relay board 260 are provided.

  The host control circuit 210 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub-control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, and is configured by a CPU processor. The host control circuit 210 is connected to the sound / LED control circuit 220, the display control circuit 230, and the built-in relay board 260 in the sub-board 202. The host control circuit 210 is connected to the control ROM board 203.

  The host control circuit 210 includes a sub work RAM 210a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 210b. The sub work RAM 210a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 210 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 210 executes various processes. The value of etc. is memorized. The SRAM 210b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the sub work RAM 210a. In this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the host control circuit 210. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. . Although not shown, the host control circuit 210 also has a built-in ROM that stores various excitation data (effect data, drive data) output to the motor of each movable accessory.

  The sound / LED control circuit 220 is connected to the speaker group 10 and the lamp group 20 via the built-in relay board 260, and is based on control signals (control commands: sound request and lamp request described later) input from the host control circuit 210. In this circuit, the sound reproduction operation by the speaker group 10 and the light emission operation by the lamp group 20 are controlled. The voice / LED control circuit 220 is also connected to the accessory group 30 (motor controller 270) via the I2C controller in the built-in relay board 260, and a control signal (an after-mentioned accessory) input from the host control circuit 210. On the basis of the request, the accessory effect operation by the accessory group 30 (various movable accessories) is also controlled.

  Therefore, functionally, the sound / LED control circuit 220 includes a sound controller 220a, a lamp controller 220b, and an accessory controller 20c. The sound controller 220a, the lamp controller 220b, and the accessory controller 20c are substantially included in the sound / lamp control module 226 described later. The internal configuration of the sound / LED control circuit 220 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  In this embodiment, when a control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the sound / LED control circuit 220 are transmitted to the lamp group 20 via the built-in relay board 260, the sound / LED Communication between the control circuit 220 and the lamp group 20 is performed by an SPI (Serial Periperal Interface) communication method (a kind of serial communication method). Also, the execution cycle of various control processes by the voice / LED control circuit 220 (interrupt process cycle) is shorter than that of the host control circuit 210. Specifically, in this embodiment, the execution cycle of various control processes by the voice / LED control circuit 220 (hereinafter referred to as “control execution cycle”) is about 12 msec (second cycle), and the host control circuit 210 The control execution cycle is about 33 msec (first cycle).

  The display control circuit 230 is connected to the display device 13 and displays an image (decoration pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on a control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 210. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying on the screen. The display control circuit 230 includes a display controller (a first display controller 238 and a second display controller 239 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 237.

  The display control circuit 230 is connected to the SDRAM 250 in the sub-substrate 202. Further, the display control circuit 230 is connected to the CGROM substrate 204. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 230 is directly connected to the display device 13 without using a relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 230 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  The SDRAM 250 is configured by a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 250 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in drawing processing of images (moving images and still images) displayed by the display device 13. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 described later, the SDRAM 250 includes a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer), a motion buffer. Etc. are provided.

  The built-in relay board 260 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220, and the received various signals and various data are transmitted to the speaker group 10, the lamp group 20, and the accessory group. 30 is a relay board that transmits to 30.

  The built-in relay board 260 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 261, and the I2C controller 261 is connected to the host control circuit 210, the voice / LED control circuit 220, and the motor controller 270 of the accessory group 30. Is done. That is, the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220 are connected to the accessory group 30 via the I2C controller 261 and the motor controller 270, respectively. Control signals and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220 are input to the accessory group 30 via the I2C controller 261 and the motor controller 270. The

  In this embodiment, communication between the I2C controller 261 and the motor controller 270 is performed by an I2C communication method (a kind of serial communication method). In the present embodiment, the motor controller 270 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor (see FIGS. 60 and 61 described later).

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, each of the host control circuit 210 and the voice / LED control circuit 220 may directly drive each motor in the accessory group 30 without using the motor controller 270. A control circuit for controlling the motor may be provided separately. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit will be described (see FIGS. 60 and 61 described later), but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used. One motor (motor driver) may be controlled, or one motor (motor driver) may be controlled by one control circuit.

  A sub main ROM 205 is provided on the control ROM board 203. In the sub main ROM 205, various programs (see FIGS. 92, 94 to 99, and FIGS. 101 to 124 described later) for controlling the presentation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 210, and various data tables ( 19 to 21 described later) is stored. Then, the host control circuit 210 executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub main ROM 205.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 205 is applied as a storage unit that stores programs used in the host control circuit 210 and various tables. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with a control means. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, etc. The storage medium may be applied. In addition, each program may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub main ROM 205.

  A CGROM 206 is provided on the CGROM substrate 204. The CGROM 206 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 13 and audio data (access data described later) reproduced by each speaker in the speaker group 10.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (the control ROM board 203 and the CGROM board 204) and the sub board 202 are connected in a board-to-board manner in the sub-control circuit 200 has been described. Is not limited to this. For example, various types of ROM may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 202, and the sub-board 202 may be configured by a single board having the ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub board 202 and various ROMs may be integrally configured.

[Audio / LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 220 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an internal circuit configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 220 and a connection relationship between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. In FIG. 7, in order to simplify the description, illustration of a relay board or the like provided between the audio / LED control circuit 220 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

  Further, in FIG. 7, in order to simplify the description, the connection relationship between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the I2C controller 261 (the accessory group 30) in the built-in relay board 260 is omitted. Further, the description of the connection relationship between them is also omitted here. Note that a sound / lamp control module 226 described later in the sound / LED control circuit 220 may be connected to the I2C controller 261 via an interface, or may be directly connected to the I2C controller 261.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the audio / LED control circuit 220 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 221, a memory interface 222, a digital audio interface 223, a peripheral interface 224, a command register 225, a sound lamp. A control module 226, a main generator 227, and a multi-effector 228 are provided. The connection relation of each part in the sound / LED control circuit 220 is as follows.

  In the sound / LED control circuit 220, the sound / lamp control module 226 is connected to the memory interface 222, the peripheral interface 224, the command register 225, the main generator 227, and the multi-effector 228. The command register 225 is connected to the LSI interface 221 in addition to the sound / lamp control module 226. The main generator 227 is connected to the memory interface 222 and the multi-effector 228 in addition to the sound / lamp control module 226. Further, the multi-effector 228 is connected to the memory interface 222 and the digital audio interface 223 in addition to the sound / lamp control module 226 and the main generator 227.

  Next, the configuration of each unit in the voice / LED control circuit 220 will be described.

  The LSI interface 221 is an interface circuit used when an input / output operation such as a control signal (for example, a sound request, a lamp request, an accessory request, etc.) is performed between the host control circuit 210 and the command register 225. That is, the command register 225 is connected to the host control circuit 210 via the LSI interface 221.

  The memory interface 222 is an interface circuit used when performing input / output operations such as audio data between the sub main ROM 205 and each of the sound / lamp control module 226, the main generator 227, and the multi-effector 228.

  The digital audio interface 223 is an interface circuit used when outputting an audio signal or the like from the multi-effector 228 to the speaker group 10. The digital audio interface 223 outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effector 228.

  The peripheral interface 224 is an interface circuit used when an input / output operation of a lamp signal or the like (LED data described later) is performed between the lamp group 20 and the sound / lamp control module 226. The peripheral interface 224 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) for outputting data to the LED drivers included in the lamp group 20. In this embodiment, as will be described later, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used.

  The command register 225 includes a register group. The command register 225 sets function control for the sound / lamp control module 226, the main generator 227, and the multi-effector 228. The command register 225 also sets operating conditions for each interface (LSI interface 221, memory interface 222, digital audio interface 223, peripheral interface 224).

  Each register constituting the command register 225 includes an IC (Integrated Circuit), and each register is constituted by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When a register having such a configuration is used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module (e.g., The capacity of the command register 225 can be increased.

  The sound / lamp control module 226 controls the operation of each component (each block) in the sound / LED control circuit 220 according to the setting contents of the command register 225. As shown in FIG. 7, the sound / lamp control module 226 includes a simple access control unit 226a, a sequencer unit 226b, a lamp control unit 226c, and a peripheral control unit 226d.

  The simple access control unit 226a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands. The sequencer unit 226b includes various sequencers (automatic reproduction function units) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and sound. Each sequencer controls various operations in accordance with timers and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence playback such as LED animation and audio described later).

  The lamp control unit 226c calculates the luminance value to be set in all channels (eight channels) in which LED data to be described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). The peripheral control unit 226d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the calculation result data output from the lamp control unit 226c to the LED driver.

  The main generator 227 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 227 acquires predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 206 based on a control signal input from the sound / lamp control module 226, and uses the acquired audio data as a predetermined audio signal. Convert to The main generator 227 also performs amplification processing on the generated audio signal.

  The multi-effector 228 includes a mixer that synthesizes an audio signal input from the main generator 227 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 223, and various effectors for applying various acoustic effects to the sound. Then, the multi-effector 228 outputs an audio signal synthesized by the mixer, an output signal from the effector, and the like to the speaker group 10 via the digital audio interface 223.

[Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 230 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 230 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 230 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the display control circuit 230 includes a memory controller 231, a command memory 232, a command parser 233, a moving picture decoder 234, a still picture decoder 235, an SDRAM controller 236, a built-in VRAM 237, a first A display controller 238, a second display controller 239, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 240, and a rendering engine 241 are provided. The connection relationship of each part in the display control circuit 230 and the connection relationship between the display control circuit 230 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

  In the display control circuit 230, the memory controller 231 is connected to a command parser 233, a moving picture decoder 234 and a still picture decoder 235. In addition to the memory controller 231, the command parser 233 is connected to the command memory 232, the moving picture decoder 234, the still picture decoder 235, and the 3D geometry engine 240. The moving picture decoder 234 is connected to the SDRAM controller 236 in addition to the memory controller 231 and the command parser 233. The still picture decoder 235 is connected to the built-in VRAM 237 in addition to the memory controller 231 and the command parser 233.

  In the display control circuit 230, the SDRAM controller 236 is connected to the built-in VRAM 237, the first display controller 238 and the second display controller 239 in addition to the moving picture decoder 234. The built-in VRAM 237 is connected to the first display controller 238, the second display controller 239 and the rendering engine 241 in addition to the still image decoder 235 and the SDRAM controller 236. Further, the 3D geometry engine 240 is connected to the rendering engine 241 in addition to the command parser 233.

  The SDRAM 250 is connected to the memory controller 231 and the SDRAM controller 236 in the display control circuit 230. Further, the CGROM substrate 204 is connected to the memory controller 231 in the display control circuit 230. The host control circuit 210 is connected to the memory controller 231 and the command memory 232 in the display control circuit 230. Further, the display device 13 is connected to the first display controller 238 and the second display controller 239 in the display control circuit 230.

  Next, the configuration of each unit in the display control circuit 230 will be described.

  The memory controller 231 mainly controls communication between various external memories (the CGROM substrate 204 and the SDRAM 250) and the display control circuit 230. For example, the memory controller 231 performs processing such as transmission / reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory ready, busy management, and the like, and data (effect data) stored in designated addresses for various memories. , Command data, etc.).

  The command memory 232 is a built-in memory that stores a command list. In addition to the command memory 232, the command list can be stored in the SDRAM 250 and the CGROM substrate 204 (CGROM 206).

  The command parser 233 acquires a command list from a specified memory (command memory 232, SDRAM 250 or CGROM 206). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 210 stores the command type in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 230 (command memory 232, SDRAM 250 or CGROM 206), and The start address is set. Then, the command parser 233 obtains a command list by accessing the start address in the memory designated in the system control register (not shown).

  In addition, the command parser 233 generates a specific control code by analyzing the acquired command list, and outputs the control code to the moving picture decoder 234, the still picture decoder 235, and the 3D geometry engine 240. In the present embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 230 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 233.

  The moving picture decoder 234 decodes (decodes) the moving picture compressed data acquired from the CGROM substrate 204 or the SDRAM 250. Then, the moving image decoder 234 outputs the decoded moving image data to the SDRAM 250 (external RAM). Note that the moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 234 is stored in a later-described movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 250.

  The still image decoder 235 decodes still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM substrate 204 or the SDRAM 250. Then, the still picture decoder 235 outputs the decoded still picture data to the built-in VRAM 237. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 235 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer (described later) provided in the built-in VRAM 237.

  The SDRAM controller 236 stores the decoded moving image data and still image data in the RAM, the built-in VRAM 237 and the CGROM substrate 204 or the SDRAM 250, as will be described in a drawing process (see FIGS. 111 to 113 described later). Is a controller that controls operations such as image data transfer processing between and.

  The built-in VRAM 237 operates as a work RAM when executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in a drawing process (see FIGS. 111 to 113 described later) performed by the display control circuit 230. Various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 237 in the image data transfer process between the built-in VRAM 237 and the CGROM substrate 204 or the SDRAM 250, which is performed in each process in the drawing process described later.

  Each of the first display controller 238 and the second display controller 239 acquires the rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 241 and outputs the rendering result to the display device 13. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13. When two display controllers are provided as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 13 by one display control circuit 230 (one chip). It can be controlled independently.

  Based on the control code input from the command parser 233, the 3D geometry engine 240 converts 3D information into 2D information (projection conversion processing), and affine transformation such as figure enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement. Perform (graphic conversion) processing. Then, the 3D geometry engine 240 outputs the result of the conversion process to the rendering engine 241.

  The rendering engine 241 refers to a texture source (SDRAM 250 in this embodiment) in which decompressed still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 241 writes the rendering result to a rendering target (in the present embodiment, the built-in VRAM 237 or the SDRAM 250).

  In this specification, “rendering” means editing data decoded according to designation information (information output from the 3D geometry engine 240 in this embodiment) such as enlargement / reduction or rotation of a moving image. It is to be. The “rendering engine” here includes, for example, “rasterizer”, “pixel shader”, and the like. Therefore, in the rendering engine 241, similarly to the pixel shader, the ARGB value (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) for each pixel of image data. (B: luminance value of blue component) is also calculated.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include “big hit gaming state” (special gaming state) and “small hit gaming state” (specific gaming state), which have different expectations of prize balls. There is. The “big hit gaming state” is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in which the shutter opening period of the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 (that is, one round period) is long (for example, 30 seconds) This is a gaming state in which a big prize ball can be expected for the player. That is, in the “hit game state”, the player is more advantageous in the state of repeating the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big prize opening.

  On the other hand, the “small hit gaming state” is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in which the period of one round is shorter (for example, 1.8 seconds) than the “big hit gaming state”, and a big prize ball cannot be expected for the player. A gaming state. That is, in the “small winning game state”, the repeated state of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening becomes a disadvantageous state by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include “probability gaming state” (high probability gaming state) and “normal gaming state” (low game state) having different winning probabilities for “big hit”. Stochastic gaming state).

  The “probability game state” is a game state in which the winning probability of “big hit” (1/131 in this embodiment) is high. On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” is a gaming state in which the winning probability (1/392 in this embodiment) of “big hit” is lower than the “probability changing gaming state”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 are “short-time gaming states” (highly different) in which the winning probabilities of normal symbols (probability that the normal symbols become “hit”) are different from each other. (Winning gaming state) and "non-time saving gaming state" (low winning gaming state).

  As used herein, the “short-time gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which a normal symbol winning probability is high. That is, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 (blade member) provided in the second starting port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which a second starting port winning is likely to occur). This is a game state advantageous to the player. The “short-time gaming state” ends when “big hit” is determined or when a special symbol variable display for a predetermined number of short-time times described later is executed. Also, in the short-time gaming state, a variation time shorter than the variation time selected during the normal gaming state can be easily selected as the variation time that is the time for performing the variation display of the special symbol executed during the state. It may be controlled. By such control, a game state that is advantageous to the player may be given by shortening the variation time in the short-time game state than in the normal game state and increasing the number of games per unit time.

  On the other hand, the “non-short-time (no short-time) gaming state” is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is lower than the “short-time gaming state”. Therefore, the “non-short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 (blade member) is unlikely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which the second start opening winning is unlikely to occur), and is a disadvantageous game for the player. State.

  In the present embodiment, game states of various combinations of the above-described game states other than the “big hit game state” and the “small hit game state” are provided. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a game state in which a “probability changing gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” occur simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as a “high-probability time short state”), and a “probability changing gaming state” A gaming state in which the “non-short-time gaming state” occurs at the same time (hereinafter referred to as a “high-precision time-short state”) is provided. It should be noted that in the state of “no high accuracy time”, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the gaming state is “probability changing gaming state”. Also called. In the present embodiment, the “normal gaming state” and the “non-short time gaming state” occur simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as “the low probability timeless” state), and the “normal gaming state” and the “short time” There is also a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “low-probability time-short” state) in which a “gaming state” occurs simultaneously.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big Random Number Judgment Table (at the time of winning the first start opening)]
First, with reference to FIG. 9, the big hit random number determination table (at the time of the first start opening winning) will be described. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening) is based on the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball enters the first start opening 44 (winning), "big hit", "small hit" And a table that is referred to when either “losing” is determined by lottery.

  The jackpot determination random number is a random value for determining a lottery result that is triggered by the start opening prize, and more specifically, lottery of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). A random value indicating the result. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value (random number value for lottery of special symbols) is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44, any one of “big hit”, “small win”, and “losing” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of the first start opening winning), as shown in FIG. 9, for each value of probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), “ The range of random numbers for determining big hits for which the winning of “big hit”, “small hit” and “losing” are determined, and the corresponding decision value data (“big hit decision value data”, “small hit decision value data”) And any one of “lose determination value data”). The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the gaming state is “probability changed gaming state”, the confirmation flag is “1”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, when the first start opening 44 is won, the probability variation flag is “0”, and the jackpot determination random number value is any one of “777” to “943”. , “Big hit” is won, and “Big hit judgment value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability of “big hit” in this case (“selection rate” in FIG. 9) is 167/65536.

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random value is any one of “1” to “300” at the time of winning the first start opening 44, “small hit” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 300/65536.

  Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the jackpot determination random number value is not any of “1” to “300” and “777” to “943” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “losing” "Is won and" Loss determination value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the jackpot determination random number is any one of “777” to “1277”, as shown in FIG. "Is won, and" big hit judgment value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability of “big hit” in this case (“selection rate” in FIG. 9) is 500/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “1” and the big hit determination random value is any one of “1” to “300” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “small hit” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 300/65536, which is the same as that in the case where the probability variation flag is “0”.

  Further, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the jackpot determination random number value is not any of “1” to “300” and “777” to “1277” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “losing” "Is won and" Loss determination value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 44, the selection rate (big hit probability) is determined depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability game state”. fluctuate. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “probability changing gaming state”, the big hit probability when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 44 is about three times that when the gaming state is not the “probability changing gaming state”. Get higher.

[Big Random Number Judgment Table (at the time of winning the second starting opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening) will be described. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of the second start opening winning) is a lottery to determine whether or not it is a “big hit” based on the random number for determining the big hit when the game ball enters (wins) the second starting opening 45 This table is referred to when

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45, either “big hit” or “losing” is determined by lottery. If a game ball wins at the second start opening 45, “small hit” is not won. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of the second start opening winning), as shown in FIG. 10, for each value of probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), “ Relationship between the range of random numbers for determining the big hits and the corresponding decision value data (either “big hit decision value data” or “lose decision value data”) for which the winning of each of the “big hit” and “losing” is determined. Is defined.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, when the second start opening 45 is won, the probability variation flag is “0”, and the jackpot determination random number value is any one of “777” to “943”. , “Big hit” is won, and “Big hit judgment value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability of “big hit” in this case (“selection rate” in FIG. 10) is 167/65536.

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for jackpot determination is not any of “777” to “943”, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the big hit determination random number is any one of “777” to “1277” at the time of winning the second start opening 45, as shown in FIG. "Is won, and" big hit judgment value data "is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 500/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for jackpot determination is not any one of “777” to “1277”, it becomes “lost”, and “loss determination value data” Is determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when a game ball is won at the second start opening 45, the selection rate (hit probability) depends on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability game state”. Fluctuates. Specifically, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 44, even when the second starting opening 45 is won, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45 when the gaming state is “probable change gaming state”. The jackpot probability is about three times as high as that when the gaming state is not the “probability gaming state”.

[Symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the winning type of the lottery (“big hit”, “small hit” or “losing”) based on the random number for jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, and the first start A special symbol is selected based on the symbol random number value (random symbol value for symbol determination) acquired at the time of winning the mouth. The symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening) is a table that is referred to when selecting the special symbol. The symbol random number value is a random number value for determining a special symbol, and is selected from 0 to 99 (100 types) regardless of the lottery winning type based on the jackpot determining random number value.

  In the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening), as shown in FIG. 11, a symbol designating command for designating a special symbol for each determination value data indicating the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination The relationship between (“zA1” to “zA3”) and the symbol random value for which the symbol designation command is selected is defined.

  In addition, when the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for determining the big hit is “small hit” (small hit determination value data), there is one type (zA2) of design designation commands to be selected. The command (zA2) is determined. Further, even when the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination is “losing” (losing determination value data), the symbol specifying command to be selected is one type (zA3), and the symbol specifying command ( zA3) is determined.

  On the other hand, when the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination is “big hit” (big hit determination value data), as shown in FIG. A plurality of types ("z0" to "z4") of symbol designating commands for hour (a symbol command for selecting a big hit in FIG. 11) are also prepared. At the time of “big hit”, the big hit selection symbol command to be determined also changes according to the acquired symbol random number value. For example, when the symbol random number value acquired at the time of “big hit” is any of “40” to “59”, the big hit selection symbol command “z2” is selected, and the selection rate is 20/100. Become.

[Pattern determination table (at the time of winning the 2nd starting opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the winning type of the lottery (“big hit” or “losing”) based on the random number for jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and the second start opening winning are acquired. The special symbol is selected based on the symbol random number value (random symbol value for symbol determination). The symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening) is a table that is referred to when selecting the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second start opening), a symbol designating command for designating a special symbol for each determination value data indicating the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination (“ZA1” and “zA3”) and the symbol random number value for which the symbol designation command is selected are defined.

  In addition, even when the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination is “losing” (losing determination value data), the symbol specifying command to be selected is one type (zA3), and the symbol specifying command ( zA3) is determined.

  On the other hand, when the winning type of the lottery based on the random number for determining the big hit is “big hit” (big hit determination value data), there are a plurality of special symbol types to be selected as shown in FIG. A plurality of types (“z0” and “z4”) of the symbol designating command for time (the symbol command for selecting the big hit in FIG. 12) are also prepared. At the time of “big hit”, the big hit selection symbol command to be determined also changes according to the acquired symbol random number value. For example, when the symbol random number value acquired at the time of “big hit” is any one of “29” to “99”, the big hit selection symbol command “z4” is selected, and the selection rate is 80/100. Become.

[Big hit type determination table]
Next, the jackpot type determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when the big hit time selection symbol command (any of “z0” to “z4”) is determined with reference to the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 11 and 12), the determined big hit time selection is performed. Based on the symbol command, the type of “big hit” (the content of the big hit game) is determined. The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the type of “hit” (the contents of the jackpot game) based on the jackpot selection symbol command.

  In the present embodiment, a big hit type determination table is provided for each gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. FIG. 13 is a big hit type determination table (part 1) that is referred to when “big hit” is won when the gaming state is “no low probability time”, and FIG. It is a jackpot type determination table (No. 2) that is referred to when “Big Jack” is won when “Yes”. FIG. 15 is a big hit type determination table (part 3) that is referred to when “big hit” is won when the gaming state is “no high accuracy time,” and FIG. This is a big hit type determination table (part 4) that is referred to when “big hit” is won when “there is a short time”.

  Each jackpot type determination table defines the relationship between the jackpot selection symbol commands (“z0” to “z4”) and various parameters for determining the type of “hit”. As various parameters for determining the type of “big hit” (contents of the big hit game), the value of the hour / short flag, the number of time reductions, the value of the probability variation flag, and the number of rounds in the big hit game are defined.

  For example, when “big hit” is won in the state of “highly accurate time is short” and “z1” is determined as the big hit selection symbol command, as shown in FIG. As various parameters for determining the content of the big hit game), a time reduction flag “1”, a time reduction number “100”, a probability change flag “0”, and a round number “10” are set.

  The “number of rounds” defined in each jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds in which the opening time of the big prize opening is relatively long in the jackpot game. The “time-short flag” is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is “time-short game state”. When the gaming state is “time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “1 (ON)”. The “number of times reduced” is the number of times of special symbol change display given in the “time saving gaming state”.

[Winning effect information determination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the winning effect information determination table will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71) determines the winning type ("big hit", "small hit", or "losing") determined at the time of winning (at the start opening winning), the symbol designation command or the big win. Based on the time selection symbol command, the sub-control circuit 200 determines information to be used when determining the production contents. For example, in the sub-control circuit 200, information used when determining the contents relating to the color change effect of the holding symbol indicating the reserved ball of the special symbol, the contents relating to the pre-reading effect, and the like is determined. The winning effect information determination table is referred to when determining the outline of the effect contents executed by the sub control circuit 200 based on the information acquired by the main control circuit 70 at the time of winning (at the start opening winning). It is a table.

  In the winning effect information determination table, “winning effect information 1” and “winning effect information 1” indicating the combination of various types of information determined at the time of winning (at the start opening winning time) and the effect contents executed by the sub-control circuit 200. The relationship with “winning effect information 2” is defined. In the present embodiment, the various types of information determined at the time of winning (at the time of starting port winning) include the type of starting port, the type of determination value data, the type of symbol command selected at the big hit, and the type of symbol designating command. It is defined in the hour performance information determination table.

  Winning effect information 1 (“1A” to “1D”) defined in the winning effect information determination table is mainly used in the sub-control circuit 200 to change the color change effect of the reserved symbol indicating the reserved ball of the special symbol. It is the production information used when determining the content regarding. When the sub control circuit 200 receives the winning effect information 1 determined based on the winning effect information determination table, the sub control circuit 200 performs the color change effect of the holding symbol included in the category of the winning effect information 1. One production pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns.

  In addition, winning effect information 2 (“2A” to “2D”) defined in the winning effect information determination table is prefetched based on a reserved ball of a special symbol (subsequent read-ahead continuous) in the sub-control circuit 200. This is the production information used when determining the content related to the production. When the sub control circuit 200 receives the winning effect information 2 determined based on the winning effect information determination table, the sub control circuit 200 provides a plurality of types of prefetch effects included in the category of the winning effect information 2. One production pattern is selected from the patterns.

  When referring to the winning effect information determination table of the present embodiment, for example, when “big hit” is won at the time of winning the first start opening, “1A” is given as winning effect information 1 regardless of the type of the jackpot selection symbol command. Is determined, and “2A” is determined as the winning presentation information 2.

[Variation production pattern determination table]
Next, the variation effect pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71), when starting the special symbol variation display, the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "losing"), the design designation command, the big hit selection symbol command, Based on information such as the variation time, the variation effect pattern of the special symbol is determined. The variation effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern of this special symbol.

  The variation effect pattern (information included in a special symbol effect start command described later) determined based on the variation effect pattern determination table is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210). . And the sub control circuit 200 will determine the kind of production | presentation based on the received information, such as a variation production pattern and a game state, if the information of a variation production pattern is received.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 18, combinations of symbol designation commands, jackpot selection symbol commands and special symbol variation times determined at the time of winning a prize (starting opening winning), and variation display of special symbols The relationship with the type of effect (variation effect pattern) executed by the sub-control circuit 200 is defined.

  In the present embodiment, the variation effect pattern is represented by a two-digit number, and the “upper” (first digit) parameter and the “lower” (second digit) parameter described in the variation effect pattern column in FIG. Expressed in combination with parameters. For example, when the symbol designation command determined at the time of winning (at the time of winning the start opening) is “zA1”, the jackpot selection symbol command is “z0”, and the variation time of the special symbol is “15000 msec”. The parameter is “C1” (a combination of the upper “C” and the lower “1”).

  In the present embodiment, the information about the variable effect parameter is included in a special symbol effect start command described later. At this time, the “upper” parameter and the “lower” parameter defined in the variable effect pattern column are stored in different parameter areas. Therefore, in the variation effect pattern determination table, the “upper” parameter and the “lower” parameter of the variation effect pattern are separately defined.

<Configuration of data table stored in sub-main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub main ROM 205 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Variation production table]
First, the variation effect table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, various effects are executed during the special symbol variation display under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210). The content (effect pattern) of the effect performed at this time is the change effect of the special symbol included in the special symbol effect start command (described later) transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 at the start of the change display of the special symbol. It is determined based on pattern information and the like. The variation effect table is referred to when determining the effect content (effect pattern) based on information such as the variation effect pattern and the gaming state.

  In the variation effect table, as shown in FIG. 19, a combination of various information (including information on the variation effect pattern) determined at the time of winning (at the time of winning the start opening) and an effect pattern (“EN00” determined by lottery). ”To“ EN44 ”) and the contents of the effects, and the correspondence between the random values for selecting (determining) each effect pattern and the selection rate (winning probability) are defined. In the present embodiment, as various information determined at the time of winning (at the start opening winning), the types of variation design patterns of special symbols (“A0” to “A4”, “B1” to “B3”, and “C1”). ”To“ CF ”), special symbol variation time, winning type (“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ losing ”), symbol designation command and jackpot selection symbol command are defined in the variation effect table.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the variation time of the special symbol defined in the variation effect table is substantially the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. In addition, the random value defined in the variation effect table is a random value acquired in the process of S339 (sub lottery process) during the command analysis process shown in FIG. 104 to be described later, and is “0” to “999” ( 1000 types).

  When determining an effect pattern with reference to the change effect table of the present embodiment, for example, when the change pattern of the special symbol determined at the start of the special symbol change display is “C1” and selecting the effect pattern When the random number value acquired in the above is any value from “0” to “499”, “EN15” is selected as the effect pattern. In this case, an effect called “normal reach effect A” is performed in the variable symbol display period (15000 msec). Then, along with the end of the “normal reach effect A”, the “big hit” mode is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the special symbol is fluctuated and stopped.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the effects referred to as “special effects E” to “special effects H” is determined by lottery with reference to the variable effect table, the first sword object 31 is described later. Then, an effect production using the second sword accessory 32 and the shutter accessory 33 is executed.

[Holding effect table]
Next, the hold effect table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects relating to the color change of the holding symbol indicating the holding ball of the special symbol are executed under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210). The content (effect pattern) of the color change effect of the holding symbol performed at this time is a prize included in a holding addition command to be described later transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the special symbol variation display. It is determined based on hour performance information 1 ("1A" to "1D"). The holding effect table is referred to when the content (effect pattern) of the color change effect of the holding symbol is determined based on information such as the winning effect information 1.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the holding effect table, a combination of various information (including winning effect information 1) determined at the time of winning (at the start opening winning) and the color of the holding symbol determined by lottery Correspondence relationships between the production patterns (“HE00” to “HE19”) and production contents of the change production, the random value for selecting (determining) each production pattern, and the selection rate (winning probability) are defined. In the present embodiment, as various information determined at the time of winning a prize (at the start opening prize), winning effect information 1 (“1A” to “1D”), winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “ “Lose”), a symbol designation command, and a jackpot selection symbol command are defined in the hold effect table. In addition, the random value defined in the hold effect table is a random value acquired in the process of S339 (sub lottery process) during the command analysis process shown in FIG. 104 to be described later, and “0” to “999” ( 1000 types).

  When determining the effect pattern of the color change effect of the reserved symbol with reference to the hold effect table of the present embodiment, for example, the winning effect information 1 determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is “1A”, When the jackpot selection symbol command is “z0” and the random value acquired when selecting the effect pattern is any value from “0” to “499”, the color of the symbol for holding “HE00” is selected as the effect pattern of the change effect. In this case, an effect referred to as “holding effect A” is performed as the color change effect of the reserved symbol.

[Pre-reading effect table]
Next, the prefetch effect table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the sub-control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210) causes the contents of the variable display of the suspended special symbol (reserved ball) Depending on the content, a predetermined pre-reading effect is performed. The contents (effect pattern) of the pre-reading effect performed at this time are the winning effect information 2 (included in a hold addition command, which will be described later) transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 at the start of variable symbol display. “2A” to “2D”) and the like. The prefetch effect table is referred to when the contents of the prefetch effect (effect pattern) are determined based on information such as the winning effect information 2.

  In the prefetch effect table, as shown in FIG. 21, a combination of various information (including winning effect information 2) determined at the time of winning (at the time of winning the start opening) and an effect pattern of prefetching effects determined by lottery ("SE00" to "SE19") and the contents of the effects, and the correspondence between the random number value and the selection rate (winning probability) for selecting (determining) each effect pattern are defined. In the present embodiment, as the various information determined at the time of winning (at the start opening winning), the winning effect information 2 (“2A” to “2D”), the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “Lose”), a symbol designating command and a jackpot selecting symbol command are defined in the prefetch effect table. Further, the random value defined in the prefetch effect table is a random value acquired in the process of S339 (sub lottery process) during the command analysis process shown in FIG. 104 to be described later, and “0” to “999” ( 1000 types).

  When determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect by referring to the prefetch effect table of the present embodiment, for example, the effect information 2 at the time of winning determined at the start of the special symbol variation display is “2A”, and the symbol command selected at the big hit Is “z0” and the random number value obtained when selecting the effect pattern is any value from “0” to “499”, “SE00” is the effect pattern of the pre-read effect. Selected. In this case, an effect referred to as “prefetch effect A” is performed as the prefetch effect.

<Composition of various commands>
Here, the configuration of various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 will be described. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 70 generates a command (game information) including information related to the progress of the game and transmits the command data to the sub-control circuit 200 (command transmission means, game information transmission). Means).

[Basic configuration]
First, the basic structure of a command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a basic configuration (basic format) of command data.

  In the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 is composed of a command type section in which command type information is stored, and a parameter field section in which various information relating to games and effects are stored. Is done. In the present embodiment, information in the parameter field portion is analyzed by command analysis processing described later executed in the sub-control circuit 200, and various types of information relating to games and effects are acquired.

  The command type part is provided at the head part of the command and is composed of 8 bits (1 byte: fixed length). On the other hand, in the parameter field portion, information on the game and the effect is defined in bit units, and the bit length (length) of the parameter field portion changes according to the command type.

  In this embodiment, since the command transmission / reception operation is repeatedly performed in units of 8 bits, the parameter field part is also managed in units of 8 bits. Here, the area in units of 8 bits is referred to as a “parameter”. Also, the names of the parameters arranged in the parameter field part are referred to as “first parameter”, “second parameter”, “third parameter”,... From the head side of the command (command type part side).

  Below, as an example of the command, the configuration of the demo display command, special symbol effect start command, power interruption return command and hold addition command, and the contents of various information included in these commands will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. explain.

[Demo display command]
First, the structure of the demonstration display command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a bit-by-bit configuration of the demo display command and the contents of various information stored in each bit.

  The demonstration display command includes a command type portion and a parameter field portion including one parameter (first parameter). That is, the number of bytes (command length) of the entire demonstration display command is 2 bytes (16 bits), and the number of bytes in the parameter field portion is 1 byte (8 bits).

  In the command type portion of the demo display command, a value “80H” indicating the type of the demo display command is stored.

  A “state number” (any one of 0 to 7) corresponding to the gaming state is stored in bit 0 (b0) to bit 2 (b2) of the first parameter of the demonstration display command. For example, if the value of the probability variation flag is “0” and the value of the time reduction flag is “0”, the “state number” is any one of “0” to “2” among “0” to “7”. Is set to bit 0 (b0) to bit 2 (b2). Bit 4 (b4) and bit 5 (b5) of the first parameter store the value of the time reduction flag (“0” or “1”) and the value of the probability change flag (“0” or “1”), respectively. . In addition, data “0” is always stored in each of bit 3 (b3), bit 6 (b6), and bit 7 (b7) of the first parameter. In the following, a bit in which data “0” is always stored is also referred to as “always 0 area”.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the demo display command having the above-described configuration, the game state information (game status) at the time of displaying the demo screen is acquired from the first parameter as the analysis result.

[Special symbol production start command]
Next, the configuration of the special symbol effect start command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration in bit units of the special symbol effect start command and the contents of various information stored in each bit.

  The special symbol effect start command is composed of a command type part and a parameter field part composed of five parameters (first parameter to fifth parameter). That is, the total number of bytes of the special symbol effect start command is 6 bytes (48 bits), and the number of bytes in the parameter field portion is 5 bytes (40 bits).

  In the command type portion of the special symbol effect start command, a value “81H” indicating the type of the special symbol effect start command is stored.

  A “state number” (any one of 0 to 7) corresponding to the gaming state is stored in bits 0 to 2 of the first parameter of the special symbol effect start command. Bit 4 and bit 5 of the first parameter store the value of the time reduction flag (“0” or “1”) and the value of the probability variation flag (“0” or “1”), respectively.

  Bit 6 of the first parameter stores information on winning / non-winning of the falling lottery (“falling lottery winning / refusal information”). If the falling lottery is not won, “0” is stored in the bit 6 of the first parameter as “falling lottery rejection information”, and if the falling lottery is won, “0” 1 "is stored in bit 6 of the first parameter. Also, bit 3 and bit 7 of the first parameter are always 0 area.

  In bit 0 to bit 6 of the second parameter of the special symbol effect start command, symbol designation commands (“zA1” to “zA3”) determined by lottery using the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 11 and 12). A value corresponding to is stored. Note that bit 7 of the second parameter is always 0 area.

  In bits 0 to 3 of the third parameter of the special symbol effect start command, “higher” information (“A”) of the change effect pattern determined by the lottery using the change effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 18). To “C”) are stored. Note that bits 4 to 7 of the third parameter are “always 0 range”.

  In bits 0 to 3 of the fourth parameter of the special symbol effect start command, “lower” information (“0”) of the change effect pattern determined by lottery using the change effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 18). To “9” and “A” to “F”) are stored. Note that bits 4 to 7 of the fourth parameter are “always 0 area”.

  In addition, in bits 0 to 6 of the fifth parameter of the special symbol effect start command, a value corresponding to the remaining short time variation number is stored. Note that bit 7 of the fifth parameter is always 0 area.

  In the sub control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the special symbol effect start command having the above-described configuration, the game state information (game status) at the start of the special symbol effect is acquired from the first parameter as the analysis result. The special symbol stop symbol designation information is obtained from the second parameter, the variation effect pattern number designation information is obtained from the third parameter and the fourth parameter, and the remaining short time variation number designation information is obtained from the fifth parameter. The

[Power failure recovery command]
Next, the structure of the power interruption return command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the power failure recovery command is composed of a set of two commands (a first power failure recovery command and a second power failure recovery command). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a bit unit configuration of the first power interruption return command and the contents of various information stored in each bit. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a bit unit configuration of the second power interruption return command and the contents of various information stored in each bit.

(1) First power failure recovery command As shown in FIG. 25, the first power failure recovery command is composed of a command type portion and a parameter field portion composed of three parameters (first parameter to third parameter). The That is, the total number of bytes of the first power failure return command is 4 bytes (32 bits), and the number of bytes in the parameter field portion is 3 bytes (24 bits).

  A value “D1H” indicating the type of the first power failure return command is stored in the command type portion of the first power failure recovery command.

  A “state number” (any one of 0 to 7) corresponding to the gaming state is stored in bits 0 to 2 of the first parameter of the first power interruption return command. Bit 4 and bit 5 of the first parameter store the value of the time reduction flag (“0” or “1”) and the value of the probability variation flag (“0” or “1”), respectively. Bit 6 of the first parameter stores “falling lottery winning / notifying information”. Note that bit 3 and bit 7 of the first parameter are always 0 regions.

  Bit symbols 0 to 5 of the second parameter of the first power interruption return command store special symbol stop symbol designation information ("special stop symbol designation information"). Further, bit 6 of the second parameter has a value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the stop state of the first special symbol at the time of detection of power interruption (“first special stop symbol selection state”). Is stored. In addition, in the most recent special symbol variation display (the variation display executed at the time of power interruption detection and before the power interruption detection is the latest one performed), the stop symbol of the first special symbol is selected. For example, the value of the “first special symbol selection state” is “1”, and if the symbol of the first special symbol is not selected, the value of the “first special symbol selection state” is “0”. Also, bit 7 of the second parameter is always 0 area.

  “Special stop symbol designation information” is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the third parameter of the first power interruption return command. In addition, in bit 6 of the third parameter, a value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the selection state of the stop symbol of the second special symbol (“second special stop symbol selection state”) at the time of detecting power interruption. Is stored. In addition, in the latest special symbol variation display (the variation display executed at the time of power interruption detection and before the power interruption detection, the latest executed variation display), the stop symbol of the second special symbol is selected. For example, the value of “second special stop symbol selection state” is “1”, and if the stop symbol of the second special symbol is not selected, the value of “second special symbol selection state” is “0”. Also, bit 7 of the third parameter is always 0 area.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the first power failure recovery command having the above-described configuration, game state information (game status) at the time of power failure recovery is acquired from the first parameter as an analysis result. Then, information on the stop symbol of the first special symbol at the time of return from power interruption is obtained from the second parameter, and information on the stop symbol of the second special symbol at the time of return from power interruption is obtained from the third parameter.

(2) Second power failure recovery command As shown in FIG. 26, the second power failure recovery command includes a command type portion and a parameter field portion including three parameters (first parameter to third parameter). The That is, the total number of bytes of the second power failure recovery command is 4 bytes (32 bits), and the number of bytes in the parameter field portion is 3 bytes (24 bits).

  In the command type portion of the second power failure recovery command, a value “D2H” indicating the type of the second power failure recovery command is stored.

  In bits 0 to 2 of the first parameter of the second power interruption return command, a value corresponding to the number of reserved variable display suspensions of the second special symbol is stored. In bits 4 to 6 of the first parameter, a value corresponding to the number of holdings of variable display of the first special symbol is stored. Also, bit 3 and bit 7 of the first parameter are always 0 areas.

  Note that bits 0 to 2 or bits 4 to 6 of the first parameter of the second power failure recovery command store “000” when the number of reservations is 0, and when the number of reservations is 1 “001” is stored, “010” is stored when the number of holdings is two, “011” is stored when the number of holdings is three, and when the number of holdings is four, “100” is stored.

  “Internal control state number” is stored in bit 0 to bit 2 of the second parameter of the second power interruption return command. Also, bits 3 to 7 of the second parameter are always 0 area.

  Note that bits 0 to 2 of the second parameter of the second power failure recovery command store “000” as the “internal control state number” when the internal control state is the demonstration screen display state. “001” is stored as “internal control state number” when the state is the special symbol variation state (the state during special symbol variation), and “010” is stored when the internal control state is the special symbol determination state. Stored as “internal control state number”, and when the internal control state is the start state per special symbol, “011” is stored as “internal control state number”. Further, in the second parameter bit 0 to bit 2 of the second power failure recovery command, “100” is stored as the “internal control state number” when the internal control state is the big prize opening open state. When the control state is an inter-round interval state, “101” is stored as the “internal control state number”, and when the internal control state is the end state per special symbol, “110” is the “internal control state number”. Stored as

  Further, “number of remaining short state fluctuations” (“0” to “99”) is stored in bits 0 to 6 of the third parameter of the second power failure recovery command. Also, bit 7 of the third parameter is always 0 area.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the second power failure recovery command having the above-described configuration, the analysis result indicates the number of reserved special variable display numbers at the time of power failure recovery from the first parameter. Information is acquired, information on the internal state at the time of power failure recovery is acquired from the second parameter, and information on the remaining short time fluctuation count at the time of power failure recovery is acquired from the third parameter.

[Hold addition command]
Next, the configuration of the pending addition command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a bit-by-bit configuration of the pending addition command and the contents of various information stored in each bit.

  The pending addition command is composed of a command type part and a parameter field part composed of three parameters (first parameter to third parameter). That is, the total number of bytes of the pending addition command is 4 bytes (32 bits), and the number of bytes in the parameter field portion is 3 bytes (24 bits).

  A value “85H” indicating the type of the hold addition command is stored in the command type portion of the hold addition command.

  In bits 0 to 2 of the first parameter of the hold addition command, a value corresponding to the hold number of the variable display of the second special symbol is stored. In bits 4 to 6 of the first parameter, a value corresponding to the number of holdings of variable display of the first special symbol is stored. Also, bit 3 and bit 7 of the first parameter are always 0 areas.

  “Big hit selection symbol information” is stored in bits 0 to 2 of the second parameter of the pending addition command. The “hit-hit selection symbol information” is information corresponding to the big-hit selection symbol commands (“z0” to “z4”) determined by lottery using the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 11 and 12). is there.

  Bit 3 of the second parameter stores “Large probability big hit / fail information”. Note that “1” is stored in “bit 3” as “big hit success / failure information” at low probability when “big hit” is won at low probability, and “low probability” when “losing” is won at low probability. “0” is stored in bit 3 as “time big hit success / failure information”. Further, in the bit 4 of the second parameter, “high probability big hit success / failure information” is stored. Note that “1” is stored in “bit 4” as “high-probability jackpot success / failure information” when winning a “big hit” at high accuracy, and “high probability” is won when “losing” is won at high accuracy. “0” is stored in bit 4 as “time big hit success / failure information”. These pieces of information are determined based on the lottery results used in the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

  In bits 5 and 6 of the second parameter, “first winning effect information” is stored. “First winning effect information” is information corresponding to winning effect information 1 (“1A” to “1D”) determined by lottery using the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 17). It is. For example, when the winning effect information 1 is “1A”, “00” is stored in bits 5 and 6 as the “first winning effect information”, and the winning effect information 1 is “1B”. In this case, “01” is stored in bit 5 and bit 6 as “first winning effect information”. Further, for example, when the winning effect information 1 is “1C”, “10” is stored in the bits 5 and 6 as the “first winning effect information”, and the winning effect information 1 is “1D”. In this case, “11” is stored in bit 5 and bit 6 as “first winning effect information”. Also, bit 7 of the second parameter is always 0 area.

  “Second winning effect information” is stored in bits 4 and 5 of the third parameter of the hold addition command. The “second winning effect information” is information corresponding to winning effect information 2 (“2A” to “2D”) determined by lottery using the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 17). It is. For example, when the winning effect information 2 is “2A”, “00” is stored in bits 4 and 5 as the “second winning effect information”, and the winning effect information 2 is “2B”. In this case, “01” is stored in bits 4 and 5 as “second winning effect information”. Further, for example, when the winning effect information 2 is “2C”, “10” is stored in the bits 4 and 5 as the “second winning effect information”, and the winning effect information 2 is “2D”. In this case, “11” is stored in bit 4 and bit 5 as “second winning effect information”.

  Note that the values of the “first winning effect information” and the “second winning effect information” are executed based on pre-read information (information related to pre-change hold) at the time of the hold addition command generation (hold addition). It may be changed (updated) in accordance with the number of productions to be performed (the number of suspensions in which the pre-reading production is executed).

  Bit 6 of the third parameter stores “falling lottery information”. When there is no fall, “0” is stored in bit 6 as “falling lottery information”, and “1” is stored in bit 6 as “falling lottery information” when there is a fall. In addition, each of bit 0 to bit 3 and bit 7 of the third parameter is always 0 region.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the pending addition command having the above-described configuration, information on the number of suspended display of the special symbol variable display at the time of winning is acquired as the analysis result, The designation information of the hold effect is acquired from the second parameter, and the specification information of the prefetch effect is acquired from the third parameter.

[Other commands]
Next, the configuration of commands other than the various commands described above and the contents of various information included in the commands will be described. Here, the illustration of the configuration of other various commands is omitted, and only the configuration of the parameter field portion in each command and the outline of various information included in the command will be described.

(1) Special Effect Stop Command The parameter field part of the special effect stop command is composed of two parameters (first parameter and second parameter).

  In the first parameter of the special effect stop command, for example, game status information (game status) such as a falling lottery, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and a state number is stored. The second parameter stores information on the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the special effect stop command having the above-described configuration, as the analysis result, when the effect at the time of special symbol variation display from the first parameter and the second parameter is ended. The various game information is acquired.

(2) Special symbol start display command The parameter field portion of the special symbol start display command is composed of two parameters (first parameter and second parameter).

  The first parameter of the special symbol start display command stores, for example, game state information (game status) such as a state number. The second parameter stores information on the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the special symbol start display command having the above-described configuration, the analysis result includes information on the special symbol hit state (for example, from the first parameter and the second parameter). Information such as whether or not a big hit is being made, whether or not a small hit is being made).

(3) Display command during opening of special winning opening The parameter field portion of the display command during opening of large winning opening is composed of three parameters (first parameter to third parameter).

  For example, game state information (game status) such as a state number is stored in the first parameter of the display command for opening the big winning opening. The second parameter stores information on a special symbol stop symbol. Also, information on the number of rounds (“0” to “15”) is stored in the third parameter.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the display command for opening the special winning opening having the above-described configuration, information on a special symbol hit state is acquired from the first parameter and the second parameter as an analysis result. Then, information on the number of rounds is acquired from the third parameter.

(4) Inter-Round Display Command The parameter field part of the inter-round display command is composed of three parameters (first parameter to third parameter).

  In the first parameter of the display command between rounds, for example, game state information (game status) such as a state number is stored. The second parameter stores information on a special symbol stop symbol. In addition, information on the number of rounds (“0” to “14”) is stored in the third parameter.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the inter-round display command having the above-described configuration, the information about the special symbol hit state is acquired from the first parameter and the second parameter as the analysis result. Information on the number of rounds is acquired from the three parameters.

(5) Special symbol end display command The parameter field portion of the special symbol end display command is composed of two parameters (first parameter and second parameter).

  For example, game status information (game status) such as a status number is stored in the first parameter of the special symbol end display command. The second parameter stores information on the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In the sub control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the special symbol end display command having the above-described configuration, information on the special symbol hit state is acquired from the first parameter and the second parameter as an analysis result. The

(6) Hold Subtraction Command The parameter field part of the hold subtraction command is composed of three parameters (first parameter to third parameter).

  For example, game status information (game status) such as a falling lottery, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and a state number is stored in the first parameter of the hold subtraction command. The second parameter stores information on the number of reserved special variable display. The third parameter stores information on the number of remaining short games.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the pending subtraction command having the above-described configuration, the game state information at the start of the change is acquired from the first parameter as the analysis result, and the change is performed from the second parameter. Information on the number of reserved games at the start is acquired, and information on the number of remaining short-time games is acquired from the third parameter.

(7) Winning Information Command The parameter field portion of the winning information command is composed of one parameter (first parameter).

  For example, winning detection information such as detection results of the count sensors 53c and 54c is stored in the first parameter of the winning information command.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the winning information command having the above configuration, the winning detection information of the big winning opening is acquired from the first parameter as the analysis result.

(8) Fraud detection related command The parameter field part of the fraud detection related command includes two parameters (a first parameter and a second parameter).

  The first parameter of the fraud detection-related command includes, for example, door opening detection (open / closed detection, closing detection, opening detection), illegal winning detection of the first grand prize opening, illegal winning detection of the second grand prize opening, ordinary electric Stores information such as detection of illegal winnings of a prize. The second parameter stores information such as induction magnetic field detection, magnetic detection, and sensor abnormality detection.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the fraud detection-related command having the above configuration, fraud detection information is acquired from the first parameter and the second parameter as an analysis result.

(9) Payout abnormality-related command The parameter field portion of the payout abnormality-related command is composed of one parameter (first parameter).

  The first parameter of the payout abnormality-related command stores, for example, information such as payout error information and lower pan full information.

  In the sub control circuit 200, when a command analysis process described later is performed on the payout abnormality-related command having the above configuration, payout abnormality information is acquired from the first parameter as an analysis result.

(10) Initialization Command The parameter field part of the initialization command is composed of one parameter (first parameter).

  In the first parameter of the initialization command, for example, information on an initialization factor at the time of power-on such as checksum abnormality, power failure recovery when power failure is not detected, or backup clear is pressed is stored.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when a command analysis process to be described later is performed on the initialization command having the above configuration, initialization factor designation information is acquired from the first parameter as an analysis result.

<Overview of command reception processing and command analysis processing>
Next, an overview of command reception processing and command analysis processing performed when the host control circuit 210 receives the various commands described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an overview of command reception processing in this embodiment. This command reception process is performed as a reception interrupt process in a later-described main / sub command control process (see FIGS. 92 and 103 described later) executed by the host control circuit 210.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the above-described command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71) to the host control circuit 210 and the host control circuit 210 receives the command, first, the host control circuit 210 is received. Writes the received command data in a ring buffer provided in the host control circuit 210. If an error occurs during command reception, the set information of the received command data and error information is written to the ring buffer.

  Here, FIG. 29 shows a schematic configuration of the ring buffer. In the present embodiment, the ring buffer includes a buffer area for storing received command data and a buffer area for storing corresponding error information. The size of each buffer area is 2048 bytes, and an address (“0” to “2047”) is assigned to each 1-byte storage area.

  In the buffer area for storing the command data, the command data is stored for each 1-byte storage area, and the command data is stored in the order of command reception from the head address area of the buffer area. Also in the buffer area for storing error information, error information is stored for each 1-byte storage area, and the error information is stored in the order of command reception from the top address side of the buffer area. At this time, the error information is stored in the storage area of the error information address associated one-to-one with the address of the corresponding command data storage area.

  When a command is received after the command data is stored at the last address “2047” of the ring buffer, the command data is stored in the storage area of the head address “0” of the ring buffer.

  Next, after the command data is stored in the ring buffer described above, the host control circuit 210 transfers the command data stored in the ring buffer to the sub work RAM 210a for storage.

  Then, the host control circuit 210 analyzes the contents of the command stored in the sub work RAM 210a and acquires various types of information. Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines the command type based on the information stored in the command type part of the command, and acquires various information relating to the game and the effect stored in the parameter field part of the command.

  When the command analysis process described above is performed, the following effects can be obtained based on the structural features of the command.

  As described above, among commands such as the demo display command, special symbol effect start command, first power interruption return command, special effect stop command, special symbol start display command, etc. Game status information (game state information) is stored in the first parameter arranged at the head (second byte from the head of the command). Therefore, when these commands are received and the command analysis processing is performed for each byte, the command analysis processing in the second byte from the start of command reception is always the game status regardless of the command type. Since this is an analysis process, the analysis process of the second byte can be shared in the analysis process of these commands. That is, when command analysis processing is performed for these commands, the timing of the game status analysis processing based on the start of the command analysis processing is the same for any command, and the game status Analysis processing can also be standardized. In this case, the efficiency of command analysis processing in the host control circuit 210 can be improved, and more advanced presentation control can be performed.

  Further, in the command analysis process for the command having the above-described configuration, the constant 0 area provided in the predetermined bit area in each parameter is checked, the valid range of each data stored in the parameter is checked, and the stored data By checking these combinations, it is possible to determine whether the command is valid. In this case, since the number of check items in the determination process increases, it is possible to more accurately determine the validity of the received command, and it is possible to provide a safer game for the player.

<Animation request construction method>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 210 in the sub-control circuit 200 controls various effects when the display device 13 is controlled based on various commands received from the main control circuit 70. Processing for generating a command signal (request) for operating the effect device (including the display device 13) (hereinafter referred to as animation request construction processing) is performed.

[Overview of animation request construction process]
First, the outline of the animation request construction process and the outline of various effects control operations performed by the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation at the time of constructing an animation request and the overall operation flow of effect control performed by the sub control circuit 200.

  When the host control circuit 210 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70, as shown in FIG. 30, first, based on the received command, an object for generating a request referred to as an animation request including designation information of effect contents. (Hereinafter referred to as an animation object).

  Note that “object” (processing information) in this specification is a concept that abstracts the target of a procedure of a program in a broad sense, and is a set of one or a plurality of processes in this embodiment. Specifically, the “object” in this embodiment is a set of commands for invoking a process (designation of a name that triggers execution, a call, and an execution start process), and the structure has one or more variables. The call ID (name etc. for specifying the process) of the process to be included and executed for each variable is registered. In the “object”, the processing registered in each variable is executed by executing such a structure. In addition, since the “object” is the name of the structure, the ID that can specify the structure, or the structure itself, the “object” is not limited to the structure, but by grouping one or a plurality of processes. This means that it includes a name, ID, process, storage information, etc. that can manage the execution order of processes.

  In recent years, software is managed in units of objects, and software is constructed by combining a plurality of objects. In this case, when using an object that already exists, it is not necessary to know the details of its internal structure and operating principle, and if a message (identification command, argument, etc.) is sent to the object from outside, the function of the object is activated. Can be made to.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 generates an animation request based on the animation object (using the animation object). Then, the host control circuit 210 generates various requests (production start request) such as a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and an accessory request based on the generated animation request.

  Thereafter, the host control circuit 210 outputs the generated requests to the control circuit (controller) of the corresponding rendering device. Specifically, the host control circuit 210 outputs a sound request and a lamp request to the sound / LED control circuit 220 and outputs a drawing request to the display control circuit 230.

  Then, the sound / LED control circuit 220 controls the sound reproduction operation by the speaker group 10 based on the input sound request. Also, the sound / LED control circuit 220 controls a light emission effect (LED animation) operation by the lamp (LED) group 20 based on the input lamp request. The display control circuit 230 controls the image display effect operation by the display device 13 based on the input drawing request.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the output mode of the accessory request generated by the host control circuit 210 changes according to the contents of effects by various movable accessories.

  For example, in the case where the content of the effect by the movable accessory is content that needs to shorten the execution cycle of the effect control (when it is necessary to control the effect operation of the movable accessory relatively finely), FIG. As shown, the accessory request generated by the host control circuit 210 is output to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (first output mode). Further, for example, when the content of the effect by the movable accessory is a content that does not require the execution cycle of the effect control to be shortened (when it is not necessary to finely control the effect operation of the movable accessory), FIG. Although not shown, the accessory request generated by the host control circuit 210 is passed between the processes related to the accessory control performed in the host control circuit 210 (second output mode).

  At this time, if the content of the effect by the movable accessory includes only the content that needs to shorten the execution cycle of the effect control, the accessory request is output only in the first output mode described above. Further, when the content of the effect by the movable accessory includes only the content that does not need to shorten the execution cycle of the effect control, the accessory request is output only in the second output mode described above. In addition, if the contents of the effect by the movable accessory include both contents that need to shorten the execution cycle of the effect control and contents that do not need to shorten the execution cycle of the effect control, The request is output in both the first output mode and the second output mode described above.

  When the accessory request is output (delivered) from the host control circuit 210 to the voice / LED control circuit 220, the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the role request based on the input accessory request. The production operation by the object group 30 is controlled. In addition, when the accessory request is passed between the processes related to the accessory control performed in the host control circuit 210, the host control circuit 210 performs the operation according to the accessory group 30 based on the generated accessory request. Control the production operation.

[Type of animation object]
Here, various animation objects generated (used) in the animation request construction process will be described. In the animation request construction process of the present embodiment, basically, an animation object called an effect object and an animation object called a holding object are generated, and an animation request is generated using these two animation objects.

  The effect object is an animation object generated according to the received command. For example, an animation object (object name “Demo”, identification command “80H”: hereinafter referred to as a demo object) generated when a demo display command is received, or an animation object (object name “HendoTz01” generated when a special symbol effect start command is received. ", Identification command" 81H ": hereinafter referred to as a variable object), and the like are examples of effect objects.

  Note that, after the lottery process, only one effect object described above is generated with a priority on later arrival for each command reception. That is, a plurality of effect objects described above are not generated simultaneously, and the effect object is overwritten each time a command is received. In addition, since the reception command is called one by one, the object is generated based on the first-come-first-served basis. The generated object overwrites the object generated based on the first received command. Therefore, it is referred to herein as “late arrival priority”. In the present embodiment, when an object is generated based on the last received command, the object generated based on the first received command may be discarded.

  The hold object (object name “Horyu”) is an animation object generated at the time of activation. In the hold object, processing for displaying the current hold state on the screen is performed. Further, the pending object is basically an object (one of resident objects) that is not discarded during activation. However, when a simple mode object described later is generated, the suspended object is also discarded.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the animation object, for example, an animation object with an object name “SimpleMode” (hereinafter referred to as a simple mode object) or an animation object with an object name “InitAnm” is generated in the animation request construction process. Is used. The simple mode object will be described in detail later.

  The animation object with the object name “InitAnm” is a command generated in the sub-board 202 at the time of start-up or when an RTC (Real Time Clock) error occurs (for example, a time setting screen call command, a time change is executed on the time setting screen) And the time setting screen display process. When the host control circuit 210 receives a command from the main control circuit 70 and another effect object is generated, the animation object with the object name “InitAnm” is discarded.

[Various processes executed on animation objects]
Next, an outline of various processes performed in the animation object described above will be described. The animation object basically includes an initialization process, a main process, and an end process. In the effect object generated in response to the received command, the command receiving process is further included in the animation object. Then, depending on the game situation, a predetermined process is called and executed from among these various processes included in the animation object.

  The initialization process is a process executed only once at the start of object generation. In the initialization processing, for example, processing such as initialization of an object and acquisition of a lottery result is performed. The main process is a process executed for each frame (with an FPS (Frames per Second) cycle) during object generation. In the main process, processing such as generation and setting of an animation request is performed. Note that at the start of object generation, initialization processing and main processing are executed in the same frame. The termination process is a process that is executed only once when the object is discarded. In the end processing, processing such as the end of reproduction of unnecessary effects is performed. The command reception timing is a process that is executed only once when a command is received. This command reception process is used, for example, when performing animation control based on a hold addition command or a hold subtraction command.

  Here, an example of the flow of the animation request construction process using the animation object described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a process flow of an animation object during an animation request construction process performed when a demonstration display command is received. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a process flow of an animation object during an animation request construction process performed when a special symbol effect start command is received after the demonstration display command. 31 and 32, in order to simplify the description, a main / sub-command control process, a command analysis process, and an animation request construction process in the flow of the main process performed by the host control circuit 210 (see FIG. 92 described later). Only the flow part that loops as many as the number of received commands is shown.

  In the animation request construction process at the time of receiving a demo display command, a demo object initialization process, a demo object command reception process, a pending object command reception process, and a demo object main process are executed in this order. The demo object is generated in the initialization process of the demo object. Also, the command reception process of the demo object and the command reception process of the hold object are called and executed with the identification command “80H” as an argument. In the main process of the demo object, an animation request is generated.

  Next, when a special symbol effect start command is received after the demo display command, a demo object end process, a variable object initialization process, a variable object command reception process, a pending object command reception process, and a variable object main process Are executed in this order. In the demo object termination process, the demo object generated at this point is discarded. In the initialization process of the variable object, a variable object is generated. The variable object command reception process and the pending object command reception process are called and executed with the identification command “81H” as an argument. In the main process of the variable object, an animation request is generated. This main process is performed until the next command is received.

  The pending object command reception process is executed regardless of the command type, but the processing content (processing result) differs depending on the number of pending objects, the game status, and the like when the pending object is executed.

[Simple mode object]
The simple mode object (specific processing information) is an object generated in the simple screen state, and simple screen display processing is performed in the simple mode object. The simple mode object is basically when the power interruption return command (identification command “D1H”) is received, and the internal control state (the variation of the identification symbol) included in the received power interruption recovery command (see FIG. 25). It is generated only when the information on the display) is in the special symbol variation state. That is, the simple mode object is generated when a power interruption occurs during the special symbol fluctuation display, and then the power interruption is restored. However, in this embodiment, since the presence / absence of the simple screen state is checked every frame, if the simple screen state occurs, a simple mode object is generated.

  In this embodiment, when a simple mode object is generated, all objects (including resident objects such as a hold object) generated at that time are terminated (discarded).

  When the power interruption return command is received (at the time of activation) and the internal control state is the special symbol fluctuation state, the host control circuit 210 generates an animation request based on the simple mode object, Various requests described above are generated based on the animation request. In this embodiment, when the drawing request generated based on the simple mode object is output from the host control circuit 210 to the display control circuit 230, the display control circuit 230 returns to the power interruption based on the drawing request. An animation (including a moving image and a still image) for notifying information about the image is created, and the animation is displayed on the display device 13.

  In the present embodiment, when a simple mode object is generated, a new object is not generated until the simple mode object ends. In other words, other effect objects other than the simple mode object are not generated during the simple screen state. Then, the simple mode object ends when a command related to a variable stop (such as a variable stop command or a command indicating a jackpot) is transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the simple mode object is generated in the power failure recovery process executed when the internal control state is the special symbol variation state (the identification information variation display state). , Power interruption recovery can be performed quickly.

  In the present embodiment, when the simple mode object is generated, it is determined whether or not the received power interruption return command includes information indicating that the internal control state (information regarding the variation display of the identification symbol) is the special symbol variation state. To do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power interruption recovery process can be performed in consideration of the consistency of the gaming state before the power interruption detection and after the power interruption recovery.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, each time the host control circuit 210 receives a command, only one object is generated with priority on the last arrival (the object is overwritten), but there is a simple mode object. When new, no new object is created. Therefore, the consistency of the object generated by the host control circuit 210 based on the received command is also ensured.

  Further, in this embodiment, when power is restored, information indicating that power is restored is notified by the display device 13 based on the animation request generated by the simple mode object. Accordingly, even a gaming machine that does not have a function of playing back from the middle can be restored to the power interruption without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the end timing of the simple mode object is when the command related to the change stop is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the host control circuit 210. Therefore, for example, even when a power interruption is detected during a change and then the power is restored, for example, the display type 13 at the end of the simple mode object indicates that the animation type after the power interruption is a power interruption. Execution of an unnatural effect such that an effect different from the type of animation during the fluctuation before detection is executed, or the same effect as the effect before the power interruption return is executed again from the beginning. As a result, even in an abnormal state such as when power is restored, it is possible to suppress the generation of effects that give the player a sense of incongruity, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Outline of drawing control method>
Next, an outline of a drawing process executed by the display control circuit 230 when a drawing request is output from the host control circuit 210 to the display control circuit 230 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) during the rendering process.

  In this embodiment, data (compressed data) of an image (moving image and / or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 13 is stored in the CGROM 206 in the CGROM substrate 204. When a drawing request is input to the display control circuit 230, the display control circuit 230 first reads and decodes (decompresses) the compressed image data from the CGROM 206. At this time, when moving image compressed data is read, the moving image compressed data is decoded by the moving image decoder 234 in the display control circuit 230, and when still image compressed data is read, the display control circuit 230 The still image decoder 235 decodes still image compressed data.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 writes the decoding result (image decompression data) of the image data in a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In the present embodiment, a movie buffer, a texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 250 (external RAM), or a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 237 is designated as the texture source. For example, when displaying one moving image, the expanded moving image data (decoding result) is written to the movie buffer in the SDRAM 250. For example, when displaying one still image, the expanded still image data is written to a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 237.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 designates a rendering target for writing out the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 250 (external RAM), a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237, or the like can be designated.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 operates the rendering engine 241 to perform rendering processing on the decoding result of the image data written to the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. In this process, a rendering process is performed according to designation information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 240) such as enlargement / reduction or rotation of a moving image.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 displays the rendering result (display output data) written to the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 13.

  In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets (see FIGS. 111 to 113 described later). When the rendering result is written from the rendering engine 241 to the frame buffer, the frame buffer in which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when a rendering result is written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written in the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written in one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result writing process to one frame buffer and the rendering result writing process to the other frame buffer are executed alternately for each frame.

  In the rendering result writing process and display process described above, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 in the next frame (one side). The function of the frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). The rendering result written to the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in this embodiment, the rendering result display process in one frame buffer and the rendering result display process in the other frame buffer are alternately switched for each frame and executed.

<Outline of audio playback control method>
Next, an outline of a sound reproduction process executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 when a sound request is output from the host control circuit 210 to the sound / LED control circuit 220 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation of the audio / LED control circuit 220 during the audio reproduction process.

  In the present embodiment, sound data output to the speaker group 10 is stored in the CGROM 206. When a sound request is input to the sound / LED control circuit 220, the sound / LED control circuit 220 specifies an access number based on the sound request, and reads access data associated with the access number from the CGROM 206.

  In the present embodiment, the sound request includes not only the access number but also various sequence playback control commands (for example, start, stop, loop, etc. of audio playback) necessary for the audio playback processing generated in the sub-board 202. Command).

  Then, the audio / LED control circuit 220 performs audio reproduction processing based on the read access data. At this time, in this embodiment, sound reproduction control is performed by simple access control. Here, “simple access control” refers to a plurality of command register sequences in which the voice / LED control circuit 220 is registered in the CGROM 206 (external ROM) based on a sound request transmitted from the host control circuit 210. It is a control method for setting all at once. The number of simple access controls that can be executed simultaneously by the voice / LED control circuit 220 depends on the number of execution systems (four in this embodiment).

  FIG. 35 shows a schematic configuration of access data. As shown in FIG. 35, the access data includes a plurality of set information of setting data and addresses arranged in a predetermined order. A simple access end code (code indicating the end of audio reproduction) is placed at the end of the access data. ) Is stored. As shown in FIG. 34, when a plurality of access data is associated with one access number, a simple access end code is provided only for the last access data.

  When the setting data is set to the corresponding address for the access data having such a configuration, a reproduction code corresponding to the setting data is executed, and audio reproduction is performed. Then, this playback code execution process is sequentially performed from the setting data on the head side in the access data to the end, and when the simple access end code is finally set, the audio playback operation based on the read access data is completed. To do.

<Various drive control methods for lamps (LEDs)>
Next, when a lamp request is output from the host control circuit 210 to the sound / LED control circuit 220, the contents of various drive control processes for a plurality of LEDs included in the lamp group 20 executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 Will be described. In the lamp control method of the present embodiment described below, an LED is described as an example of the light emitting element, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present embodiment is also applied to other arbitrary light emitting elements. The lamp control method can be similarly applied.

[Outline of LED control]
First, an overview of a control method when driving (lighting / extinguishing) the LED provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a signal flow diagram during LED driving (lighting / extinguishing).

  When the LED is driven (turned on / off), first, a lamp request (LED control request) is output from the host control circuit 210 in the sub-control circuit 200 to the sound / LED control circuit 220. In the present embodiment, the presentation control process (sub control main process shown in FIG. 92 described later) of the host control circuit 210 is performed at a predetermined FPS cycle (for example, about 33 msec), so the sound / LED control circuit 220 is used. The lamp request transmission process is also performed at a predetermined FPS cycle.

  Next, when a lamp request is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets LED data (drive data) for setting an LED lighting pattern (LED animation) based on the lamp request. ) Is transmitted to each LED driver 280 (light emission drive means, effect drive means) in the lamp group 20. At this time, LED data is transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280 by the SPI communication method. The LED data transmission process from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280 is performed at a cycle of about 12 msec.

  Then, the LED driver 280 turns on / off the connected LED 281 (light emitting means) in a predetermined pattern based on the received LED data. As a result, an effect operation based on LED animation is executed.

  Note that the light emission mode based on the LED data is controlled by a signal (control signal) generated based on the LED data transmitted from the LED driver 280 to the LED 281 and capable of controlling the light emission mode. Specifically, the LED 281 is turned on, turned off, blinked, and the light emission mode is changed according to electrical waveform parameters (voltage value, current value, pulse width duty ratio, etc.) of the signal transmitted from the LED driver 280 to the LED 281. Is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which a signal generated based on LED data is used as a “control signal based on drive data” for driving the LED 281, but the present invention is not limited to this. The “control signal based on drive data” when driving the LED 281 may be a transfer mode of LED data (drive data) or data generated based on the LED data. Here, “data generated based on LED data” includes a signal, a command, and a voltage change. In this case, the control means that has received the LED data drives the other control means. A control signal based on data or drive data is transmitted.

[Voice / LED control circuit and connection configuration between LEDs]
Next, a connection configuration between the sound / LED control circuit 220 and each LED 281 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED 281.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the audio / LED control circuit 220 uses a physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and a physical system 1 (SPI channel 1) as LED data output systems (SPI channels). use. A plurality of LED drivers (devices) 280 are connected in parallel to each physical system via an SPI bus. In the example shown in FIG. 37, 16 LED drivers 280 (device 0 to device 15) are connected in parallel to each physical system.

  Each LED driver 280 is provided with a plurality of output ports (hereinafter simply referred to as “ports”) in which LED data is set, and one LED 281 is connected to each port (connection unit). That is, in this embodiment, the LED 281 is an LED 281 that is statically controlled. In the present specification, the statically controlled LED 281 is referred to as a static LED 281.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, each LED driver 280 (each device) is provided with 16 ports (port 0 to port 15). That is, 16 LEDs 281 are connected to each LED driver 280 (each device). In the present embodiment, 16 LEDs 281 are connected to each LED driver 280. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each LED driver is according to the function and specification of the LED driver 280 (device). Eight, thirty-two, sixty-four, etc. LEDs 281 may be connected to 280.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIG. 37, at the time of activation, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets various parameters relating to the connection configuration of the LEDs 281 for each SPI channel. Specifically, the voice / LED control circuit 220, at startup, uses the number of devices used in each SPI (the number of LED drivers 280 connected to each SPI channel), the LED 281 start port, the LED 281 end port, and the LED driver. A start address of 280 is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 37, “16” is set for the number of devices used for SPI, “0” is set for the start port, “15” is set for the end port, and “0” is set for the start address. The start address of the LED driver 280 is set as appropriate for each SPI channel, and is not limited to “0”.

  When various parameters relating to the connection configuration of the LED 281 are set as described above, for example, the address of the LED 281 connected to the port 15 of the device 15 (LED driver) connected to the SPI channel 0 in FIG. , Device number = 15 and port number = 15.

  Here, the connection configuration between the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a connection configuration diagram between the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280.

  Since the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280 are connected by the SPI bus (signal wiring means) as described above, the serial clock (SCL) signal wiring (in the physical channel (SPI channel)) ( Timing signal lines) and signal wiring (data signal lines) for serial data (SDO, SDI) are provided as separate wirings. In each physical system (SPI channel) of the sound / LED control circuit 220 (master), the output terminals (SCL_P *, SCL_N *: “*”) of the serial clock signal (timing signal) of the sound / LED control circuit 220 are 1 or 2) is connected to the input terminal (SCL_P, SCL_N) of the serial clock signal of each LED driver 280 (slave). The output terminals (SDO_P *, SDO_N *) of the serial data (transmission data including drive data) of the audio / LED control circuit 220 are connected to the serial data input terminals (SDI_P, SDI_N) of each LED driver 280. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the voice / LED control circuit 220 (master) continues to transmit data between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280, and each LED driver 280 (slave) is sent. Received data unilaterally. At this time, each LED driver 280 detects the rising edge of the serial data and starts inputting the serial data to the internal shift register.

[Configuration of serial data]
FIG. 39 shows the configuration (format) of serial data transmitted from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, “1” (specific data) is continuously stored in an area of 16 bits or more at the beginning of serial data. Therefore, when the LED driver 280 continuously detects reception of “1” 16 times or more, the LED driver 280 enters a serial data input standby state.

  The storage area of the device address (the address of the LED driver 280) and the storage area of the register address are arranged in this order after the storage area (first data portion) of “1” of 16 bits or more in the serial data. . The device address (output destination information) storage area (second data portion) and the register address storage area are each composed of an 8-bit (1 byte) area.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, “0” (predetermined data) is stored in the storage area of the first bit of the device address. Therefore, if the LED driver 280 receives and detects “0” after continuously detecting “1” 16 times or more, the LED driver 280 indicates a signal (output destination designation signal) corresponding to the device address. It will be in a standby state.

  In addition, after the register address storage area in the serial data, the LED data storage area (third data section) is arranged, and the serial data transmission end is terminated in the last storage area of the serial data. “0FFH” (FF) shown is arranged. This “0FFH” is composed of a storage area of 8 bits (1 byte), and “1” is stored in each bit area.

[Configuration and operation overview of LED driver]
Next, an example of the internal configuration of the LED driver 280 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic internal configuration diagram of the LED driver 280.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the LED driver 280 includes a digital control unit 280a, an I / O unit 280b, an ISET unit 280c, a terminal group 280d, and a port group 280e.

  Based on the signals received via the terminal group 280d and the I / O unit 280b, the digital control unit 280a outputs a drive signal (lighting / extinguishing signal) to the LED 281 connected to its own LED driver 280.

  The ISET unit 280c is a functional unit provided to prevent an excessive current from flowing through the LED 281. The ISET unit 280c forcibly stops (turns off) the operation of the LED driver 280 when an excessive current is detected.

  The terminal group 280d includes a serial clock signal input terminal (SCL), a serial data input terminal (SDI), a serial data output terminal (SDO), a signal format selection terminal (IFMODE), and an output enable terminal (OE). A plurality of device address selection terminals (DA0 to DA5) and an error flag output terminal (XERR). In FIG. 40, for simplification of description, two input terminals “SCL_P” and “SCL_N” of the serial clock signal shown in FIG. 38 are shown as one input terminal “SCL”, and the serial clock signal shown in FIG. Two input terminals “SDI_P” and “SDI_N” of data are indicated by one input terminal “SDI”.

  In this embodiment, since the LED driver 280 is an SPI driver, each of the serial clock signal input terminal (SCL), the serial data input terminal (SDI), and the serial data output terminal (SDO). It is possible to communicate with the outside through the three connected communication wires. At this time, the LED driver 280 (slave) performs input / output control of serial data based on the serial clock signal input from the master (audio / LED control circuit 220).

  In this embodiment, as described above, serial data is unilaterally transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280 between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280. Therefore, in this embodiment, when serial data is transmitted and received between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280, the serial clock signal input terminal of the LED driver 280 among the three communication wirings. (SCL) and a communication wiring connected to the serial data input terminal (SDI) are used.

  Here, FIG. 41 shows an outline of the operation when 1-bit data is input to each input terminal (SDI_P, SDI_N, SCL_P, SCL_N) in the LED driver 280.

  In this embodiment, when “0” is input to the input terminal SDI_P of the LED driver 280 and “1” is input to the input terminal SDI_N, as shown in FIG. “0” is input to a digital circuit (for example, a digital control unit 280a described later). When “1” is input to the input terminal SDI_P of the LED driver 280 and “0” is input to the input terminal SDI_N, “1” is input to the digital circuit inside the LED driver 280. When the 1-bit data input to the input terminal SDI_P and the input terminal SDI_N of the LED driver 280 is the same (when “0” or “1” is input to both input terminals), the LED driver In the digital circuit inside 280, the previous input value is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the relationship between the combination of 1-bit data input to each of the input terminal SCL_P and the input terminal SCL_N of the LED driver 280 and the input value input to the internal digital circuit is also described above. The same as that of the input terminal SDI_P and the input terminal SDI_N.

  In the signal format selection terminal (IFMODE), a predetermined interface can be selected from a differential interface having a different logic operation method in SDI and SCL and an interface in the single end mode. The output enable terminal (OE) is a terminal that enables lighting / non-lighting of all the LEDs 281 by an external terminal. Specifically, by setting the signal level of the output enable terminal (OE) to a high level, the output of the LED driver 280 can be turned on, and by setting the signal level of the output enable terminal (OE) to a low level. The output of the LED driver 280 can be turned off.

  The device address of the LED driver 280 is set in the plurality of device address selection terminals (DA0 to DA5). When the serial data is read into the shift register in the LED driver 280, a device address (device address information input from the voice / LED control circuit 220) designated by the serial data output destination includes a plurality of device addresses. Serial data is read when it matches the address set in the device address selection terminals (DA0 to DA5). The device address determination process is performed by the digital control unit 280a.

  Here, FIG. 42 shows a table summarizing the address setting mode of the LED driver 280.

  In the present embodiment, two types of modes, a device control mode and a bus control mode, are provided as address setting modes of the LED driver 280. The bus control mode is a mode in which serial data is read regardless of data (device addresses) set in a plurality of device address selection terminals (DA0 to DA5).

  When the device address of the LED driver 280 is set in the device control mode, the data “a0” to “a5” defined in “Bit0” to “Bit5” in FIG. 42 are the device address selection terminals (DA0). ~ Set to the device address selection terminal (DA5). 42. Data “a0” to “a5” defined in “Bit0” to “Bit5” in FIG. 42 change according to the device address of the LED driver 280. Further, it can be determined from the data defined in “Bit 6” in FIG. 42 whether the currently set address setting mode is the bus control mode or the device control mode.

  The error flag output terminal (XERR) is a terminal from which an error flag value “1” is output when an abnormality is detected. The error flag output operation from the error flag output terminal (XERR) is performed only during the abnormality detection period, and when the error flag value “1” is output, the LED driver 280 automatically returns.

  The error flag value “1” output from the error flag output terminal (XERR) is stored in the register. Further, while the error flag value “1” is output from the error flag output terminal (XERR), the register of the LED driver 280 is latched (holds the state). When the register becomes readable, the error is canceled and “0” is output from the error flag output terminal (XERR) to the register.

  The port group 280e is composed of a plurality of ports (48 in the example shown in FIG. 40), and one LED 281 is connected to each port. 40, the red component LED 281 is connected to the port “OUTR *” (“*” is 0 to 15), and the green component LED 281 is connected to the port “OUTG *”. The blue component LED 281 is connected to “*”.

  In the present embodiment, one color is emitted by the red component LED 281, the green component LED 281, and the blue component LED 281 connected to the adjacent ports “OUTR *”, “OUTG *”, and “OUTB *”, respectively. To. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, As a kind of LED connected to the port of LED driver 280, besides LED kind which light-emits one color using LED281 of each color component of three primary colors, You may provide LED for exclusive use of monochromatic light emission separately.

  Here, FIG. 43 shows a table summarizing the relationship among the physical system (SPI channel) to which the LED 281 is connected, the device address of the LED driver 280, and the output terminal of the LED driver 280. 43 uses two physical systems (physical system 0 and physical system 1) as the physical system, the number of LED drivers 280 connected to each physical system is 16, and each LED driver 280 This is a configuration example when the number of LEDs 281 connected to is 48.

[LED data]
Next, the configuration of LED data (LED data set for each port) output from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280 (LED 281) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the format (data type and format) of LED data.

  The LED data includes reproduction time (lighting time), red component luminance data (light emission data), green component luminance data, and blue component luminance data, and is set for each port. The LED data is stored in the CGROM 206. Further, the data length (number of bytes) of the reproduction time is 2 bytes, and the data length of the luminance data of each color component is 1 byte.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, a data area called “alignment” of 1 byte is also provided in the LED data, but this is provided in order to make the data length (number of bytes) of the LED data an even number of bytes. Adjustment area.

  The value specified in the column of the reproduction time (lighting time) is not a time value, but a cycle of LED data transmission processing from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280 (about 12 msec), that is, voice / LED. This is a value when the period of the interrupt process for the LED driver 280 of the control circuit 220 is “1”. For example, when “12” is set as the reproduction time (lighting time), the actual lighting time of the LED is about 144 msec (about 12 msec × 12). Further, when “0” is set in the reproduction time (lighting time) in the LED data, this means that the output of the LED data ends (the end of the predetermined LED animation), and the LED data corresponds to the corresponding LED 281. When output, the production operation by a series of LED animations ends.

  The method for defining the reproduction time (lighting time) in the LED data is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 44, and the time value of the reproduction time (lighting time) may be defined. Also in this case, a value that is an integral multiple of the interrupt processing period (about 12 msec) for the LED driver 280 of the audio / LED control circuit 220 is defined in the LED data. If a value other than an integer multiple of the interrupt processing period (about 12 msec) is specified in the column of the reproduction time (lighting time) in the LED data due to a calculation failure or the like, the period (about 12 msec) The portion exceeding the integer multiple is rounded down. For example, when the interrupt processing period is 12 msec and 55 msec is defined in the reproduction time (lighting time) column, the value in the reproduction time (lighting time) column is rewritten to 48 msec.

  An integer value in the range of “0” (light off) to “255” is set in the luminance data of each color component. Note that, as in this embodiment, the LED data includes the luminance data of the red component, the luminance data of the green component, and the luminance data of the blue component, so that full-color light emission is performed with the red LED, the blue LED, and the green LED. In addition to the case where the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are used as a single color LED, it is possible to cope with the case.

  The luminance data “244” and “255” are “0xFF” and “0xFE” in hexadecimal (HEX), respectively. When the luminance data of the red, green, and blue components is “0xFE”, the LED 281 is lit white. When the luminance data of the red, green, and blue components is “0xFF”, the luminance data is luminance data of “transparency definition”, and the lighting mode of “transparency definition” is the generation (synthesis) of LED data described later. The method will be described. Further, when the luminance data of the red, green, and blue components is “0”, the LED 281 is turned off, and these luminance data are referred to as “light-off data”.

  Here, an example of LED data output control processing for a static LED will be described with reference to FIG. 45 shows an example in which one LED driver 280 is connected with one red LED, one blue LED, and one green LED. In this example, the reproduction time (lighting time) in the LED data is “12” (about 144 msec), and the red luminance data, the green luminance data, and the blue luminance data are each “0xFE”. Will be explained. In this LED data, white lighting is performed by three LEDs, a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED.

  When the above-described LED data is input to the LED driver 280, the LED driver 280 refers to information on a control part (port information of each port) described later, and corresponds to the type of the LED 281 connected from the LED data. The luminance data to be referred to is referred to, and a drive signal corresponding to the luminance data is output to the LED 281. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 45, only the red luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the red LED connected to port 0, and the red LED corresponds to the red luminance data “0xFE”. Illuminates for about 144 msec with a brightness of approx. At this time, only the blue luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the blue LED connected to the port 1, and the blue LED has a luminance corresponding to the blue luminance data “0xFE” at about 144 msec. Lights for a while. Further, at this time, only the green luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the green LED connected to the port 2, and the green LED has a luminance corresponding to the green luminance data “0xFE” and is about 144 msec. Lights for a while.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, when performing the light-off operation, “0” is set in the luminance data of each color.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the LED data output to the LED driver 280 has at least a luminance value of each color (red, blue, green) component and has a data form that can specify the light emission mode. Then, when the LED data is output from the LED driver 280 to the plurality of LEDs 281 connected thereto, the luminance data of the color component corresponding to its own emission color in the LED data is output to each LED 281 (each LED 281 , Only the luminance data of the corresponding color component in the LED data is referred to).

  When a plurality of LEDs 281 are controlled to be emitted by a single LED driver 280 using the LED data having such a configuration, even if the plurality of LEDs are LEDs 281 having different emission colors, the luminance value (data) of each LED 281 is obtained. Since it becomes easy to grasp | ascertain, the synthetic | combination process of the luminescent color by several LED281 is easy. In addition, since the processing related to the synthesis of the light emission color at this time can be executed by the LED driver 280 in which the LED data is set, complicated LED light emission control can be easily executed, which is more advanced than using the LED 281. Production control (LED animation control) can be easily executed.

  In this embodiment, the configuration of LED data output to the LED driver 280 is the same regardless of the type of the LED 281 connected to the LED driver 280. Therefore, the LED data used in the predetermined LED driver 280 is also used in the other LED drivers 280 with respect to other LED drivers 280 that perform the same light emission mode (light emission color) as that in the predetermined LED driver 280 (LED data). Can be made common). In this case, the LED data can be shared, and the processing related to the lighting operation of the LED 281 can also be shared.

  The effect of such common use of LED data and lighting operation processing is important when full color lighting is performed using a red LED, a green LED, and a blue LED connected to one LED driver 280, that is, emission distribution of each color is important. This is particularly noticeable when executing LED light emission control, which is a difficult parameter. Therefore, in this embodiment, the light emission control of the full color LED can also be easily performed.

  The “format of LED data (driving data)” referred to in this specification is not limited to the data format including the luminance data of the plurality of types of color components and the data relating to the lighting time. For example, the data format of the luminance data includes a data format used when generating the luminance data, a data format when stored in the CGROM 206, and the like. Even when the luminance data stored in the CGROM 206 is a variable, a group of variables, or data that does not have a data format format by compression processing or file format conversion processing, When a variable, a group of variables (structure) or data is used as a group of luminance data, the variable, group of variables (structure) or data is used as a data format for luminance data. Can be recognized. Therefore, the “LED data (drive data) format” as used in the present specification is meant to include the data format of these luminance data.

[LED data generation (synthesis) method]
Next, a method of generating (combining) LED data performed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 will be described. In this embodiment, the voice / LED control circuit 220 can output the predetermined LED data read from the CGROM 206 to the LED driver 280 (port) as it is, but reads a plurality of LED data from the CGROM 206 and outputs the LED data. The function is also provided to synthesize and output to the corresponding port.

  In order to realize this function, the voice / LED control circuit 220 is provided with a plurality of channels for each port for reading each of the plurality of LED data and performing various processes. Specifically, in the voice / LED control circuit 220, eight channels (first channel to eighth channel) in which LED data can be set are provided for each port.

  And in this embodiment, the execution priority of LED data is predetermined for every channel, and when LED data is set to a plurality of channels, according to the execution priority (based on, (Or correspondingly), LED data set to a port in the LED driver 280 is determined. In the present embodiment, the first channel is the channel with the lowest LED data execution priority, and the LED data execution priority is set so that the execution priority increases as the channel number increases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the eighth channel is the channel with the highest execution priority. In the present embodiment, the eighth channel is set as a dedicated channel when an error occurs. The “LED data execution priority” set for each channel in this specification is a priority when LED data (driving data) is output, used, set, set, loaded, or the like.

  For example, when LED data (luminance data) is set in the second, fourth, and sixth channels for a predetermined port in the LED driver 280, the execution priority order of these channels is set. The highest LED data of the sixth channel is output (set) from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to a predetermined port in the LED driver 280 as a synthesis result.

  The LED data read to the channel is stored in a channel registration buffer (storage means) together with data table information to be described later. Specifically, when a lamp request (LED control request) is input from the host control circuit 210 to the voice / LED control circuit 220, the voice / LED control circuit 220 stores the lamp request in the CGROM 206 based on the lamp request. The obtained data table information and the LED data associated therewith are acquired. The data table information includes channel information for setting the read LED data, and the audio / LED control circuit 220 reads the read LED data and data into the registration buffer of the channel specified by the data table information. Overwrite table information and store. However, when the read LED data is stored (overwritten) in the registration buffer, it is determined whether to overwrite the LED data in the registration buffer based on the execution priority of the LED data set in the channel. Done. The contents of the data table information will be described in detail later.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the read LED data and the data table information are overwritten and stored in the registration buffer has been described. However, information (light emission control) that can specify LED data and data table information as shown in FIG. The information corresponding to the information) may be overwritten and stored in the registration buffer. In this case, the LED data and the data table information are acquired from a storage area different from the registration buffer (when the storage area and the registration buffer are physically divided in the same storage medium). In addition, the LED data and the data table information may be controlled to be acquired from the storage areas of physically different storage media based on the information stored in the registration buffer.

  The “information corresponding to the light emission control information” is not limited to information including the LED control ID shown in FIG. 48 to be described later (information for specifying the light emission control information). Can be adopted. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission control information itself (LED data and data table information) may be adopted as information corresponding to the light emission control information.

  Here, a lighting mode when LED data (luminance data) of “transparency definition” is set will be described. For example, when LED data (luminance data) for red lighting is set in the fourth channel and LED data (luminance data) of “transparency definition” is set in the sixth channel, the fourth channel LED data that lights red is output. That is, when LED data is set for a plurality of channels and LED data of a channel with a low execution priority is to be output with priority, LED data of “transparency definition” is set to a channel with a high execution priority. Set. If LED data for red lighting is set for the 4th channel and “lighting-out data” is set for the 6th channel, “lighting-out data” of the 6th channel with higher execution priority is given priority. And the LED 281 is not lit. For example, when the LED data is set only in the second channel, the fourth channel, and the sixth channel, and the set LED data are all “transparent definition” LED data, the LED 281 emits light. do not do.

  In this embodiment, LED data of “transparency definition” is not set to the channel with the lowest execution priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “transparent” is set to the channel with the lowest execution priority. LED data of “definition” may be set.

  Furthermore, “light-out data” and “transparent definition” data may be handled in the same way, and both data may be handled as “light-out data” or “transparent definition” data. In that case, the configuration for LED control is appropriately changed such that the configuration of the LED data is arbitrarily changed so that the LEDs that can be controlled in each channel do not overlap in advance. When such a configuration is adopted, for example, a game machine that handles only one of “light-off data” and “transparency definition” data can be used.

  In the present embodiment, the “channel” (system) indicates a sequencer channel, and can be expressed such that the sequencer channel sets a value in a variable or a register. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the “channel” may simply indicate, for example, the number of sequencers, or may be playback means (automatic playback function) including a sequencer. Further, a stop channel (a channel for stopping designated audio reproduction) or the like may be included in the “channel”. Furthermore, “channel” is a general term for playback functions that can execute (including start, stop, end, stop, etc.) playback of animations, LED animations, and sounds displayed on the display device 13. It is also a unit for representing the number of data that can be reproduced at the same time (the number of animations).

[LED animation generation method]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lamp group 20 includes a plurality of LEDs 281 as described above. Then, the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs a predetermined effect (LED animation) by turning on / off the plurality of LEDs 281 in various patterns according to the determined effect content. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the LED animation is determined, various LED data necessary for the production is designated.

  In the present embodiment, since a plurality of LEDs 281 are interlocked to produce an effect by a predetermined LED animation, the lighting / extinguishing operations of the plurality of LEDs 281 involved in the predetermined LED animation are collectively managed and controlled. In the following, a port group (LED group) that collectively manages and controls the light emission operations in order to execute LED animation by the voice / LED control circuit 220 is referred to as a “control part”.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the audio / LED control circuit 220 is provided with eight channels (first channel to eighth channel) in which LED data can be set for each LED 281 (port). The control part is also set for each channel. When the voice / LED control circuit 220 executes LED animation, data obtained by combining the LED data of the control part of each channel between the channels is output as LED animation data. In addition, a control part may mutually be the same between channels, and may differ for every channel.

  In addition, the voice / LED control circuit 220 is provided with a sequencer (drive data control means) for each control part for collectively managing and controlling the ON / OFF operation of the LED 281 in the control part set in each channel. It is done.

  Here, an example of generating an LED animation (an example of combining LED data) will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49.

(1) Generation example 1
FIG. 46A and FIG. 46B are diagrams showing an outline of generation and output operations of LED animation when the range of the control part is the same between channels. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 46A and 46B, an example in which a predetermined LED animation is executed using eight LEDs 281 (first LED to eighth LED) will be described. In the example shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, an example in which LED data is set in the sixth to eighth channels among the eight channels will be described.

  Furthermore, in the example illustrated in FIGS. 46A and 46B, an example will be described in which all LEDs 281 (first LED to eighth LED) are set as control parts in each of the sixth channel to the eighth channel. In such a case, predetermined LED data is set in each LED 281 of the sixth channel to the eighth channel.

  Specifically, in the eighth channel, LED data of “red” lighting is set to the first LED and the third LED, and “no data” (light-off data) is set to the other LEDs 281. In the seventh channel, LED data of “green” lighting is set to the first LED to the fifth LED, and “no data” (light-off data) is set to the other LEDs 281. In the sixth channel, LED data of “blue” lighting is set to all the LEDs 281.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46A, when the LED data of the sixth channel to the eighth channel are combined, the LED data of the eighth channel having the highest execution priority is combined with each LED 281 in the control part (all LEDs) as a combination result. Set. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 46B, the same pattern as the lighting pattern of the LED 281 stored in the eighth channel is output as the synthesized LED animation.

(2) Generation example 2
47A and 47B are diagrams showing an outline of generation and output operations of LED animation when the range of the control part is different between channels. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B, an example in which a predetermined LED animation is executed using eight LEDs 281 (first LED to eighth LED) as in Generation Example 1 will be described. In the example shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B, an example in which LED data is set in the sixth channel to the eighth channel among the eight channels, as in the generation example 1, will be described.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B, the control part of the eighth channel is set to the first LED to the third LED, the control part of the seventh channel is set to the first LED to the fifth LED, and the control part of the sixth channel is set. An example in which the control part is set for all the LEDs 281 will be described.

  In the eighth channel, LED data of “red” lighting is set to the first LED and the third LED, and “no data” (light-off data) is set to the second LED. In the seventh channel, LED data of “green” lighting is set to the first LED to the fifth LED. In the sixth channel, LED data of “blue” lighting is set to all the LEDs 281. In the eighth and seventh channels, LED data is not set to the port of the LED 281 that is not designated as the control part.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47A, when the LED data of the 6th channel to the 8th channel are combined, the LED data of the 6th channel to the 8th channel overlap in the 1st LED to the 3rd LED. 8-channel LED data is set as a result of synthesis. In the fourth LED and the fifth LED, the LED data of the seventh channel and the sixth channel overlap, but the LED data of the seventh channel having a high execution priority is set as the synthesis result. Further, in the sixth to eighth LEDs, the LED data is set only for the sixth channel, so the LED data for the sixth channel is set as a synthesis result.

  Therefore, the lighting pattern of the first LED to the third LED in the LED animation after composition is the same as the lighting pattern of the first LED to the third LED of the eighth channel, as shown in FIG. 47B, and the fourth LED and the fifth LED The lighting pattern is the same as the lighting pattern of the fourth LED and the fifth LED of the seventh channel, and the lighting pattern of the sixth LED to the eighth LED is the same as the lighting pattern of the sixth LED to the eighth LED of the sixth channel.

(3) Generation example 3
In the LED animation generation example 3, an example of a procedure for overwriting LED data of each channel will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49A to 49C. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence between each channel and the LED data name (LED control ID) set in each channel. 49A to 49C are flowcharts showing the procedure of overwriting the LED data of each port in the generation example 3.

  In Generation Example 3, as shown in FIGS. 49A to 49C, an LED 281 connected to port A, an LED 281 connected to port B, an LED 281 connected to port C, and an LED 281 connected to port D are A configuration example of the LED group arranged in a rectangular shape will be described. The control part of the first channel is all ports, the control part of the third channel is port A to port C, and the control part of the sixth channel is only port A. In this example, LED data “LED_ID_B” for turning on the LED 281 “blue” is set in the first channel, and LED data “LED_ID_R” for turning on the LED 281 in “red” is set in the third channel. Consider a case where LED data “LED_ID_G” for turning on LED 281 “yellow” is set in a channel.

  When such LED data is synthesized and output by the voice / LED control circuit 220, first, the voice / LED control circuit 220, as shown in FIG. 49A, the LED of the first channel having the lowest execution priority. Data “LED_ID_B” is set to all ports.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49B, the voice / LED control circuit 220 transmits the LED data “LED_ID_R” of the third channel having the next lowest execution priority (higher execution priority than the first channel) to port A to port C. Set to. As a result, in port A to port C, the LED data “LED_ID_R” is overwritten on the LED data “LED_ID_B”.

  Then, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets the LED data “LED_ID_Y” of the sixth channel having the next lowest execution priority (higher execution priority than the third channel) to the port A, as shown in FIG. 49C. . As a result, in the port A, the LED data “LED_ID_Y” is overwritten on the LED data “LED_ID_R”.

  When the LED data overwriting operation is completed, LED data “LED_ID_Y” is set in port A, LED data “LED_ID_R” is set in port B and port C, and LED data “LED_ID_B” is set in port D. Set. As a result, the LED animation in which the LED 281 of the port A is lit yellow, the LED 281 of the port B and the port C is lit red, and the LED 281 of the port D is lit blue is executed.

  Note that the LED data overwriting process is performed based on the execution priority between channels, and therefore the LED data overwriting order is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 49A to 49C, and the LED data overwriting order is arbitrary. is there.

[Playback channels and expansion channels]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has not only a function of executing one LED animation based on one lamp request, but also a function of simultaneously executing two LED animations based on one lamp request. In this embodiment, in order to realize the latter function, each channel is divided into two control parts, one LED animation is executed using one control part, and the other LED is used using the other control part. Run the animation.

  In the following, one control part used when executing one LED animation (ordinary LED animation) based on one lamp request is referred to as a “reproduction channel” and is based on one lamp request. The other control part used when two LED animations are simultaneously executed is referred to as an “extended channel”. Therefore, the processing of various LED animation generation examples described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49 is executed using the playback channel in each channel, and when two LED animations are executed simultaneously, a predetermined process is performed. In the channel, both the reproduction channel (first system) and the extension channel (second system) are used.

  In addition, when two LED animations are executed simultaneously, it is necessary to control the operation of the playback channel and the extension channel separately, so that a sequencer (automatic playback control function) and Registration buffers (first registration buffer and second registration buffer) are provided.

  Here, the outline of the structure of the reproduction channel and the extended channel provided in each channel and the structure of the sequencer associated therewith will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the configuration of the playback channel and the extended channel provided in the eighth channel, and the configuration of the sequencer associated therewith, and FIG. 51 shows the playback channel and the extension channel provided in the seventh channel. It is a figure which shows the structure of an extended channel, and the structure of the sequencer matched with them.

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 50 and 51, an example in which a predetermined LED animation is executed using eight LEDs 281 (first LED to eighth LED) will be described. In this example, two sequencers are provided for each channel. That is, a total of 16 sequencers are provided (for 8 channels). Each sequencer is assigned a sequencer number sequentially from the sequencer of the first channel.

  Therefore, for example, sequencer numbers “0” and “1” are set for the two sequencers of the first channel, and sequencer numbers “6” and “7” are set for the two sequencers of the fourth channel, respectively. The In each channel, the sequencer with the smaller sequencer number of the two sequencers is set as the sequencer used for the playback channel. That is, for example, the sequencer with the sequencer number “0” is used in the playback channel of the first channel, and when the extension channel is set in the first channel, the sequencer with the sequencer number “1” is connected to the extension channel. Used.

  Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 50, in the eighth channel, the control part of the first LED to the fifth LED is controlled as a reproduction channel, and the control part of the remaining LEDs 281 (sixth LED to eighth LED) is controlled as an expansion channel. In this case, the sequencer with the sequencer number “14” (sequencer 14 in the figure: first drive data control means) is used in the reproduction channel, and the sequencer with the sequencer number “15” (sequencer 15 in the figure: second sequencer). Drive data control means) is used in the extension channel. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 51, in the seventh channel, when the control portion of the first LED to the seventh LED is controlled as a reproduction channel and the control portion of the remaining LED 281 (eighth LED) is controlled as an expansion channel. The sequencer with the sequencer number “12” (sequencer 12 in the figure) is used for the reproduction channel, and the sequencer with the sequencer number “13” (sequencer 13 in the figure) is used for the extension channel.

  When two LED animations are executed simultaneously using the playback channel and the extension channel described above, since two sequencers update data for one channel, the LED 281 that overlaps between the playback channel and the extension channel. Is present, it becomes difficult to determine which sequencer is used to control the LED 281. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of overlapping LEDs 281 between the reproduction channel and the extension channel, it is determined which of the control parts of the reproduction channel and the extension channel belongs to all the LEDs 281 to be controlled. Define in advance. That is, the boundary between the control part of the reproduction channel and the control part of the extension channel is defined in advance.

  Note that the boundary between the control part of the reproduction channel and the control part of the extension channel can be arbitrarily set. However, the boundary between the control part of the reproduction channel and the control part of the extension channel is registered in the LED control program at the time of program initialization. Therefore, the position of the boundary cannot be changed during the operation of the LED control program.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a clear function of the playback channel (a function of setting unlit data to each port of the playback channel) when only the playback channel is used, but both the playback channel and the extension channel are provided. When using, the clear function of each channel is not provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, in consideration of the case where both the playback channel and the extension channel are used, clear data (light-off data) for each channel is prepared in advance, and when the playback channel and the extension channel are cleared (LED animation). At the end, the clear data prepared in advance is used.

[Type of LED animation playback method]
In the present embodiment, based on the lamp request (LED control request), the sound / LED control circuit 220 outputs the LED data generated as described above to the lamp (LED) group 20 to generate a predetermined LED animation. Execute. At this time, the predetermined LED animation is executed in accordance with a playback method (information specifying the execution timing and playback mode of the LED animation) specified in the data table information acquired when the lamp request is input. Here, various reproduction methods of the LED animation prepared in this embodiment will be described. The playback method is specified for each channel in each frame of the LED animation (each time a lamp request is received).

In the present embodiment, the following five types of name reproduction methods are prepared.
(1) "SHOT"
(2) “SHOT2”
(3) “LOOP”
(4) “NEXT”
(5) "ODONLY"

  In the present embodiment, as the “reproduction method” information, arbitrary information is adopted as long as it is information that can specify information related to the lighting / extinguishing of the LED 281 such as the lighting manner of the LED 281 and the lighting time of the LED 281. be able to. As a reproduction method, for example, an ID, a numerical value, a symbol or the like that can specify the reproduction method of the LED 281 may be set, and information on the lighting state of the LED 281 may be referred to based on such information, or the reproduction method may be directly selected. The information of the lighting mode of the LED 281 may be set.

  “SHOT” is a playback method in which the set LED animation is played once, and then the lighting state of the last frame (LED lighting pattern at the end of the LED animation) is maintained. “SHOT2” is a reproduction method in which the set LED animation is reproduced once and then the LED 281 is turned off.

  “LOOP” is a reproduction method that repeats the reproduction of the LED animation by returning to the start frame again when the LED animation is reproduced until the last frame, that is, a method of reproducing the LED animation in a loop.

  “NEXT” (predetermined playback method) indicates that if another LED animation is being played when a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220, the LED animation specified by the lamp request is being played. This is the method of playing back after the end of the LED animation. Even if “NEXT” designation is included in the reproduction method information obtained when the lamp request is input, if there is no LED animation being reproduced at the time of lamp request input, the LED animation designated “NEXT” is immediately reproduced. In addition, when the LED animation being played at the time of the lamp request input with “NEXT” is the “LOOP” playback type LED animation, “NEXT” is followed by the last frame playback of the LED animation being looped. Play the specified LED animation.

  “ODONLY” (specific reproduction method) is a reproduction method in which LED data is output from the port only when there is LED data (second drive data) to be set in the port. However, in the channel designated “ODONLY”, when the LED data set in the port is the extinguishing data (first drive data) (for example, all the LED data output to the adjacent red LED, blue LED, and green LED is all In the case of 0), it is assumed that there is no LED data, and LED data (light-out data) is not set in the port.

Note that the following 12 types of reproduction system patterns are specified in the data table information acquired when a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220.
(1) "SHOT"
(2) “SHOT2”
(3) “LOOP”
(4) “SHOT | NEXT”
(5) "SHOT2 | NEXT"
(6) “LOOP | NEXT”
(7) “SHOT | ODONLY”
(8) “SHOT2 | ODONLY”
(9) “LOOP | ODONLY”
(10) "SHOT | NEXT | ODONLY"
(11) “SHOT2 | NEXT | ODONLY”
(12) “LOOP | NEXT | ODONLY”

  As described above, in this embodiment, one of “SHOT”, “SHOT2”, and “LOOP” is always specified as the LED animation playback method, and “NEXT” and / or “ODONLY” is necessary (production) Depending on the content), it is specified accompanying one of “SHOT”, “SHOT2” and “LOOP”. An example of the LED animation playback operation based on the above-described various playback methods will be specifically described later with reference to the drawings.

[LED animation switching playback based on playback method]
In the present embodiment, the LED animation execution period may be longer than the FPS cycle (for example, about 33 msec) of the lamp request output process of the host control circuit 210. In this case, the next lamp request may be input to the audio / LED control circuit 220 during the reproduction of the LED animation.

  In such a case, the audio / LED control circuit 220 performs LED animation switching reproduction according to a reproduction method acquired based on a newly input lamp request. For example, if “NEXT” is not specified as the playback method acquired based on the next lamp request, the LED animation data being played back is discarded, and the LED created based on the newly input lamp request Starts playing the animation immediately.

  FIG. 52 shows various examples of LED animation switching reproduction patterns. Note that FIG. 52 shows that the second lamp request or the second lamp request and the third lamp request are voice / LED controlled for the same channel during the reproduction of the LED animation created based on the first lamp request. 10 is a table summarizing examples of LED animation switching reproduction patterns when input to a circuit 220;

  Hereinafter, a part of the LED animation switching reproduction pattern in FIG. 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a switching playback flow on the time axis of the LED animation corresponding to the switching playback pattern 2 in FIG. In the switching reproduction pattern 2, the second lamp request is input to the sound / LED control circuit 220 during reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” created based on the first lamp request, and reproduction at that time is performed. This is a switching reproduction pattern when “LOOP” is designated as the method.

  In the switching reproduction pattern 2, first, at the time of inputting the first lamp request, the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” based on the first lamp request is started. Next, the second lamp request is input to the sound / LED control circuit 220 during the reproduction of the LED animation based on the first lamp request. If only “LOOP” is specified in the reproduction method information obtained at this time, as shown in FIG. 53, when the second lamp request is input, LED animation data based on the first lamp request being reproduced is obtained. Is discarded (the LED animation being reproduced is terminated), and reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “LOOP” based on the second lamp request is immediately started.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a switching reproduction flow on the time axis of the LED animation corresponding to the switching reproduction pattern 4 in FIG. Note that the switching reproduction pattern 4 is that the second lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220 during the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” created based on the first lamp request, and the reproduction at that time is performed. This is a switching reproduction pattern when “SHOT | NEXT” is designated as the method.

  In the switching reproduction pattern 4, first, at the time of inputting the first lamp request, the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” based on the first lamp request is started. Next, the second lamp request is input to the sound / LED control circuit 220 during the reproduction of the LED animation based on the first lamp request. If “SHOT | NEXT” is specified in the information on the reproduction method obtained at this time, as shown in FIG. 54, the second lamp request is issued after the reproduction of the LED animation based on the first lamp request being reproduced. The reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT | NEXT” based on is started. In this case, the LED animation playback operation based on the second lamp request is in a standby state from the time when the second lamp request is input until the end of the LED animation playback based on the first lamp request.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a switching reproduction flow on the time axis of the LED animation corresponding to the switching reproduction pattern 6 in FIG. Note that the switching reproduction pattern 6 indicates that the second lamp request and the third lamp request are in this order during the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” created based on the first lamp request. This is a switching reproduction pattern when “SHOT | NEXT” is designated as the reproduction method in each lamp request.

  In the switching reproduction pattern 6, first, when the first lamp request is input, reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” based on the first lamp request is started. Next, during the reproduction of the LED animation based on the first lamp request, the second lamp request and the third lamp request are input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 in this order. If “SHOT | NEXT” is designated as the playback method information in each lamp request, as shown in FIG. 55, the second lamp request is made after the LED animation based on the first lamp request being played is finished. LED animation playback of the playback method “SHOT | NEXT” based on the second ramp request is started, and after the LED animation playback based on the second lamp request ends, playback of the LED animation of the playback method “SHOT | NEXT” based on the third lamp request starts. The

  In this case, the LED animation playback operation based on the second lamp request is in a standby state from the time when the second lamp request is input until the end of the LED animation playback based on the first lamp request. Also, the LED animation playback operation based on the third lamp request is in a standby state from the time when the third lamp request is input until the end of the LED animation playback based on the second lamp request.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a switching reproduction flow on the time axis of the LED animation corresponding to the switching reproduction pattern 7 in FIG. Note that the switching reproduction pattern 7 is that the second lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220 during reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “LOOP” created based on the first lamp request, and reproduction at that time is performed. This is a switching reproduction pattern when “SHOT | NEXT” is designated as the method.

  In the switching reproduction pattern 7, first, at the time of inputting the first lamp request, the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “LOOP” based on the first lamp request is started. Next, the second lamp request is input to the sound / LED control circuit 220 during the loop reproduction of the LED animation based on the first lamp request a predetermined number of times (second time in the example shown in FIG. 56). If “SHOT | NEXT” is designated in the information of the reproduction method obtained at this time, as shown in FIG. 56, the second time after the end of the loop reproduction of the LED animation based on the first ramp request is completed. Reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT | NEXT” based on the lamp request is started. In this case, the LED animation playback operation based on the second lamp request is in a standby state from the time when the second lamp request is input until the end of the predetermined number of loop playbacks of the LED animation based on the first lamp request.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, FIG. 56, and the like, when a lamp request with “NEXT” designation is continuously input to the voice / LED control circuit 220, the LED animation continues. Playback is performed. However, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of LED animations that are reproduced in one continuous reproduction is eight. When the lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220 during the eighth LED animation playback, and the playback method obtained at that time includes “NEXT” designation, the lamp request is generated based on the lamp request. The generated LED animation data is discarded. FIG. 57 shows a switching playback flow on the time axis of this playback operation.

  Although a flowchart on the time axis is not shown, a switching reproduction mode of the switching reproduction pattern 11 in FIG. 52 will be briefly described. In the switching reproduction pattern 11, the second lamp request and the third lamp request are input to the sound / LED control circuit 220 in this order during the reproduction of the LED animation of the reproduction method “SHOT” created based on the first lamp request. This is a pattern in the case where the information on the reproduction method obtained when the second lamp request is input is “LOOP | NEXT”, and the information on the reproduction method obtained when the third lamp request is input is “SHOT”. In this switching reproduction pattern 11, since “NEXT” is not designated as the reproduction method of the third lamp request which is the latest request, the LED animation based on the first lamp request being reproduced is input when the third lamp request is input. The data and the LED animation data generated based on the second lamp request are discarded, and playback of the LED animation of the playback method “SHOT” based on the third lamp request is immediately started.

[Example of playback when ODONLY is specified]
Next, an LED animation lighting operation (LED data combining operation) when “ODONLY” is specified as the reproduction method will be described.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 to be described later, an example in which LED animation is executed by a plurality of LEDs 281 arranged in a rectangular shape will be described. In addition, as a playback channel used when creating the LED animation, a first channel playback channel (hereinafter referred to as a first playback channel) and a second channel playback channel (hereinafter referred to as a second playback channel) are used. The control part of the first reproduction channel is all LEDs 281, and the control part of the second reproduction channel is a plurality of arranged in the left side part and the right side part (side) (in the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 described later, 8) LEDs 281.

  First, an example of an LED animation playback mode when “ODONLY” is not designated for each playback channel will be described with reference to FIGS. 58A and 58B. FIG. 58A is a table that summarizes reproduction specification information of each reproduction channel included in the data table information acquired when a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220. FIG. 58B is a diagram showing a state in which the LED animation is generated based on the reproduction specification information of each reproduction channel defined in the table of FIG. 58A.

  In this example, the lighting pattern (ptnA) in which all the LEDs 281 are lit in red in the control part (entire) of the first reproduction channel (1ch) and the control part (side) of the second reproduction channel (2ch) at a cycle of 12 msec. An example in which an LED animation is created by synthesizing with a lighting pattern (ptnB) in which the LED 281 that is lit in blue is sequentially moved within the control region will be described.

  When “ODONLY” is not designated for each playback channel, the second playback channel has a higher execution priority than the first playback channel, so the LED data in the control portion of the second playback channel is the first playback channel. Is overwritten on the LED data of the corresponding LED 281 in the control part. Therefore, when “ODONLY” is not designated for each playback channel, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the LED animation after synthesis, the side LED lighting pattern is the lighting pattern (ptnB) of the second playback channel. Be the same.

  Next, an example of the LED animation playback mode when “ODONLY” is designated as the second playback channel will be described with reference to FIGS. 59A and 59B. FIG. 59A is a table in which reproduction specification information of each reproduction channel included in the data table information acquired when a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220. FIG. 59B is a diagram showing a state when an LED animation is generated based on the reproduction specification information of each reproduction channel in FIG. 59A.

  In this case, since the second playback channel has a higher execution priority than the first playback channel, the LED data in the control part of the second playback channel is the LED data of the corresponding LED 281 in the control part of the first playback channel. Overwritten on top. However, at this time, since “ODONLY” is designated as the reproduction method for the second reproduction channel, the LED data is overwritten only in the port having the output data (LED data) other than the extinguished data, and there is no output data. In the port where the extinction data is set, the LED data is not overwritten, and the LED data of the first reproduction channel is maintained. Therefore, when “ODONLY” is designated for the second playback channel, as shown in FIG. 59B, in the LED animation after the synthesis, among the plurality of LEDs 281 arranged on the side, the blue-lit LED data is displayed. Only the LED 281 to which is set is lit in blue, and the other LEDs 281 are lit in red.

[Data table information]
As described above, in the present embodiment, in the sound / LED control circuit 220, when the LED animation is generated and reproduced based on the lamp request (LED control request), not only the LED data output to each LED 281 but also each Various information such as the channel control part and playback method is also required. A collection of these information is data table information, and this data table information is stored in the CGROM 206 in the same manner as the LED data.

  When the lamp request is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220, the data table information is acquired together with various LED data based on the LED animation ID (LED animation pattern) specified by the lamp request. The acquired data table information and various LED data are stored in the registration buffer of the reproduction channel specified by the data table information.

Here, the contents of various types of information included in the data table information will be described. In the present embodiment, the following six pieces of information are mainly registered in the data table information.
(1) Playback method (2) Playback channel (3) Expansion channel (4) Light-off data identification (5) Control part (6) LED data name

  As the playback system information (playback system information), the above-described 12 playback system types are registered. As the reproduction channel information, the type (channel number) of the reproduction channel to be used is registered.

  As extension channel information, whether or not the extension channel is used is registered. For example, “0” is registered when the extension channel is not used, and “1” is registered when it is used. When “1” is registered as the extended channel information, the extended channel of the channel including the designated reproduction channel is used.

  Information for identifying which channel the extinction data prepared in advance when using the extension channel is registered is registered as the extinction data identification information. When the extension channel is not used, the information for turning off the data is not registered.

  Information on the control part (output destination information) includes SPI channel (physical system) information (communication path information) used in the control part of the reproduction channel, and port information (light emitting means designation information) controlled in the reproduction channel. ) Is registered. The port information includes information regarding the port number set in advance for the port and the type of LED 281 connected to the port. In addition, as information on the type of the LED 281, for example, information for identifying a static LED for a red component, a static LED for a green component, a static LED for a blue component, an LED for monochromatic light emission, and the like is registered.

  When an extension channel is used, information that defines the boundary between the control part of the reproduction channel and the control part of the extension channel in the designated channel is registered as control part information. Note that the control part information may be included in the LED data or the lamp request instead of the data table information. The LED data name information is a data name used when displaying a reproduction history of the LED animation or the like in the debugging process.

[Various effects obtained by the lamp (LED) control method of this embodiment]
Here, various effects obtained by the lamp (LED) control method executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above will be described together.

  In the lamp (LED) control method of this embodiment, as described above, the LED animation playback method is designated every time a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 220 (for each frame of the LED animation). Then, the LED animation is reproduced according to the designated reproduction method. In this case, for example, the output count (reuse count) of the LED data (output data) output to the LED 281 is set for each frame of the LED animation, and the LED data output (set) timing (previously stored) The current LED data is discarded and new LED data is set, or new LED data is set after previously stored LED data is output). In this case, the following effects can be obtained.

  For example, when the host control circuit 210 or the voice / LED control circuit 220 directly controls the LED 281 by specifying LED data, the number of times each LED data is output and the timing at which the LED data is output (set) are set. It is necessary to determine in advance. Further, when performing output control of a plurality of LED data, it is necessary to set in advance all complex output control modes such as whether or not the same LED 281 is controlled by each LED data. Therefore, in this case, not only a problem that the development period of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is extended, but also a problem that it is difficult to increase the variation of the production.

  However, in this embodiment, based on the lamp request input from the host control circuit 210, the audio / LED control circuit 220 designates a reproduction method of LED data (LED animation), and based on the reproduction method, the frame unit. To control the output of LED data. At this time, in this embodiment, by designating “SHOT”, “LOOP” or the like as the reproduction method, the number of LED data outputs can be easily controlled, and depending on whether or not “NEXT” is designated as the reproduction method. The timing at which LED data is output (set) can be easily controlled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the LED output control by the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220 and increase the types of effect patterns by LED (lamp) lighting. The produced effect pattern can be smoothly controlled, and the effect of production (the fun of the game) can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of reproduction channels are provided for each LED 281 (for each port), and the execution priority order of the LED data is preset for each reproduction channel. Further, the above-described determination of overwriting, addition, etc. of the LED data to the LED data being reproduced is performed individually for each reproduction channel in accordance with the designated reproduction method.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, even in a situation where a plurality of reproduction channels are executed, it is possible to facilitate the storage control of LED data in the registration buffer of each reproduction channel. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the combination process of the effect pattern by the LED 281 using a plurality of reproduction channels, so that a more complicated LED animation effect pattern can be generated, and the effect is further enhanced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, even if a plurality of lamp requests are generated for a standby (playing) playback channel, data switching and playback control is performed based on the playback method, so that simple data storage is possible. It is possible to execute a more complicated performance as compared to a gaming machine to be performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in the lamp (LED) control method of the present embodiment, as described above, a reproduction channel and an expansion channel can be provided in each channel. At that time, the range of the control part of the reproduction channel and the control of the expansion channel are provided. The channel is divided so that the range of the part does not overlap with each other, and the reproduction channel and the extension channel are set. The sequencer that controls the operation of the extension channel is provided separately from the sequencer that controls the operation of the reproduction channel.

  By providing such a configuration, in this embodiment, LED animations for two channels can be reproduced simultaneously in one channel, and each LED animation can be controlled independently. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the extended channel is used, more complicated LED animation (lamp lighting pattern) can be reproduced using more LEDs 281 than when the LED animation is reproduced using only the reproduction channel. It becomes possible, and the interest of the player for the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the lamp (LED) control method of this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of LEDs 281 (effect device) can be controlled by one LED driver 280. Each LED driver 280 determines whether or not it can receive the LED data transmitted from the sound / LED control circuit 220 by itself in the device address set in its device address selection terminal (DA0 to DA5). It can be determined based on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the voice / LED control circuit 220 only needs to perform processing for transmitting data to each LED driver 280 via the SPI bus, and thus the voice / LED control circuit 220 and each LED driver 280. And the processing load on the voice / LED control circuit 220 can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, each LED driver 280 specifies LED281 which transmits the signal (luminance value) regarding an effect based on the information of the control part contained in data table information, and the signal transmitted to this LED281 The contents of can also be specified. In this case, the processing of the voice / LED control circuit 220 in data communication between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and each LED driver 280 is only data transmission processing, and the data transmission speed can be increased. As a result, when the data transmission speed between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and each LED driver 280 increases, the LED driver 280 rises earlier, so that the performance control process can be speeded up.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, each LED driver 280 detects that “1” is continuously received 16 times or more at the time of serial data reception (after rising from the sleep mode state), then “ By detecting reception of “0”, the device address standby state is entered. Therefore, each LED driver 280 can prevent the presentation control from being executed even when the device address is erroneously received at a timing other than the timing for controlling the LED 281, and can control the LED 281 more accurately. .

<Control methods for various movable objects>
[Outline of control method]
Next, a description will be given of a method for controlling the rendering operation of the various movable accessories (the rendering device) described above.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution period of one operation pattern of the movable accessory (operation pattern from the start to the stop of one operation) is relatively short, that is, the rendering operation of the movable accessory needs to be controlled relatively finely. If there is, the control execution cycle (interrupt processing cycle) is short (about 12 msec), and the sound / LED control circuit 220 controls the effect operation. At this time, the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the accessory control based on the accessory request (the accessory request for the voice / LED control circuit 220) input from the host control circuit 210.

  On the other hand, when the execution period of one operation pattern of the movable accessory is relatively long and it is not necessary to finely control the rendering operation of the movable accessory, the control execution cycle is long (about 33 msec). The production operation is controlled. At this time, the host control circuit 210 performs the accessory control based on the accessory request (the accessory request for the host control circuit 210) delivered between the processes related to the accessory control performed in the host control circuit 210. Do.

  Note that one production operation (production mode) of the movable accessory is usually configured by connecting a plurality of operation patterns (individual operation modes). Therefore, in the case where all the operation patterns included in one effect operation have contents that require a fine effect operation, the effect operation is all controlled by the sound / LED control circuit 220. On the other hand, in the case where all the operation patterns included in one rendering operation have contents that do not require detailed rendering operations, all the rendering operations are controlled by the host control circuit 210. That is, in the accessory control method of the present embodiment, even if the accessory control is performed on the same movable accessory, the control execution cycle of the effect operation can be appropriately changed according to the content of the effect that is executed. it can.

  In addition, when an operation pattern that requires a fine presentation operation is included in a part of a plurality of operation patterns included in one presentation operation, the production operation of the operation pattern that requires the fine presentation operation is The voice / LED control circuit 220 controls the other operation patterns, and the host control circuit 210 controls the rendering operation.

  In this case, it is necessary to switch the control system in one production operation. For example, this switching control includes a timing request for switching in an accessory request and performs a switching operation based on the information. Also good. Also, for example, when the operation pattern immediately before the switching operation is completed, the control circuit (one of the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220) that has performed the operation control of the immediately previous operation pattern is changed to the other. A command corresponding to the switching command is transmitted to the control circuit (the other of the host control circuit 210 and the voice / LED control circuit 220), and each control circuit is triggered by communication of the command between the control circuits. A switching operation may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the movable accessory is not determined to determine whether or not the operation pattern requires a fine performance operation, and each operation pattern is represented by the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit. Which of 220 is controlled is predetermined in the design stage. In this embodiment, the excitation data of the operation pattern controlled by the host control circuit 210 and the excitation data of the operation pattern controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220 are provided separately. The excitation data of the operation pattern controlled by the host control circuit 210 is set (set) in an accessory request for the host control circuit 210 generated inside the host control circuit 210 and controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220. The excitation data of the operation pattern to be set is set (set) in the accessory request for the voice / LED control circuit 220 generated in the host control circuit 210.

  When the above-described accessory control method of the present embodiment is employed, for example, the following various effects can be obtained.

  For example, when the execution time of one operation pattern of a movable accessory is 50 msec (when the execution period of one operation pattern is relatively short), the presentation operation is controlled by the host control circuit 210 having a control execution cycle of about 33 msec. Since the host control circuit 210 can control only at intervals of about 33 msec (a multiple of about 33 msec), this effect operation is controlled by a single control execution process. In this case, since the operation of 50 msec is controlled (expressed) in the control processing period of about 33 msec, the deviation from the original operation of the controlled production operation becomes large, and the player feels uncomfortable in the effect production. there is a possibility.

  However, when such an operation pattern is controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220 having a control execution cycle of about 12 msec, the effect operation is controlled by four control execution processes. In this case, since the operation of 50 msec is controlled (expressed) in the control processing period of about 48 msec, the deviation from the original operation of the controlled production operation is reduced, and the player feels uncomfortable in the effect production. The possibility is reduced.

  It should be noted that there is a method of performing all of the accessory control by the voice / LED control circuit 220 regardless of the type of the movable accessory and the contents of the effect by the movable accessory. However, in this case, useless processing time increases, There is also a possibility that the control load of the entire control circuit 200 increases. On the other hand, occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed when the control circuit is appropriately changed according to the contents of the effect of the movable accessory as in the present embodiment.

  That is, in the accessory control method according to the present embodiment, fine effect control can be performed, and thereby the quality of the effect can be maintained and the control burden on the sub control circuit 200 as a whole can be reduced.

[Driving method of each movable accessory (motor)]
Next, an outline of a method for driving each movable accessory (motor) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a data flow diagram when driving each movable accessory (motor) in the accessory group 30.

  In the present embodiment, when an accessory request is generated (acquired) in the host control circuit 210, the host control circuit 210 and / or the sound / LED control circuit 220 may be As shown at 60, excitation data of a motor 272 (stepping motor) for driving a movable accessory (for example, a first sword accessory 31, a second sword accessory 32, a shutter accessory 33, etc.) is input to the I2C controller 261. To the motor driver 271 (drive control means) in the motor controller 270. When the movable combination is driven by a plurality of motors 272, or when there are a plurality of movable combinations as in the present embodiment, a motor driver 271 corresponding to each motor 272 is provided.

  Specifically, when the execution period of one operation pattern of the movable accessory is relatively short, that is, when the rendering operation of the movable accessory needs to be controlled relatively finely, first, the host control circuit 210 ( A control request is output from the control execution cycle of about 33 msec) to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (control execution cycle of about 12 msec). Then, the voice / LED control circuit 220 outputs excitation data to the corresponding motor driver 271 (movable accessory motor 272) via the I2C controller 261 based on the input accessory request.

  On the other hand, when the execution period of one operation pattern of the movable accessory is relatively long and it is not necessary to finely control the rendering operation of the movable accessory, the host control circuit 210 receives the accessory request generated therein. Based on this, the excitation data is output to the corresponding motor driver 271 (movable accessory motor 272) via the I2C controller 261.

  Further, when the contents of the movable accessory include both contents that require relatively fine control and contents that do not require fine control, the excitation data includes the host control circuit 210 and the voice / LED control circuit. 220 is output to the I2C controller 261. That is, in this case, the rendering operation by the movable accessory is controlled by both the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220.

  At this time, if the motor driver 271 (motor 272) to be controlled by the host control circuit 210 is different from that to be controlled by the sound / LED control circuit 220, the host control circuit 210 is to be controlled. The excitation data corresponding to the motor driver 271 is output, and at the same time, the voice / LED control circuit 220 outputs the excitation data corresponding to the motor driver 271 to be controlled. For example, as will be described in an example of an effect effect operation (special effects EG) described later, the effect operation of the sword accessory is controlled by the host control circuit 210, and the shutter accessory 33 is controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220. In the case of control, the host control circuit 210 outputs excitation data for the sword character to the motor driver 271 that controls the driving of the sword character, and at the same time, the voice / LED control circuit 220 outputs the shutter character. Excitation data for the shutter accessory is output to the motor driver 271 that controls the drive of the motor 33.

  On the other hand, when the motor driver 271 (motor 272) to be controlled by the host control circuit 210 is the same as that to be controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220, the execution effect of the performance by the motor 272 (movable accessory) During the execution period of the production contents that require relatively fine control during the period, excitation data of the execution period is output from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the motor driver 271 (motor 272), and other production contents are displayed. During the execution period, excitation data for the execution period is output from the host control circuit 210 to the motor driver 271 (motor 272). For example, as will be described later in an example of an effect production (special effect H), the sword effect production includes a sword action swinging action (an action that vibrates in a short cycle). In this case, during the execution period of the swing operation of the sword object, the excitation data of the execution period is output from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the motor driver 271 (motor 272), and the execution period of other rendering operations. The excitation data for the execution period is output from the host control circuit 210 to the motor driver 271 (motor 272).

  The motor driver 271 outputs the input excitation data (drive signal) to the connected motor 272 (drive means). As a result, the corresponding movable combination (for example, the first sword combination 31, the second sword combination 32, the shutter combination 33, etc.) is driven.

[Connection configuration between control circuit and movable accessory]
Since the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the motor controller 270 (motor driver 271) are connected by an I2C bus, signals (excitation data) are transmitted and received between them by the I2C method. Is called.

  Here, the connection configuration via the I2C bus between the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the motor driver 271 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 61 is a connection configuration diagram via the I2C bus between the host control circuit 210 or the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the motor driver 271. FIG. 61 shows an example in which a plurality of motor drivers 271 are provided. Indicates. That is, FIG. 61 shows a connection configuration example when the movable combination is driven and controlled by a plurality of motors 272 or when the plurality of movable combinations is driven and controlled.

  Since the host control circuit 210 or the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the motor driver 271 are connected by the I2C bus as described above, the serial clock (SCL) signal wiring and the serial data (SDA) ) Signal wiring is provided as a separate wiring. The serial clock signal output terminal (SCL) of the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 (master) is connected to the serial clock signal input terminal (SCL) of each motor driver 271 (slave). The serial data input / output terminal (SDA) of the host control circuit 210 or the audio / LED control circuit 220 is connected to the serial data input / output terminal (SDA) of each motor driver 271. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers 271 (slave) are connected in parallel to the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 (master).

  In this embodiment, the communication mode of the serial clock signal between the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 and each motor driver 271 is changed from the host control circuit 210 or the sound / LED control circuit 220 to each motor driver. One-way communication is unilaterally transmitted to H.271. On the other hand, the serial data communication form is bidirectional communication in which serial data can be input / output between the host control circuit 210 or the voice / LED control circuit 220 and each motor driver 271.

  Each motor driver 271 (slave) performs serial data input / output control based on a serial clock signal input from the host control circuit 210 or the audio / LED control circuit 220 (master). Each motor driver 271 (slave) is assigned a unique address, and the host control circuit 210 or audio / LED control circuit 220 (master) specifies the address of the motor driver 271 to which serial data is transmitted. To send serial data.

<Examples of various performance operations using movable accessories>
Next, operation examples of various effects using the first sword combination 31, the second sword combination 32, and the shutter combination 33, which are executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be specifically described.

[Various performance actions by swords]
In the present embodiment, when any of the effects referred to as “special effects E” to “special effects H” is determined by lottery with reference to the variable effect table shown in FIG. An effect production using the sword accessory 32 and the shutter accessory 33 is executed. Therefore, first, as an example of the production operation using the sword actor, the production operations of the first sword actor 31 and the second sword actor 32 executed in the productions called “special production E” to “special production H”. Will be described.

  Note that the operation modes such as the rotation angle and the rotation speed of each sword combination in the production using each sword combination are not limited to the examples described below, and are appropriately set according to, for example, the content of the production. Further, the operation order of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 is not limited to the example described below, and is appropriately set according to, for example, the contents of the production.

(1) Special production E
First, with reference to FIG. 62A to FIG. 62C, an operation (movement effect) operation of a sword object executed in the special effect E will be described. 62A to 62C are diagrams showing the sword-related effect operation flow executed in the special effect E, and each figure is a schematic front view of the game board 12. The special effect E is an effect in which only the first sword object 31 is driven out of the two sword objects.

  When the special effect E is started, the first sword object 31 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the player side from the initial position (specific position: state shown in FIG. 62A) with the handle portion as the rotation center. (Rotation direction). Thereby, the 1st sword-like member 31a of the 1st sword object 31 which was concealed behind the upper frame part of the glass door 4 appears on the game area | region 12a (it becomes visible to a player).

  Thereafter, the first sword object 31 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction for a predetermined number of steps and stopped (predetermined position: state shown in FIG. 62B). In the example shown in FIG. 62B, the first sword object 31 (first sword-shaped member 31a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 rotates to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13 and stops.

  Next, after the first sword object 31 stops for a predetermined time in the state of FIG. 62B, the first sword object 31 is rotationally driven from the stop position in the normal rotation direction (clockwise as viewed from the player side). The Thereafter, when the first sword object 31 (first sword-like member 31a) is returned to the initial position, the rotation of the first sword object 31 is stopped (the state of FIG. 62C), and the sword object in the special effect E The production (movement production) operation ends.

(2) Special production F
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63A to 63C, a sword effect production (movement effect) operation performed in the special effect F will be described. FIG. 63A to FIG. 63C are diagrams showing the rendering operation flow of the sword object executed in the special rendering F, and each diagram is a schematic front view of the game board 12. The special effect F is an effect in which only the second sword object 32 is driven out of the two sword objects.

  When the special effect F is started, the second sword object 32 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the initial position (the state of FIG. 63A) with the handle portion as the rotation center. As a result, the second sword member 32a of the second sword object 31 hidden behind the one side frame portion of the glass door 4 (the left side frame portion as viewed from the player side in FIG. 63A) is the gaming area. Appears on 12a (becomes visible to the player).

  Thereafter, the second sword object 32 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction for a specific number of steps and stops (state of FIG. 63B). In the example shown in FIG. 63B, the second sword object 32 (second sword-like member 32a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 rotates and stops to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13.

  Next, after the second sword object 32 stops for a predetermined time in the state shown in FIG. 63B, the second sword object 32 is driven to rotate in the forward rotation direction from the stop position. Thereafter, when the second sword object 32 (second sword-like member 32a) is returned to the initial position, the rotation drive of the second sword object 32 is stopped (the state of FIG. 63C), and the sword object in the special effect F The production (movement production) operation ends.

(3) Special production G
Next, with reference to FIG. 64A to FIG. 64C and FIG. 65A to FIG. 65B, the sword effect production (movement effect) operation executed in the special effect G will be described. FIGS. 64A to 64C and FIGS. 65A to 65B are diagrams showing the rendering operation flow of the sword object executed in the special rendering G, and each diagram is a schematic front view of the game board 12. The special effect G is an effect in which both the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 are driven.

  When the special effect G is started, first, the first sword object 31 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the initial position (state shown in FIG. 64A) with the handle portion as the rotation center. Thereby, the 1st sword-like member 31a of the 1st sword object 31 which was concealed behind the upper frame part of the glass door 4 appears on the game area | region 12a (it becomes visible to a player).

  Thereafter, the first sword object 31 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction (counterclockwise direction) for a predetermined number of steps and stopped (state shown in FIG. 64B). In the example shown in FIG. 64B, the first sword object 31 (first sword member 31a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 rotates to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13 and stops. Thereafter, the stop state of the first sword object 31 is maintained.

  Next, the second sword object 32 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the initial position (state of FIG. 64B) with the handle portion as the rotation center. As a result, the second sword member 32a of the second sword object 31 hidden behind the one side frame portion of the glass door 4 (left side frame portion as viewed from the player side in FIG. 64B) is the gaming area. Appears on 12a (becomes visible to the player).

  Thereafter, the second sword object 32 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction for a specific number of steps and stops (state of FIG. 64C). In the example shown in FIG. 64C, the second sword object 32 (second sword-like member 32a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 rotates and stops to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13. In the special effect G, at this time, the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 and the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 are generated close to each other, but they do not contact each other. Further, since the second sword actor 32 is lighter than the first sword actor 31, in the special performance G, the rotational movement of the second sword actor 32 is faster than that of the first sword actor 31. Executed in action.

  Next, the state where the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 and the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 approach each other is maintained for a predetermined time (the state of FIG. 65A). And after predetermined time passes in the state of FIG. 65A, both the 1st sword object 31 and the 2nd sword object 32 are rotationally driven from the stop position to the normal rotation direction. That is, the operation of returning the first sword combination 31 to the initial position and the operation of returning the second sword combination 32 to the initial position are started. In this example, an example will be described in which the operation of returning the first sword object 31 to the initial position and the operation of returning the second sword object 32 to the initial position are started simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, after performing an operation of returning one of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 to the initial position, an operation of returning the other to the initial position may be performed.

  Thereafter, when the first sword object 31 (first sword member 31a) and the second sword object 32 (second sword member 32a) are returned to their corresponding initial positions, the first sword object 31 and the first sword object 31 The rotation driving of each of the two sword actors 32 is stopped (the state shown in FIG. 65B), and the sword actor effect (movement effect) operation in the special effect G ends.

(4) Special production H
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66A to 66C and FIGS. 67A to 67B, the sword effect production (movement effect) operation performed in the special effect H will be described. 66A to 66C and FIGS. 67A to 67B are diagrams showing the rendering operation flow of the sword bonus performed in the special rendering H, and each diagram is a schematic front view of the game board 12. FIG. The special effect H is an effect in which both the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 are driven.

  When the special effect H is started, first, the first sword object 31 (first movable body) starts from the initial position (first specific position: state shown in FIG. 66A) with the handle portion as the rotation center. Driven in the reverse rotation direction. Thereby, the 1st sword-like member 31a of the 1st sword object 31 which was concealed behind the upper frame part of the glass door 4 appears on the game area | region 12a (it becomes visible to a player).

  Thereafter, the first sword object 31 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction for a predetermined number of steps and stopped (first predetermined position: state shown in FIG. 66B). In the example shown in FIG. 66B, the first sword object 31 (first sword member 31a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 rotates to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13 and stops. Thereafter, the stop state of the first sword object 31 is maintained.

  Next, the second sword object 32 (second movable body) is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the initial position (second specific position: state shown in FIG. 66B) with the handle portion as the rotation center. As a result, the second sword member 32a of the second sword object 31 hidden behind the one side frame of the glass door 4 (the left side frame as viewed from the player side in FIG. 66B) is the gaming area. Appears on 12a (becomes visible to the player).

  Thereafter, the second sword object 32 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction for a specific number of steps and stopped (second predetermined position: state shown in FIG. 66C). In the example shown in FIG. 66C, the second sword object 32 (second sword-like member 32a) stops at a position rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position. As a result, the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 rotates and stops to a position substantially in the center of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13. In the special effect H, at this time, the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 and the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32 are generated close to each other, but they are not in contact with each other. In the special effect H, the rotational movement of the second sword object 32 is executed at a higher speed than that of the first sword object 31.

  Next, in the state where the sword tip of the first sword combination 31 and the sword tip of the second sword combination 32 are close to each other (the state of FIG. 66C), each sword combination is relatively moved along its rotation direction. An operation of oscillating at a small rotation angle (operation of shaking the sword tip: hereinafter referred to as “swinging operation”) is performed (state of FIG. 67A).

  Specifically, in the swinging motion, each sword object is rotated and moved in the forward rotation direction at a relatively small rotation angle (number of steps), and in the reverse rotation direction at a relatively small rotation angle (number of steps). The operation of repeating the rotational movement alternately for a predetermined number of times is performed. By performing such an operation, an effect operation is realized in which the first sword accessory 31 and the second sword accessory 32 are struggling with each other. In the present embodiment, when this swinging operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 67A, a part of the movement path of the sword tip portion of the first sword accessory 31 is a part of the sword tip portion of the second sword accessory 32. Although it overlaps with a part of the movement path, in this swinging operation, the directing operations of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 are linked and controlled so that both sword tips do not contact each other. To do.

  Then, after the swinging motion of each sword object shown in FIG. 67A is performed for a predetermined time, each sword object is stopped. Thereafter, both the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 are driven to rotate in the forward rotation direction. That is, the operation of returning the first sword combination 31 to the initial position and the operation of returning the second sword combination 32 to the initial position are started. In this example, an example will be described in which the operation of returning the first sword object 31 to the initial position and the operation of returning the second sword object 32 to the initial position are started simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, after performing an operation of returning one of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 to the initial position, an operation of returning the other to the initial position may be performed.

  Thereafter, when the first sword object 31 (first sword member 31a) and the second sword object 32 (second sword member 32a) are returned to their corresponding initial positions, the first sword object 31 and the first sword object 31 The rotation driving of each of the two sword actors 32 is stopped (state shown in FIG. 67B), and the sword actor effect (movement effect) operation in the special effect H ends.

  In addition, the above-mentioned directing operation of the sword actor may be performed all in one fluctuation period of the special symbol, or the special symbol after that from the change of the special symbol in which the effect by the sword actor is determined. May be performed over a period of fluctuation (that is, a period of fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols). In addition, the above-mentioned directing operation of the sword object is performed in a plurality of fluctuating motions (so-called “pseudo-ream” operations) performed in a pseudo manner by the decorative symbols in the special symbol fluctuation period based on one start prize. It may be executed together.

  Furthermore, when there are a plurality of holding balls and the effect by the sword object is determined with a predetermined holding ball among the plurality of holding balls, a plurality of holding balls are generated. You may perform the production | presentation operation | movement of the sword actor mentioned above over the period of a fluctuation | variation of times. For example, when there are three holding balls, in the variation based on the first holding ball, the directing action by the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 described in FIGS. 66A to 66C is performed. In the variation based on the second reserved ball, the directing action by the first sword accessory 31 and the second sword accessory 32 described with reference to FIGS. 67A and 67B is performed, and in the variation based on the third retained ball, The directing operation by the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 described with reference to FIGS. 67A and 67B may be performed.

  In addition, in the above-described effect operation by the sword object and the effect operation by the shutter object, which will be described later, every time the effect by the movable object (sword object, panel member) is finished, the movable object is moved to the initial position (standby position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body may not be returned to the initial position (standby position) each time one effect is finished. For example, an effect is made such that a movable body such as a sword is placed at a position (a specific performance position) that can be visually recognized by the player without returning to the initial position (standby position) across a plurality of variations. Also good. In the case of performing such an effect, it is configured such that confirmation control is not performed on whether or not the movable body is in the initial position (standby position) at the start of change (at the end of change) during the effect period.

[Directional operation by shutter object]
In the present embodiment, in each of the special effects E to H described above, the effect by the shutter accessory 33 is performed in addition to the effect by the sword accessory described above. Here, as an example of the effect operation by the shutter accessory 33 that can be performed in each of the special effects E to H, operations of effects called “shutter opening / closing effect” and “shutter swing effect” will be described.

  In the effect by the shutter accessory 33, the light emission effect of the plurality of LEDs 35 arranged on the back side of the shutter accessory 33 is also executed. The control of the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 35 is performed in the same manner as the light emission control of the LED 281 described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 59. At this time, the rotation operation pattern of the panel member by the shutter accessory 33 is performed. And the light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs 35 are controlled to be synchronized.

(1) Shutter Open / Close Effect First, the operation of the shutter accessory 33 in the shutter open / close effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 68A to 68C. 68A to 68C are diagrams showing an operation flow of the shutter accessory 33 in the shutter opening / closing effect. In addition, the left figure in each figure is a front view of the shutter accessory 33 when the shutter accessory 33 is viewed from the player side, and the right figure is the installation side of the third rotation mechanism portion 33c of the shutter accessory 33. FIG. 4 is a side view of the shutter accessory 33 as viewed from the opposite side.

  When the shutter opening / closing effect by the shutter accessory 33 is started, first, each of the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b of the shutter accessory 33 is set to the initial position (in FIG. 68A) around the rotation axis A5. State: A state in which the shutter accessory opening 34 is closed by each panel member) and is rotationally driven in one rotation direction (clockwise direction (direction of arrow A6) on the right side of FIG. 68B) (FIG. 68B). State). Thereby, some front surfaces of some LED35 arrange | positioned at the back surface side of each panel member are open | released.

  The state of FIG. 68B is a state in which each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is rotated about 45 degrees from the initial position in one rotation direction (the direction of arrow A6 in FIG. 68B). Front surface of the upper LED group (consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs 35 arranged in a horizontal row) arranged on the back side of the member 33a and the lower LED group arranged on the back side of the second panel member 33b Is released. As a result, light from these LED groups is emitted to the player side through the shutter accessory opening 34.

  Next, the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b stop at a position rotated about 90 degrees in one rotation direction (the direction of the arrow A6) from the initial position (state shown in FIG. 68C).

  Thereby, as shown to FIG. 68C, it will be in the state by which the front surface of all LED35 arrange | positioned at the back surface side of each panel member was open | released. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 68C, the front and lower LED groups arranged on the back side of the first panel member 33a, and the upper and lower LED groups arranged on the back side of the second panel member 33b. Is released. As a result, light is emitted from all the LEDs 35 to the player side through the shutter accessory opening 34.

  In the effect operation of opening the shutter (each panel member) described above, the opening area of the front surface of the plurality of LEDs 35 gradually increases with the rotation operation of each panel member, so the shutter accessory opening 34 (shutter accessory) The amount of light emitted to the outside from the area 33) gradually increases.

  Next, the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b are stopped for a predetermined time at the stop position in FIG. 68C, and then, from the stop position, one direction of rotation (the direction of arrow A6 in FIG. 68B) or opposite thereto. It is driven to rotate in the direction of rotation. Thereafter, when each panel member returns to the initial position (state shown in FIG. 68A), the rotational drive of each panel member is stopped. As a result, the shutter accessory opening 34 is closed by the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b, and the light from the plurality of LEDs 35 is shielded by each panel member.

  In the effect operation of closing the shutter (each panel member) described above, the open area of the front surface of the plurality of LEDs 35 is gradually reduced with the above-described rotation operation of each panel member. The amount of light emitted to the outside from the region of the object 33 is gradually reduced.

  In the shutter opening / closing effect of the present embodiment, the rotation effect by the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b and the light emission (light emission) effect by the LED 35 are thus performed.

(2) Shutter Swing Effect Next, the operation of the shutter accessory 33 in the shutter swing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 69A to 69B. 69A to 69B are diagrams illustrating an operation flow of the shutter accessory 33 in the shutter swing effect. In addition, the left figure in each figure is a front view of the shutter accessory 33 when the shutter accessory 33 is viewed from the player side, and the right figure is the installation side of the third rotation mechanism portion 33c of the shutter accessory 33. FIG. 4 is a side view of the shutter accessory 33 as viewed from the opposite side.

  When the shutter swing effect by the shutter accessory 33 is started, first, in the same manner as the shutter opening / closing effect described above, the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b are rotated at a position about 90 degrees from the initial position. Stop. That is, the state of FIG. 68C (hereinafter referred to as an open state) is generated.

  Next, an operation of vibrating the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b at a predetermined rotation angle along the rotation direction in the vicinity of the stop position in the open state (an operation of swinging each panel member (swinging operation)). Execute.

  Specifically, first, each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is moved from the stop position in the open state to one rotation direction (the direction of arrow A6 in the right diagram of FIG. 69A) at a predetermined rotation angle (number of steps). Rotate to stop (state of FIG. 69A). In the example shown in FIG. 69A, each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is stopped at a position rotated about 45 degrees in the one rotation direction (direction of arrow A6) from the stop position in the open state.

  Next, each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is rotated at a specific rotation angle (number of steps) in the other rotation direction (rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction: direction of arrow A7 in the right diagram of FIG. 69B). It is made to rotate and stop (state of FIG. 69B). In the example shown in FIG. 69B, each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is stopped at a position rotated about 90 degrees in the other rotation direction (the direction of arrow A7) from the stop position in the state of FIG. 69A.

  Thereafter, the operation of rotating each panel member in one rotational direction (the direction of arrow A6) and the operation of rotationally driving the other panel member in the other rotational direction (the direction of arrow A7) are alternately repeated. The stop state of the panel member and the stop state of each panel member shown in FIG. 69B are alternately generated.

  Then, the swinging operation of each panel member is executed for a predetermined time, and after the swinging operation is finished, the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b are moved to the initial positions (in the same manner as the shutter opening / closing effect described above). Return to the state of FIG. 68A.

  69A to 69B, since the state shown in FIG. 68C occurs between the state shown in FIG. 69A and the state shown in FIG. 69B, the swinging operation is executed. In the light emission (light emission) effect of the LED 35 during the period, the effect mode (state of FIG. 68C) in which the amount of light emitted to the outside from the shutter accessory opening 34 (the region of the shutter accessory 33) increases is small. The production mode (the state of FIG. 69A or the state of FIG. 69B) alternately and repeatedly occurs.

  In the shutter swing effect of the present embodiment, the rotation effect by the first panel member 33a and the second panel member 33b and the light emission (light emission) effect by the LED 35 are thus performed.

[Examples of control of various movable objects]
In this embodiment, the control method of the various movable accessories of this embodiment mentioned above is applied also to the effect operation of each movable accessory in the special effects EH mentioned above. Below, the example of control operation | movement of each movable accessory in the special productions EH mentioned above is demonstrated.

(1) Example of control operation in special effects E to G The effect operation of each sword object performed in each of the special effects EG is mainly as described above. The operation consists of an operation of rotating the display screen to the front surface and an operation of rotating the sword object from the front surface of the display device 13 to the initial position. All of these operations are operations with a relatively long execution period and do not require detailed presentation control, so these operations are performed by the host control circuit 210 having a control execution period of about 33 msec. Be controlled.

  On the other hand, the effect operation (shutter opening / closing effect and / or shutter swing effect operation) of the shutter accessory 33 executed in each of the special effects E to G is a relatively high-speed effect operation and fine effect control. This is a production operation that requires content. Moreover, each panel member of the shutter accessory 33 is lightweight, and a large torque is not required for the rotation operation. Therefore, the effect operation of the shutter accessory 33 executed in each of the special effects E to G is controlled by the sound / LED control circuit 220 whose control execution period is about 12 msec.

  Here, FIG. 70 shows a control flow of the accessory effect in each of the special effects EG.

  As described above, in each of the special effects E to G, the effect operations of the first sword accessory 31 and the second sword accessory 32 are controlled by the host control circuit 210, and the effect operation of the shutter accessory 33 is a sound. Controlled by the LED control circuit 220. Therefore, in each of the special effects E to G, as shown in FIG. 70, the host control circuit 210 performs excitation for the sword object based on the object request for the host control circuit 210 generated therein. Data is output to each of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32. On the other hand, for the shutter accessory 33, the sound / LED control circuit 220 generates excitation data for the shutter accessory based on the accessory request for the sound / LED control circuit 220 input from the host control circuit 210. Output to the shutter accessory 33.

(2) Example of control operation in special effect H As described above, the effect operation (predetermined effect operation) of each sword object performed in the special effect H is mainly the sword object from the initial position of the display device 13. An operation of rotating and moving to the front of the display screen (first effect operation), an operation of swinging each sword accessory (second effect operation), and an initial sword accessory from the front of the display screen of the display device 13 And an operation of rotating to a position.

  Among these movements of each sword object, the swinging movement of each sword object is composed of an operation pattern with a relatively short execution period, and is a directing operation that requires fine directing control. The swinging motion of the sword object is controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220 having a control execution period of about 12 msec. On the other hand, since all the operations other than the swinging motion of each sword object are operations with a relatively long execution period, and are the performance operations that do not require detailed performance control, these operations have a control execution period. It is controlled by the host control circuit 210 which is about 33 msec.

  In addition, the effect operation (shutter opening / closing effect and / or shutter swing effect operation) of the shutter accessory 33 performed in the special effect H is a relatively high-speed effect operation, like the special effects EG. This is a production operation with contents that require fine production control. Therefore, even in the special effect H, the effect operation of the shutter accessory 33 is controlled by the sound / LED control circuit 220 whose control execution period is about 12 msec.

  Here, FIG. 71 shows a control flow of the accessory effect in the special effect H.

  As described above, in the special effect H, the swinging motions of the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 are controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220, and the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination Operations other than the swinging motion of the object 32 are controlled by the host control circuit 210. Therefore, the control operation of the effect by the sword object executed during the execution period of the special effect H is as follows.

  First, an operation of rotating each sword object from the initial position to the front of the display screen of the display device 13 (an effect operation from the state of FIG. 66A to the state of FIG. 66C: effect performed first in the effect by the sword object) In the operation A), as shown in FIG. 71, the host control circuit 210 generates excitation data for the sword actor, based on the accessory request for the host control circuit 210 generated therein. 31 and the second sword object 32 are output. When the rotational movement operation (effect operation A) of each sword object is completed, the control system is switched from the host control circuit 210 to the voice / LED control circuit 220, and the swing operation (effect operation B) of each sword object is performed. Is started.

  Next, when the swinging motion (production operation B) of each sword accessory is started, the voice / LED control circuit 220 is based on the bonus request for the voice / LED control circuit 220 input from the host control circuit 210. Thus, the excitation data for the sword object is output to each of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32. Then, when the swinging operation (production operation B) of each sword object is completed, the control system is switched from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to the host control circuit 210, and each sword object is displayed on the front of the display screen of the display device 13. The operation of rotating to the initial position (effect operation C) is started.

  Next, when an operation (effect operation C) for rotating each sword object from the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 to an initial position is started, the host control circuit 210 generates the host control circuit 210 generated therein. The excitation data for the sword combination is output to each of the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 based on the requested combination request.

  In the special effect H, the effect operation of the shutter accessory 33 is controlled by the sound / LED control circuit 220 as described above. Therefore, in the effect by the shutter accessory 33 in the special effect H, the sound / LED control circuit 220 receives the sound / LED control input from the host control circuit 210 during the execution period of the special effect H as shown in FIG. Excitation data for the shutter accessory is output to the shutter accessory 33 based on the accessory request for the circuit 220.

  In the above example of production, the example in which the production operation of the shutter accessory 33 is controlled only by the voice / LED control circuit 220 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the content of the effect by the shutter accessory 33 is only the content that does not require fine effect control (for example, only the effect that rotates at a low speed), the effect operation of the shutter accessory 33 is hosted. It may be controlled by the control circuit 210. In addition, when the content of the effect by the shutter accessory 33 includes both content that requires fine performance control and content that does not require detailed performance control, the production operation of the former content is voiced. It may be configured such that the LED control circuit 220 controls, and the latter effect operation is controlled by the host control circuit 210.

  In the present embodiment, the method of switching the control circuit used for the control of the movable accessory based on the details of the operation pattern of the movable accessory has been described, but the present invention is not limited, and the following may be performed as necessary. Such a control method (control circuit switching method) may be used as appropriate.

  For example, if you want to set the operation control time of a movable accessory (movable body) to a certain period in consideration of the fluctuation time of the symbol, etc., the control execution cycle of each control circuit is multiplied by an integer, and then multiplied by an integer. Alternatively, the movable accessory may be controlled using a control circuit that has a value closest to the desired operation control time of the movable accessory.

  For example, when it is desired to set the operation control time of the movable accessory (movable body) to 50 ms, the operation control time of the intended movable accessory (50 ms) within the time obtained by multiplying the control execution period (33 ms) of the host control circuit 210 by an integer. ) Is 66 ms (= 33 ms × 2). On the other hand, among the times obtained by multiplying the control execution cycle (12 ms) of the sound / LED control circuit 220 by an integer, the value closest to the intended operation control time of the movable accessory is 48 ms (= 12 ms × 4). Therefore, in this case, the voice / LED control circuit 220 controls the rendering operation of the movable accessory.

  However, for example, when it is desired to set the operation control time of the movable accessory (movable body) to 100 ms, the operation control time of the intended movable accessory within the time obtained by multiplying the control execution cycle (33 ms) of the host control circuit 210 by an integer. The value closest to (100 ms) is 99 ms (= 33 ms × 3). On the other hand, the value closest to the intended operation control time of the movable accessory in the time obtained by multiplying the control execution cycle (12 ms) of the voice / LED control circuit 220 by an integer is 96 ms (= 12 ms × 8). Therefore, in this case, the host control circuit 210 controls the effect operation of the movable accessory.

  As described above, when the method of switching the control circuit to be used is adopted based on the operation control time of the movable accessory (movable body) to be set, the processing load in the sub control circuit 200 can be distributed and reduced. Instead, it is possible to control the rendering operation of the movable accessory within the operation control time intended by the developer.

  More specifically, when this control method (control circuit switching method) is used, the operation control time of the movable object intended by the developer is an integral multiple of the control execution time of the control circuit having a long control execution cycle. If the time is close, the movable accessory can be controlled by the control circuit that reduces the processing load compared to the control circuit having a short control execution cycle. In addition, when this control method is used, even if the operation control time of the movable accessory is difficult for a control circuit with a long control execution cycle, the control circuit with a short control execution cycle can handle this situation. can do. That is, when this control method is used, it is possible to achieve both a reduction in processing load and realization of presentation control desired by the developer.

  In addition, when controlling a movable accessory (movable body), if the movable accessory is repeatedly operated in the forward and reverse directions frequently in a short period of time, the movable accessory may be damaged or stepped out. It may not be possible to operate the object in the intended pattern. Therefore, in order to prevent such inconvenience, there is a case where a minimum driving time (hereinafter referred to as “recommended driving time”) is set for each movable accessory (driving means) or for each operation type. is there.

  In this case, a movable accessory (movable body) is obtained by a control unit that can obtain a time that is longer than the recommended drive time and that is closest to the recommended drive time from a time obtained by multiplying the execution cycle of each control unit by an integer. It is preferable to drive. For example, when the recommended control time of the movable accessory (movable body) is set to 98 ms, the recommended drive time exceeds the recommended drive time within the time obtained by multiplying the control execution cycle (33 ms) of the host control circuit 210 by an integer. The value closest to time is 99 ms (= 33 ms × 3). On the other hand, the value that exceeds the recommended drive time and is closest to the recommended drive time in the time obtained by multiplying the control execution cycle (12 ms) of the sound / LED control circuit 220 by an integer is 108 ms (= 12 ms × 9). Therefore, in this case, the host control circuit 210 controls the effect operation of the movable accessory.

  As described above, when a specific control period (threshold value) such as a recommended drive time is set for the movable accessory (movable body) and its operation type (operation pattern), it can be moved from a plurality of control units. By using a control unit having a control execution cycle that can control the movable accessory within a control time that exceeds the specific control time and is closest to the specific control time as the control unit that controls the accessory, the movable accessory and its drive The production control by the movable accessory can be performed in the execution time intended by the developer while ensuring appropriate maintenance of the means (motor or the like).

(3) Configuration Example of Excitation Data in Special Effect H Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, excitation data of various operation patterns included in the effect operation of each sword object executed in the special effect H described above. The configuration of will be described. 72 is a table summarizing the structures of excitation data of various operation patterns included in the rendering operation of the first sword object 31 performed in the special rendering H, and FIG. 2 is a table summarizing the configuration of excitation data of various operation patterns included in the rendering operation of the two sword object 32. In each table, the excitation data of each operation pattern is arranged together in the order of operation pattern execution.

  In addition, the operation pattern 1 of the 1st sword object 31 in FIG. 72 respond | corresponds to the operation pattern which rotates the 1st sword object 31 from the initial position to the front of the display screen of the display apparatus 13, and stops. The operation pattern 10 of the one sword object 31 corresponds to an operation pattern in which the first sword object 31 is rotated from the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 to the initial position and stopped. Further, the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword combination 31 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the first sword combination 31. In the example shown in FIG. 72, since the rotation directions are alternately reversed four times in the operation patterns 2 to 9, the swing operation of the first sword object 31 is the four vibration operations of the first sword object 31. Consists of.

  Further, the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 in FIG. 73 corresponds to an operation pattern in which the second sword object 32 is rotated and stopped from the initial position to the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13. The operation pattern 10 of the two sword object 32 corresponds to an operation pattern in which the second sword object 32 is rotated and moved from the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 to the initial position. Further, the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword combination 32 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the second sword combination 32. In the example shown in FIG. 73, since the rotation direction is alternately reversed four times in the operation patterns 2 to 9, the swinging motion of the second sword object 32 is the four vibration operations of the second sword object 32. Consists of.

  In this example, as described above, an example in which the number of vibrations of the first sword object 31 in the swinging operation is the same as that of the second sword object 32 will be described. Without limitation, the number of vibrations of the first sword object 31 in the swinging operation may be different from that of the second sword object 32.

  Information specified as excitation data for each operation pattern (operation patterns 1 to 10) includes, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the motor excitation method, the rotation direction of the sword, and the operation speed of the sword , The number of steps of the sword object and the excitation time after the sword object stops. The contents of each information are as follows.

(A) Excitation Method The excitation method is information indicating the excitation method of the motor that drives the movable accessory and is employed in each operation pattern. The excitation method includes a value “1” indicating the one-phase excitation method, a value “2” indicating the two-phase excitation method, a value “3” indicating the 1-2 phase excitation method, and a value “4” indicating the all-phase excitation method. Is set.

(B) Rotation direction The rotation direction is information indicating the rotation direction (movement direction) of the movable accessory (movable member) in each operation pattern. In the rotation method, one of a value “1” indicating the forward rotation direction, a value “2” indicating the reverse rotation direction, and a value “3” indicating no rotation (holding the stopped state) is set.

(C) Motion speed The motion speed is information indicating the moving speed of the movable accessory in each motion pattern, but this information varies depending on the contents of the effect. Therefore, in FIGS. It only shows whether the speed is the same.

  In the special effect H, for example, the operation speed (“A”) of the operation pattern 1 of the first sword object 31 is the operation speed (“C” or “E”) of the other operation patterns of the first sword object 31. However, the operation speeds (“C”) of the operation patterns in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword object 31 are set to the same value. In the special effect H, for example, the operation speed (“F”) of the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 is the operation speed (“H” or “E” of the other operation patterns of the second sword object 32. )), But the operation speeds (“H”) of the respective operation patterns in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword object 32 are set to the same value. In the special effect H, the operation speed (“F”) of the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 is set to be faster than the operation speed (“A”) of the operation pattern 1 of the first sword object 31. Is done.

(D) Number of steps The number of steps is information indicating the movement rotation angle of the movable accessory in each operation pattern, but this information varies depending on the contents of the effect. Therefore, in FIG. 72 and FIG. Only the number of steps is the same.

  In the special effect H, for example, the number of steps (“B”) of the operation pattern 1 of the first sword object 31 is set to the same value as that of the operation pattern 10, but the number of steps of the operation patterns 2 to 9 (“ D ") is set to a different value. Further, for example, the number of steps (“D”) of each operation pattern in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword object 31 is set to the same value. In addition, since the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword object 31 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the first sword object 31, the number of steps of the operation patterns 1 and 10 of the first sword object 31 ( “B”) is larger than the number of steps (“D”) of each operation pattern in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword object 31.

  In the special effect H, for example, the number of steps (“G”) of the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 is set to the same value as that of the operation pattern 10, but the number of steps of the operation patterns 2 to 9 is set. ("I") is set to a different value. Furthermore, for example, the number of steps (“I”) of each operation pattern in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword object 32 is set to the same value. In addition, since the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword object 32 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the second sword object 32, the number of steps of the operation patterns 1 and 10 of the second sword object 32 ( “G”) is larger than the number of steps (“I”) of each operation pattern in the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword object 32.

(E) Excitation time after stop The excitation time after stop (information on the threshold value of a predetermined parameter indicating the drive status of the drive means) is used to continuously excite the motor after the operation of the corresponding operation pattern is completed (the excitation current is Time). This excitation time after stop becomes a parameter for error detection, as will be described in the excitation time monitoring process shown in FIG. 121 described later, and even if the excitation time after stop after the operation of the corresponding operation pattern ends, the motor Is energized (excitation current continues to flow through the motor), a predetermined error process (motor stop process) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, an error detection parameter for the accessory control (motor drive control) is included for each operation pattern.

  The excitation time after the stop includes a value “1” indicating 12 msec, a value “2” indicating 28 msec, a value “3” indicating 60 msec, a value “4” indicating 124 msec, a value “5” indicating 508 msec, and 1020 msec. One of the values “6” is set. It should be noted that the post-stop excitation time is appropriately set according to, for example, the effect of the movable accessory in the operation pattern (for example, the length of the excitation time, the strength of excitation, etc.), the motor characteristics and durability, and the like.

  In addition, the operation pattern 1 of the first sword object 31 shown in FIG. 72 is an operation pattern in which the first sword object 31 is rotated and stopped from the initial position to the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 as described above. Corresponding to Further, the first sword combination 31 is a relatively large movable combination. Therefore, in the operation pattern 1 of the first sword combination 31, in order to stop the first sword combination 31 reliably on the front surface (production position) of the display device 13, as shown in FIG. A relatively long time (“4” = 124 msec) is set as the post-excitation time.

  Moreover, since the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword combination 31 shown in FIG. 72 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the first sword combination 31 as described above, In the operation pattern, the moving rotation angle of the first sword object 31 is small and the operation speed cannot be set so high. Therefore, in each of the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the first sword object 31, a short time (“2” = 28 msec) is set as the excitation time after the stop.

  Furthermore, the operation pattern 10 of the first sword object 31 shown in FIG. 72 corresponds to an operation pattern in which the first sword object 31 is rotated and stopped from the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 to the initial position. In this operation pattern, the final stop position (initial position) of the first sword object 31 is not visible to the player, so there is no need to reliably stop the first sword object 31. Therefore, in the operation pattern 10, the post-stop excitation time (“3” = 60 msec) shorter than the post-stop excitation time of the operation pattern 1 is set.

  Further, the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 shown in FIG. 73 is an operation pattern in which the second sword object 32 is rotated from the initial position to the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 and stopped as described above. Corresponding to Note that the second sword object 32 is a lighter object than the first sword object 31, but in the special effect H, as described above, the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32 (rotation movement operation) ) Is done at high speed. Therefore, in the operation pattern 1 of the second sword object 32, as shown in FIG. 73, the second sword object 32 is stopped in order to surely stop the second sword object 32 on the front surface (effect position) of the display screen of the display device 13. A relatively long time (“4” = 124 msec) is set as the post-excitation time.

  Further, since the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword combination 31 shown in FIG. 73 correspond to the operation patterns for swinging the second sword combination 32 as described above, In the operation pattern, the movement rotation angle of the second sword object 32 is small and the operation speed cannot be set so high. Therefore, in each of the operation patterns 2 to 9 of the second sword object 32, a short time (“1” = 28 msec) is set as the excitation time after the stop. Since the second sword accessory 32 is lighter than the first sword accessory 31, the first sword accessory 32 has a first sword during the post-stop excitation time set by the movement pattern of the second sword accessory 32. A value shorter than that set in the operation pattern of the swinging motion of the accessory 31 is set.

  Furthermore, the operation pattern 10 of the second sword object 32 shown in FIG. 73 corresponds to an operation pattern in which the second sword object 32 is rotated and stopped from the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 to the initial position. In this operation pattern, the final stop position (initial position) of the second sword object 32 is not visible to the player, so there is no need to reliably stop the second sword object 32. Therefore, in the operation pattern 10, the post-stop excitation time (“3” = 60 msec) shorter than the post-stop excitation time of the operation pattern 1 is set.

  In FIGS. 72 and 73, the excitation data for each operation pattern of each sword object is shown in one table, but in the special effect H, the control system at the time of the swing operation of each sword object is other than that. Actually, the excitation data including the operation patterns 2 to 9 is different from the excitation data of other operation patterns (excitation data including the data of the operation patterns 1 and 10) because it is different from the control system at the time of the production operation. Provided. When the effect control of the special effect H is executed, excitation data including the data of the operation patterns 1 and 10 is set in the accessory request for the host control circuit 210, and the accessory for the voice / LED control circuit 220 is set. Excitation data including operation patterns 2 to 9 is set in the request. The excitation data is stored in, for example, a built-in ROM (not shown) in the host control circuit 210.

  Although not shown, the second sword object 32 rotates from the initial position to the front surface of the display screen of the display device 13 between the operation pattern 1 and the operation pattern 2 of the first sword object 31. There is an operation pattern in which the stop state is maintained for the period up to, that is, an operation pattern in which “3” without rotation is defined in the rotation direction.

  Here, although the configuration of the excitation data supplied to the shutter accessory 33 is not shown in the figure, the configuration of the excitation data supplied to the shutter accessory 33 is also shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73. It is constructed in the same way as the excitation data.

<Error detection function for movable accessories>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes various error detection functions that detect whether or not each movable accessory is operating normally, and execute predetermined error processing when an error is detected. Hereinafter, an example of the error detection function provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[Error detection function based on the number of restorations of movable objects]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not the movable accessory is present at the initial position at a predetermined timing at which the movable accessory should be present at the initial position (in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation display starts). If it is determined that the movable combination is not present at the initial position, a process (recovery process) for returning the movable combination to the initial position is performed. And the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with the error detection function which performs a process at the time of an error based on the continuous execution frequency | count of this recovery process. The operation of this error detection function is controlled by the host control circuit 210, and the control operation is specifically performed as follows.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not all the movable accessories are present at the initial position when the special symbol fluctuation display starts (when the fluctuation start command is received). This determination processing is performed based on the detection result of the detection device (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the initial position provided in each movable accessory.

  Next, when it is determined at the start of the special symbol variation display (when the variation start command is received) that all the movable accessories are not present in the initial position, the host control circuit 210 has returned to at least the initial position. A process (recovery process) for returning the movable accessory to the initial position is performed once for a movable accessory that is not present. That is, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which can perform the recovery process of a movable accessory once in the fluctuation display period (one game period) of one special symbol.

  Next, even if the movable object recovery process is performed, if all the movable objects are not present at the initial position, the host control circuit 210 starts the next special symbol variation display (when the variation start command is received). In addition, the restoration process is performed again on the movable accessory that has not returned to at least the initial position.

  In this embodiment, when the recovery process of the movable accessory is continuously executed every time the change display of the special symbol is started in this way, the host control circuit 210 updates the continuous execution count of the recovery process ( Process for adding 1 to the number of continuous executions). Further, the number of continuous executions of the recovery process of the movable accessory is counted by an initial position recovery counter described later provided in the sub work RAM 210a.

  And even if the recovery process of the movable combination is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (even if the number of continuous executions of the recovery process reaches the predetermined number of times), The host control circuit 210 determines that an error has occurred in the movable accessory, and as an error process, stops the operation of the motor that drives all the movable actors and disables the transfer of the accessory request. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the movable combination subjected to the restoration process in the game period (the predetermined number of special symbol variable display periods) in which the restoration process is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is the same. In the case of not being a movable accessory (motor), the example in which the number of continuous executions of the recovery process of the movable accessory is counted and the above-described error processing is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, continuous execution of recovery processing of a movable combination only when the movable combination that has been subjected to the recovery process in the game period in which the predetermined number of recovery processes are executed is the same movable combination (motor) The number of times may be counted, and the above-described error processing may be performed.

  The specific processing of the error detection function based on the number of recovery processing of the movable accessory described above is the processing for receiving the change start command shown in FIG. 117 described later, the initial position recovery counter update processing shown in FIG. 118 described later, and This will be described in detail in the initial position restoration confirmation process shown in FIG. 120 described later. Moreover, the following effects are acquired by providing the error detection function based on the recovery processing frequency | count of the movable accessory mentioned above.

  There is also a method to execute the above error processing (all motor stop, etc.) at the start of the special symbol variation display when a failure occurs in the movable symbol at the start of variation display of the special symbol (when the variation start command is received) Conceivable. However, in this method, the malfunction of the movable accessory (the movable accessory does not return to the initial position, etc.) is caused by, for example, the special symbol variation display being performed multiple times (multiple games are performed). In the case of a minor problem that is resolved (the movable accessory returns to the initial position), an unnecessary error is generated.

  On the other hand, if the error detection function based on the number of restoration processing times of the movable accessory of the present embodiment described above is used, even if the minor malfunction as described above occurs in the movable accessory, An error does not occur during a game period in which the number of continuous executions is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In addition, when the trouble is resolved by the recovery process of the movable accessory executed during the game period, the above-described error process (stopping all motors, etc.) is not performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an unnecessary error does not occur unlike a gaming machine having a function that makes it possible to execute processing at the time of error (for example, stop all motors) for each special symbol variation display described above.

  In addition, in the error detection function based on the number of restoration processing of the movable accessory of the present embodiment described above, even if a malfunction occurs in the movable accessory, the game period in which the error time processing is not performed is a certain period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, (Game period in which the recovery process is executed 10 times)), for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of serious troubles such as damage to movable objects.

[Error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of movable objects]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation data for driving the motor of each movable accessory includes, for each operation pattern, an error detection parameter for the accessory control (a predetermined parameter indicating the driving status of the driving means). As information on the threshold value, the post-stop excitation time is specified. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function of determining whether or not an error of the movable accessory has occurred based on the post-stop excitation time. The operation of this error detection function is controlled by the host control circuit 210, and the control operation is specifically performed as follows.

  First, the host control circuit 210, during the control of the effect rendering, for each operation pattern of each movable accessory, the time during which the movable accessory continues to be excited after the operation of the operation pattern (hereinafter referred to as “excitation monitoring”). Time)). When the excitation monitoring time monitored for each operation pattern in a predetermined movable accessory (motor) exceeds the corresponding post-stop excitation time, the host control circuit 210 determines the predetermined movable accessory (motor). It is determined that an error has occurred, and as an error process, the operation of all movable members (motors) or movable members (motors) in which an error has occurred is stopped. A specific process of the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of the movable accessory will be described in detail in an excitation time monitoring process shown in FIG. 121 described later.

  In the present embodiment, an example of adopting a process for stopping the motor (stopping power supply) will be described as an error-time process executed when an error occurs in the excitation time monitoring process. It is not limited to. For example, a process of reducing (adjusting) a current value, a voltage value, or a power value applied to the motor may be employed as an error time process of the excitation time monitoring process.

  By providing an error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process for the movable accessory described above, the following effects can be obtained.

  In the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process for the movable accessory described above, the post-stop excitation time defined for each operation pattern constituting the effect operation of the movable accessory, that is, whether or not an error has occurred in the movable accessory is determined. The information regarding the threshold value of the excitation monitoring time is appropriately set according to the effect mode of the movable accessory in the operation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to finely set the post-stop excitation time (information on the threshold value of excitation monitoring time) according to the control mode of the movable accessory (for example, the length of excitation time, the strength of excitation, etc.). Since it can do, the burden to the drive means (motor) of a movable accessory can be suppressed appropriately, and the failure rate of a movable accessory can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the post-stop excitation time (information on the threshold value of the excitation monitoring time) can be finely set in accordance with the characteristics and durability of the driving means (motor) of the movable accessory. The failure rate of things can be further reduced.

  In this embodiment, a configuration example for determining that an error has occurred when the excitation monitoring time monitored after the operation pattern of the movable accessory has exceeded the post-stop excitation time defined for each operation pattern of excitation data, that is, Although an example has been described in which the excitation time after stop defined for each operation pattern of excitation data is used as a threshold for excitation monitoring time, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin time (for example, 15 msec) to the excitation time after stopping is set as a threshold value of the excitation monitoring time, and the excitation monitoring time exceeds the time obtained by adding the predetermined margin time to the excitation time after stopping Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that an error has occurred. In this case, the predetermined margin time to be added to the post-stop excitation time is appropriately set according to, for example, the effect of the movable accessory in the operation pattern, the motor characteristics and durability, and the like.

<Speaker check function>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player checks the volume of sound output from each speaker (sound generator) in the speaker group 10 while the special symbol is not changing, and likes the volume. Is provided with a function (hereinafter referred to as “speaker check function”). Hereinafter, the operation of the speaker check function will be described with reference to FIGS. 74A and 74B to 80A and 80B. 74A and 74B to 80A and 80B show examples of various operation screens displayed on the display screen (display area 13a) of the display device 13 according to the player's operation when the speaker check function is activated. FIG.

  74A and 74B to 80A and 80B, the two speakers 11 (treble speakers) provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 29 and the back side of the two speaker covers 27 are provided. An operation example of the speaker check function capable of individually checking the volume of each of the two speakers (bass for low sound) will be described.

  First, in order to activate the speaker check function, the player keeps pressing the decision button 37 for a predetermined time (so-called long press) during the non-fluctuating period of the special symbol. As a result, a password input screen is displayed on the display screen (display area 13a) of the display device 13, as shown in FIG. 74A. As the password, for example, a password used when a player acquires a game history with a mobile terminal or the like can be used.

  The password entry screen also displays an option “return”. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen and selects the option “return” (for example, generates a state in which the image display mode of the option “return” has changed) and presses the decision button 37 in that state, The display screen of the display device 13 returns to the normal game screen.

  Next, when the password input operation by the player is completed on the password input screen, a menu selection screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 as shown in FIG. 74B. In this example, “game history confirmation”, “operation explanation”, “liquid crystal brightness check”, and “speaker check” are displayed as menu options on the menu selection screen.

  It should be noted that the option “return” is also displayed on the menu selection screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the input of the password. Return to the screen (screen of FIG. 74A).

  Next, when the player operates the selection button 36 (up / down movement buttons) on the menu selection screen and selects the option “speaker check” from among a plurality of options, the option “speaker” is displayed as shown in FIG. 74B. The image display mode of “check” changes. In the example shown in FIG. 74B, the character color of the option “speaker check” and the background color are reversed. In this state, when the player presses the enter button 37, the selection of the option “speaker check” is confirmed, and the operation of the speaker check function is started.

  When the operation of the speaker check function is started, a speaker selection screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 as shown in FIG. 75A.

  In this speaker selection screen, the wording of the instruction to select the speaker that is the sound output check target (the sound output condition setting target) ("Please select the speaker to output sound") is displayed at the top of the screen At the same time, an image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed at the center of the screen. In addition, in the speaker arrangement configuration image displayed in the center of the screen, the images of the two speakers displayed on the upper right part and the upper left part when viewed from the player side are provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 29. Two speakers (bass for low sound) provided on the back side of the two speaker covers 27 correspond to the two speakers 11 (speakers for high sound), respectively. Correspond to each.

  In addition, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a white arrow image (hereinafter simply referred to as an arrow image) indicating the currently selected speaker is displayed beside the speaker image. In the initial state of the speaker selection screen shown in FIG. 75A, an arrow image is displayed next to the image of the lower right speaker (low sound speaker) when viewed from the player side, and the speaker is selected. .

  In addition, the option “return” is also displayed on the speaker selection screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the decision button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the menu selection. Return to the screen (screen of FIG. 74B).

  Next, on the speaker selection screen, the player operates the selection button 36 (up / down / left / right movement buttons) to move the position of the arrow image displayed beside the speaker image between the four speaker images, An arrow image is set beside the speaker image to be checked for sound output. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 75B, an arrow image is set beside the image of the upper left speaker (high-frequency speaker) when viewed from the player side.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 in the state of FIG. 75B, the speaker to be checked for sound output is confirmed, and then the volume setting screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 as shown in FIG. 76A. Is displayed.

  On this volume setting screen, the wording of the instruction to set the volume for the speaker whose sound output is to be checked ("Please set the volume") is displayed at the top of the screen, and pachinko games in the center of the screen An image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the machine 1 is displayed. In the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen, the value of the volume currently selected in the selected speaker is displayed beside the arrow image. In the initial state of the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 76A, the volume value (“14”) set before the speaker check function is activated is displayed beside the arrow image indicating the speaker that is the sound output check target. Is done.

  In addition, an option “return” is also displayed on the volume setting screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the selection of the speaker. Return to the screen (screen of FIG. 75B).

  Next, on the volume setting screen, the player operates the selection button 36 (up / down or left / right movement buttons) to increase / decrease the volume (the volume value is increased / decreased by one unit from “14”), and the desired volume is set. select. FIG. 76A shows an example in which the player selects the volume “14” without increasing or decreasing the volume.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 in the state of FIG. 76A, the sound volume is fixed, and a tone color setting screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 as shown in FIG. 76B.

  On this tone setting screen, the words of the instruction to set the tone for the speaker for which sound output is to be checked ("Please set the tone") are displayed at the top of the screen, and pachinko games in the center of the screen An image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the machine 1 is displayed. In the timbre setting screen shown in FIG. 76B, for example, a desired timbre can be selected from various system sounds such as a single sound, various music pieces, various sound effects, and various error sounds. Therefore, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed at the center of the screen, the type of tone currently selected in the speaker for sound output check is displayed below the arrow image and volume. In the initial state of the timbre setting screen shown in FIG. 76B, “Song A” is displayed as the timbre default type under the arrow image indicating the sound output check target speaker and the volume.

  Also, the option “return” is displayed on the tone color setting screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the volume selection. Return to the screen (screen of FIG. 76A).

  Next, on the timbre setting screen, the player operates the selection button 36 (up / down or left / right movement buttons) to change the timbre options to select a desired timbre. Here, a case where the timbre “Song C” is selected will be described. In this case, although not shown, on the tone color setting screen, the character “Song C” is displayed under the arrow image indicating the speaker to be checked for sound output and the volume as a tone color option.

  Then, when the player selects a desired tone color (“Song C”) on the tone color setting screen shown in FIG. 76B and the player presses the enter button 37 in that state, the tone color is confirmed and the display device 13 As shown in FIG. 77A, a sound start confirmation screen is displayed on the display screen.

  On the confirmation screen for sound output start, a message (“Sound is output. Are you sure? (Start with enter button)”) is displayed on the screen to confirm whether or not to start sound output from the speaker for sound output check. And an image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed at the center of the screen. At this time, the loudspeaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed at the center of the screen displays the volume and tone color type currently selected for the sound output check target speaker. In the example shown in FIG. 77A, the volume “14” and the tone color “Song C” are displayed beside the image of the speaker whose sound output is to be checked.

  In addition, an option “return” is also displayed on the confirmation screen for starting sound output. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in that state (for example, the player sets the sound output condition to the speaker for sound output check). When the setting content is changed), the display screen of the display device 13 returns to the previous screen, that is, the tone selection screen (screen of FIG. 76B).

  Then, on the sound output confirmation screen shown in FIG. 77A, when the player presses the enter button 37, the volume (“14”) in which the set tone color (“Song C”) is set from the speaker that is the sound output check target. ), And a screen indicating that sound is being output (hereinafter referred to as a sound output screen) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 as shown in FIG. 77B.

  On this sound output screen, a message indicating that sound is being output from the speaker whose sound output is to be checked ("Now sound ... (End with OK button)") is displayed at the top of the screen, An image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the part. At this time, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen, a note image indicating that the sound is currently being output is also displayed around the speaker image of the sound output check target. .

  Also, the option “return” is displayed on the sound output screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in that state (for example, when the player listens to the tone (music) from the beginning), the display is displayed. The display screen of the device 13 returns to the previous screen, that is, the sound output confirmation screen (screen in FIG. 77A).

  When the player presses the enter button 37 during the sound output from the sound output check target speaker, the sound output operation stops, and the display screen of the display device 13 displays the sound output as shown in FIG. 78A. A confirmation screen for stopping is displayed.

  On this sound output stop confirmation screen, a message indicating that sound output from the speaker that is the sound output check has been stopped (“Sound output has been stopped”) is displayed at the top of the screen, and at the center of the screen An image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. At this time, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed at the center of the screen, the note image displayed around the speaker output target image disappears.

  In addition, an option “return” is also displayed on the confirmation screen for stopping sound output. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in that state (for example, when the player listens to the tone (music) from the beginning), the display is displayed. The display screen of the device 13 returns to the previous screen, that is, the confirmation screen for starting sound output (the screen in FIG. 77A).

  Next, when a predetermined period has elapsed in the state of FIG. 78A, or when a predetermined operation button (selection button 36, determination button 37, etc.) is pressed by the player, the display screen of the display device 13 displays FIG. 78B. As shown in FIG. 4, a confirmation screen (hereinafter referred to as a sound output condition storage screen) is displayed as to whether or not to store the sound output condition (volume condition of each speaker) of the currently set speaker group 10.

  On this sound output condition saving screen, a message indicating whether or not to save the currently set sound output condition of the speaker group 10 (“Do you want to save with this volume setting? (Confirm with the enter button)”) is displayed. An image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed at the center of the screen. At this time, the sound output condition currently set for the sound output check target speaker is displayed in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen. In the example of FIG. 78B, the currently set sound output conditions (volume “14” and tone “song C”) are displayed next to the image of the upper left speaker (high-frequency speaker) as viewed from the player side. The

  Then, when the player presses the enter button 37 on the sound output condition storage screen shown in FIG. 78B, the sound output condition (volume) of the currently set speaker group 10 is stored. By this operation, although not shown, for example, in the sound output condition save screen shown in FIG. 78B, a message indicating that the sound output condition has been saved (“Save completed (finished by returning)”) is displayed on the screen. Displayed at the top. After that, on this sound output condition saving screen, the option “return” is selected by the player's operation on the selection button 36, and when the determination button 31 is pressed in this state (the option “return” is determined). ), The operation of the speaker check function ends. When the operation of the speaker check function ends, a normal game screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 in the state shown in FIG. 78B and the sound output condition (volume) is stored, the sound check target speaker before the speaker check function is activated. The sound output condition (volume) is rewritten to the sound output condition (volume) set when the speaker check function is activated. However, for the speakers that have not been subjected to the sound output check by the speaker check function this time (in the example shown in FIG. 78B, speakers other than the speaker at the upper left as viewed from the player side), this sound output condition storage processing , The sound output condition rewriting process is not performed, and the sound output condition before the speaker check function is activated is maintained.

  In the speaker check function of the present embodiment, before the sound output condition storage processing is executed in the state of FIG. 78B, the player also sets the sound output conditions of speakers other than the speaker whose sound output conditions have been checked. Can be checked. That is, with the speaker check function of this embodiment, sound output conditions can be checked collectively for a plurality of speakers. Specifically, on the sound output condition saving screen shown in FIG. 78B, when the player presses the selection button 36 (any one of the up / down / left / right movement buttons) without pressing the enter button 37, The sound output conditions of speakers other than the checked speakers can also be checked.

  For example, on the sound output condition saving screen shown in FIG. 78B, when the player presses the selection button 36 without pressing the enter button 37, the display screen of the display device 13 is 2 as shown in FIG. 79A. Switch to the selection screen of the first speaker.

  On this speaker selection screen, an instruction word (“Please select the second speaker for sound output”) for selecting the second speaker for sound output check is displayed at the top of the screen. At the same time, an image showing the speaker arrangement configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed at the center of the screen. At this time, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen, the sound output condition that has been set is displayed next to the image of the checked speaker (the upper left speaker (high-frequency speaker)). Is displayed. In addition, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound output check target is placed beside the image of a speaker other than the checked speaker (in the example shown in FIG. 79A, the upper right speaker as viewed from the player side). An arrow image indicating is displayed.

  In addition, an option “return” is also displayed on the second speaker selection screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the sound output condition. To the saving screen (screen of FIG. 78B).

  Then, in the second speaker selection screen shown in FIG. 79A, when the second speaker to be checked for sound output is determined by the same operation as the player's operation described in FIG. 75A and FIG. On the display screen of the device 13, as shown in FIG. 79B, a volume setting screen for the second sound output check target speaker is displayed. FIG. 79B shows an example of a display screen when the upper right speaker (sound speaker) is selected as the second sound output check target speaker as viewed from the player side.

  In the volume setting screen, a volume value “14” set before the speaker check function is activated and a tone “music piece C” are displayed beside the arrow image indicating the second speaker for sound output check. Is displayed. In the operation for setting the sound output condition (volume) of the second and subsequent speakers, the timbre type is fixed to the timbre type set for the first sound output check target speaker. The selection operation is not performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the operation for selecting the tone type can be executed again in the operation for setting the sound output condition (volume) of the second and subsequent speakers. In this case, when the timbre type reselection operation is performed on the second and subsequent speakers and the timbre type is changed, the timbre types of all the speakers to be checked for sound output are simultaneously changed.

  In addition, the option “return” is also displayed on the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 79B. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the enter button 37 in this state, the display screen of the display device 13 is the previous screen, that is, the second screen. Return to the speaker selection screen (screen of FIG. 79A) for the sound output check.

  Thereafter, the sound volume setting operation for the second sound output check target speaker is performed in the same manner as the operation described with reference to FIG. 76A. When the player completes the sound volume setting operation, the display screen of the display device 13 is displayed. A sound output confirmation screen (not shown) similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 77A is displayed. Here, an example will be described in which the volume is set to “16” for the second speaker for sound output check.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 on the sound output start confirmation screen displayed after setting the sound output condition of the second sound output check target speaker, the first and second sound output checks are performed. A set tone color (“Song C”) is output from each of the target speakers at a set volume, and the display screen of the display device 13 displays a mid-sound screen as shown in FIG. 80A. Is done. In this case, in the speaker arrangement configuration image of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen, the sound is currently being output around the images of the first speaker and the second speaker that have been subjected to the sound output check. A note image indicating that is displayed.

  Also, the option “return” is displayed on the sound output screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the decision button 37 in that state (for example, when the player listens to the timbre from the beginning), the display device 13 The display screen returns to the previous screen, that is, the sound output confirmation screen (not shown).

  Then, when the player presses the enter button 37 during the sound output from the two speakers subject to the sound output check (in the state of FIG. 80A), the sound output operation is stopped, and the display screen of the display device 13 A sound stop confirmation screen (not shown) similar to the screen shown in FIG. 78A is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80B, the display screen of the display device 13 displays a sound output condition storage screen for determining whether or not to store the sound output condition of the currently set speaker group 10.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 on the sound output condition storage screen shown in FIG. 80B, the sound output condition (volume) of the currently set speaker group 10 is stored. In this process, the sound output conditions of the two speakers that are the targets of the sound output check are rewritten. Next, on this sound output condition saving screen, when the player selects the “return” option by operating the selection button 36, and the determination button 31 is pressed in that state (the option “return” is determined). ), The operation of the speaker check function ends. When the operation of the speaker check function ends, a normal game screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  Further, in the speaker check function of this embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 80B, when the player selects a third speaker and checks the sound output conditions, first, the output shown in FIG. On the sound condition saving screen, the player presses the selection button 36 (any of the up / down / left / right moving buttons) without pressing the enter button 37 (without performing the sound output condition saving process). By this operation, the display screen of the display device 13 is switched to a third speaker selection screen (not shown).

  Next, the speaker selection / determination operation and volume selection / determination operation described with reference to FIGS. 79A and 79B are repeated for the third speaker to be subjected to the sound output check. Next, when the sound output condition (volume) is determined for the third sound output check target speaker, the display screen of the display device 13 is the same as the display screen shown in FIG. A confirmation screen (not shown) is displayed.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 on the sound output start confirmation screen displayed after the sound output condition setting of the third sound output check target speaker, the first to third sound output checks are performed. A set tone color (“Song C”) is output from each of the target speakers at a set volume, and the display screen of the display device 13 has a sound output screen as shown in FIG. 81A. Is displayed.

  In this case, the arrangement configuration image of the speakers of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the center of the screen is currently sounding around the first to third speaker images subjected to sound output check. A note image indicating the presence is displayed. In FIG. 81A, the lower left speaker (low sound speaker) as viewed from the player side is selected as the third speaker for sound output check, and the third speaker for sound output check is selected. On the other hand, an example in which the volume is set to “14” is shown.

  In addition, an option “return” is also displayed on the sound output screen. When the player operates the selection button 36 on this screen to select the option “return” and presses the decision button 37 in that state (for example, when the player listens to the timbre from the beginning), the display device 13 The display screen returns to the previous screen, that is, the sound output confirmation screen (not shown).

  When the player presses the enter button 37 during the sound output from the three speakers that are the sound output check target (in the state of FIG. 81A), the sound output operation is stopped, and the display screen of the display device 13 A sound output stop confirmation screen (not shown) similar to the screen shown in FIG. 78A is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81B, the display screen of the display device 13 displays a sound output condition storage screen for determining whether or not to store the sound output condition of the speaker group 10 that is currently set.

  When the player presses the enter button 37 on the sound output condition storage screen shown in FIG. 81B, the sound output condition (volume) of the currently set speaker group 10 is stored. In this process, the sound output conditions of the three speakers that are the target of the sound output check are rewritten. Next, on this sound output condition saving screen, when the player selects the “return” option by operating the selection button 36, and the determination button 31 is pressed in that state (the option “return” is determined). ), The operation of the speaker check function ends. When the operation of the speaker check function ends, a normal game screen is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  Further, in the speaker check function of the present embodiment, when the player selects the fourth speaker and sets the sound output condition after the state of FIG. 81B, first, the sound output shown in FIG. In the condition saving screen, the player presses the selection button 36 (any of the up / down / left / right movement buttons) without pressing the enter button 37 (without saving the sound output condition). Thereafter, the same operation as the operation performed on the second or third speaker for sound output check described above is repeatedly performed on the fourth speaker for sound output check.

  In this embodiment, the sound output condition of each speaker is checked by the speaker check function in this way. When this speaker check function is provided, the following effects can be obtained.

  By applying the above-described speaker check function to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a plurality of speakers (sound generators) as in the present embodiment, whether or not each speaker is normally output is determined individually. Can be confirmed.

  The speaker check function can not only individually check the sound output status of each speaker, but also check the sound output status of a plurality of speakers at a time. It is possible to check whether the left / right balance of the sound is not biased to one side or whether there is a malfunction in the chord state.

  In the speaker check function, the sound output condition of each speaker can be individually set, so that the sound output balance is finely adjusted according to, for example, the player's preference and the surrounding acoustic environment. Can do.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned speaker check function, for example, when the sound output (volume) balance from a plurality of speakers is out of order, if the sound output balance is adjusted by viewing, the production sound is adjusted with the adjusted sound output balance in subsequent games. Therefore, even in a situation where the speaker cannot be repaired or the like, the game can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 82, main control main processing by control of the main CPU 71 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main control main processing in the present embodiment.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, first, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (S1). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs processes such as permitting access to the main RAM 73, restoring the backup, and initializing the work area. Next, the main CPU 71 performs an initial value random number update process (S2). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the initial random number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (S3). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the special symbol game and the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display device 61. Details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs control processing of the symbol display device (S5). In this process, the main CPU 71 changes the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the normal symbol based on the execution results of the special symbol control process (S3) and the normal symbol control process (S4). Control display.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process (S6). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates game information data to be transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 123, the sub control circuit 200, the hall computer of the game store, etc., and stores the game information data in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs storage / game state data generation processing (S7). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73.

  After the process of S7, the main CPU 71 returns the process to the process of S2, and repeats the processes after S2 described above.

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol control process performed in S3 in the main control main process (see FIG. 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol control process in the present embodiment. Note that the numerical values in parentheses (“00” to “08”) written in parallel with the reference numerals of the respective processing steps shown in FIG. 83 indicate the value of the control state flag, and this control state flag is stored in a predetermined memory in the main RAM 73. Stored in the area. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  First, the main CPU 71 loads a control state flag (S11). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

  Based on the value of the control state flag loaded in S11, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in S12 to S20 described later. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of S12 to S20.

  Further, the main CPU 71 executes the process of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of S12 to S20. In the period before the predetermined timing is reached, the other subroutine processing is executed without executing the processing of each step. In addition, a system timer interrupt process (described later, see FIG. 89) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S11 is completed, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory check process (S12).

  In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of reserved special symbols that are variably displayed, and if the number of reserved is not “0”. When there is a holding ball, processing such as hit determination, determination of special symbol, determination of variation pattern of special symbol, and the like are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol fluctuation time management process (S13) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern determined in the current process. Set the special symbol variation time in the waiting time timer. That is, this process is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the process of S12 has elapsed.

  On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. Details of the special symbol memory check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol variation time management process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("01") indicating that the control state flag indicates the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol display described later is displayed on the control state flag. A value ("02") indicating the time management process (S14) is set, and the waiting time after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, this process is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of S13 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the result of the hit determination when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”) and the waiting time after determination set in the process of S13 has elapsed. Is “big hit” or “small hit”. When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (S15) described later in the control state flag, Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the latency timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S14 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed.

  On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (S20) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. Details of the special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when it is determined in S14 that the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit start interval management process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the first value when the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot start interval management process (“03”) and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S14 has elapsed. Based on the data read from the main ROM 72, the variables located in the main RAM 73 are updated in order to open the special winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54.

  In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a large winning opening opening process (S16), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and the upper opening limit time (for example, 30 sec) of the large winning opening. Is set in the big prize opening time timer. In other words, this process is set so that a process for opening a special prize opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening opening process (S16). In this process, first, the main CPU 71 sets the condition that the big prize winning prize counter is a predetermined number or more when the control status flag is a value ("04") indicating the big prize opening releasing process, and the release. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the big winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied).

  In S16, when one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close a predetermined prize winning opening (the first prize winning opening or the second prize winning opening). To do. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“05”) indicating a later-described extra winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S17) in the control state flag, and sets the extra winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. . That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the big prize opening set in S17 has elapsed, it is set so that the residual ball monitoring process in the special prize mouth described later is executed.

  In S16, the main CPU 71 transmits an inter-round display command to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the big prize opening opening process.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("05") indicating that the control status flag indicates the winning ball remaining ball monitoring process ("05"). It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening (the final round) is satisfied.

  When the main CPU 71 determines in S17 that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described later is set to be executed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines in S17 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval. Set the jackpot end interval time to the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in S17 has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, in S17, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the big prize opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the big opening number, the main CPU 71 performs a waiting time management process before the big prize opening re-opening ( S18). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The number of times counter is updated so as to increase it by “1”. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets an opening upper limit time (for example, 30 sec) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the above-described special prize opening opening process (S16) is executed again after the process of S18.

  Further, in S18, the main CPU 71 transmits a large winning opening opening display command to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before the large winning opening reopening.

  If the main CPU 71 determines in S17 that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening number, the big hit end interval process is performed (S19). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("07") indicating that the control state flag indicates the jackpot end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("" when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed). 08 ") is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of S19. Details of the jackpot end interval process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Then, the main CPU 71 performs control to shift the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state when the big hit symbol is the probability variation symbol, and shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the big hit symbol is the non-probability variation symbol. To control. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to “small hit”, the main CPU 71 determines that the gaming state after the “small hit” game is more than the gaming state controlled when “small hit” is won. Also, control is performed so as not to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended, or when “losing” is won (S20).

  In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 71 stores and updates the data indicating the number of holdings (starting storage information) to be decreased by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol storage check process (S12) described above is set to be executed after the process of S20.

  After the process of S20, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control process, and moves the process to S4 of the main control main process (see FIG. 82).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “lost”, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “00”, “01”. , “02”, “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (S12), special symbol variation time management process (S13), special symbol display time management process (S14), and special symbol game end process (S20) in this order. Execute at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to “00”, “small hit” when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”. Set in the order of “01”, “02”, “03”. Thereby, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (S12), special symbol variation time management process (S13), special symbol display time management process (S14), and jackpot start interval management process (S15) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described process for opening the winning a prize opening (S16), the remaining ball monitoring process for the winning prize opening (S17), and the waiting time management process before reopening the winning a prize opening (S18) in this order at a predetermined timing. And execute a big hit game or a small hit game.

  Note that if the big hit gaming state end condition is satisfied during the big hit game, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (S16), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S17), the big hit end interval process (S19), and the special symbol game end process (S20) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing to end the big hit gaming state.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process of S4 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 82 (see FIG. 87 to be described later) also branches the processing flow in accordance with the status as in the special symbol control process as will be described later. .

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in this embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the special symbol memory check process performed in S12 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol storage check process in this embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 loads a control state flag (S31). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (S32). In S32, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not “00” (when S32 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process, and the process proceeds to the special symbol control process (FIG. 83). Return to).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is “00” in S32 (when S32 is YES), the main CPU 71 receives the second start opening prize (variable display of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not the hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (S33).

  In S33, when the main CPU 71 determines that the second start opening winning number is not “0” (NO in S33), the main CPU 71 sets the second starting opening winning number corresponding to the second starting opening winning number. "1" is subtracted from the value of the starting memory number (S34).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. The data (information) are stored as the start memory. The data included in the start memory stored in each second special symbol start storage area is, for example, data such as a jackpot determination random number value and a jackpot symbol random number value acquired when winning the second start port 45. .

  After the process of S34, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second start opening winning (S35). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the process of S35, the main CPU 71 performs a process of S40 described later.

  Here, returning to the processing of S33 again, in S33, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of the second start-up winnings held is “0” (when S33 is YES), the main CPU 71 It is determined whether or not the reserved number (first start memorized number) of the first start opening prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0” (S36).

  In S36, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of first start opening prizes held is “0” (S36 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process (S37). After the process of S37, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

  In the demonstration display process of S37, the main CPU 71 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. That is, the main CPU 71 determines that the reserved number of the first start opening winnings and the second starting opening winnings is “0” (the state where the special symbol game start storing is “0”) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec), the predetermined value is set as the demonstration display permission value. When the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value in the demonstration display process of S37, the main CPU 71 sets the demonstration display command data in the main RAM 73. Demo display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the host control circuit 210 in the sub-control circuit 200. When the sub control circuit 200 receives the demo display command data, the sub control circuit 200 displays a demo screen in the display area 13 a of the display device 13.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S36 that the number of first start opening prizes held is not "0" (when S36 is NO), the main CPU 71 corresponds to the number of first start opening prizes held. The value of the first start memory number is subtracted by “1” (S38).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. The data (information) are stored as the start memory. The data included in the start memory stored in each first special symbol start storage area is, for example, data such as a jackpot determination random number value and a jackpot symbol random number value acquired when winning the first start port 44 .

  After the process of S38, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the first start opening winning (S39). In this process, the main CPU 71 transfers (stores) the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the process of S39, the main CPU 71 performs a process of S40 described later.

  Next, after the processing of S35 or S39, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time-short state variation frequency counter is “0” (S40).

  In S40, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the short-time state variation number counter is “0” (when S40 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S40 that the value of the short-time state variation number counter is not “0” (when S40 is NO), the main CPU 71 decrements the value of the short-time state variation number counter by “1”. (S41).

  After the process of S41, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is “0” (S42).

  In S42, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the short-time state variation number counter is not “0” (when S42 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S42 that the value of the time-short state change number counter is “0” (when S42 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets “0” in the time-short flag (S43). ).

  After S43, if S40 is YES or S42 is NO, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag (S44). In this process, the main CPU 71 transmits a hold subtraction command and a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts jackpot determination processing (S45). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines (determines) which one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” is won by lottery based on the random number for big hit determination acquired at the start opening.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the information (data) of the storage area used for the previous variation display (S46). Next, the main CPU 71 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (S47). After the process of S47, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

[Special symbol display time management process]
Next, the special symbol display time management process performed in S14 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol display time management process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating a special symbol display time management process (S51). In S51, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (when S51 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the special symbol display time management process. The process ends, and the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S51 that the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (when S51 is YES), the main CPU 71 It is determined whether or not the value (waiting time) is “0” (S52). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time after change confirmation (variation start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been consumed.

  When the main CPU 71 determines in S52 that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process, and performs the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S52 that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is “big hit”. A determination is made (S53). In this process, the main CPU 71 simultaneously transmits a special effect stop command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In S53, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (when S53 is NO), the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. Set (S54). After the process of S54, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S53 that the special symbol game is “big hit” (when S53 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the big hit flag to the on state (S55). The jackpot flag is a flag indicating whether or not to play a jackpot game.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the value of the time-short state change number counter, the value of the time-short flag, and the value of the probability change flag (S56). Next, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process in the control state flag (S57).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 msec) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S58). Next, the main CPU 71 sets a jackpot start command (special symbol start display command) corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (S59). In this process, the main CPU 71 simultaneously transmits a special symbol start display command to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the round number display LED pattern flag to the ON state (S60). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. After the process of S60, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

[Big hit end interval processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end interval process performed in S19 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end interval process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating a big hit end interval process (“07”) (S71).

  When the main CPU 71 determines in S71 that the control state flag is not a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”) (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process and performs the process. Is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S71 that the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process ("07") (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is It is determined whether or not it is “0” (S72). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed.

  In S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (when S72 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process, and the process is a special symbol control process (FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S72 that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (when S72 is YES), the main CPU 71 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag ( S73).

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the round number distribution flag (sets it to “0”) (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (S75). In this process, the main CPU 71 simultaneously transmits a special symbol end display command to the sub-control circuit 200. Next, the main CPU 71 clears the big hit flag (S76).

  Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13 to FIG. 16), and sets the value of the probability change flag based on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of the jackpot selection symbol command (S77). . Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and sets the value of the short time flag based on the gaming state at the time of the big win and the type of the big hit selection symbol command (S78). .

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction flag is “1” (whether or not the time reduction flag is in an on state) (S79). When the main CPU 71 determines in S79 that the value of the time reduction flag is not “1” (when S79 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process, and the process is a special symbol control process (FIG. 83). Return to).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction flag is “1” in S79 (when S79 is YES), the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Then, based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the type of the big hit time selected symbol command, the corresponding value of the number of time reductions is set in the time reduction state variation number counter (S80). After the process of S80, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 83).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the normal symbol control process performed in S4 in the main control main process (see FIG. 82) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol control process in the present embodiment.

  Note that the numerical values in parentheses (“00” to “04”) written in parallel with the reference numerals of the respective processing steps in the flowchart shown in FIG. 87 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 73. Stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  First, the main CPU 71 loads a normal symbol control state flag (S91). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. Based on the value of the normal symbol control state flag loaded in S91, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in S92 to S96 described later. The normal control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of S92 to S96.

  Further, the main CPU 71 executes the process of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of S92 to S96. In the period before the predetermined timing is reached, the other subroutine processing is executed without executing the processing of each step. In addition, a system timer interrupt process (described later, see FIG. 89) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S91 ends, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol storage check process (S92).

  In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of holdings of the variable symbol variable display, and the number of holdings is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (S93) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in the current process. Set to the wait timer. That is, by this process, the normal symbol change time monitoring process described later is set to be executed after the normal symbol change time determined in S92 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol variation time monitoring processing (S93). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (S94) is set, and the waiting time after determination (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the normal symbol display time monitoring process to be described later is set to be executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of S93 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol display time monitoring processing (S94). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after determination set in the process of S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of is “hit”. If the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 71 conducts a normal electric accessory release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a value indicating a normal electric accessory release process (S95) described later (S95). “03”) is set. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary electric accessory release process is executed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “win”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (S96) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines in S94 that the result of the hit determination is “win”, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory release process (S95). In this process, the main CPU 71 has received a predetermined number of start prizes during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 46 when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not the condition that the upper limit time for opening the ordinary electric utility item 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric role opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied.

  In S95, when the above one condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the blade member, which is the ordinary electric accessory 46. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described normal symbol game end process (S96) in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol game end process (S96). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol game end process (“04”), the main CPU 71 decreases the data indicating the number of hold of the variable symbol variable display by “1”. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next normal symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of S96, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (S92) is set to be executed.

  After the process of S96, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control process, and moves the process to S5 of the main control main process (see FIG. 82).

[Power-on processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the power-on process executed by the main CPU 71 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure of power-on processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 sets a predetermined initial value in the stack pointer (S101). Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is in an off state (LOW level) (S102). In this determination process, when the power interruption detection signal is in the OFF state, this corresponds to a case where the power interruption detection process is not in an executable state. That is, in a state where power interruption can be detected, the power interruption detection signal is turned on.

  In S102, when the main CPU 71 determines that the power interruption detection signal is in the OFF state (LOW level) (when S102 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the power interruption detection signal in the ON state (HIGH level). Until the determination process of S102 is repeated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S102 that the power interruption detection signal is not in the OFF state (LOW level) (when S102 is NO), the main CPU 71 determines that the built-in RWM (Read Write Memory), that is, the main Access permission processing to the RAM 73 is performed (S103). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs various initial setting processes such as an initialization process for the work area of the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process (S104). In this processing, the main CPU 71 waits until the operation state of the sub control circuit 200 becomes a state where data such as command data can be received. Next, the main CPU 71 performs initialization processing for a device incorporating the CPU (S105).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is in an ON state (HIGH level) (S106). Specifically, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 5) is on.

  In S106, when the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear signal is on (when S106 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S113 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S106 that the backup clear signal is not in the ON state (when S106 is NO), the main CPU 71 has the power failure detection flag set (the value of the power failure detection flag is It is determined whether it is “1” (S107).

  In S107, when the main CPU 71 determines that the power failure detection flag is not set (when S107 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S113 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S107 that the power interruption detection flag is set (when S107 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs damage check processing of the work area (S108). In this process, the main CPU 71 checks whether or not the work area is damaged based on the checksum value or the like.

  After the process of S108, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the work area is normal based on the result of the damage check process for the work area of S108 (S109). In S109, when the main CPU 71 determines that the work area is not normal (when S109 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs a process of S113 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the work area is normal in S109 (when S109 is YES), the main CPU 71 performs initial setting processing of the work area that requires an initial value to be set when power is restored. (S110). Next, the main CPU 71 performs notification setting processing for a high-probability gaming state at the time of power failure recovery (S111).

  After the process of S111, the main CPU 71 transmits a power interruption return command to the sub-control circuit 200 (S112). In this process, the main CPU 71 transmits the first power failure recovery command and the second power failure recovery command (see FIGS. 25 and 26) described above to the sub-control circuit 200. After the process of S112, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

  Here, it returns to the process of S106, S107, or S109 again, and when S106 is YES determination or when S107 or S109 is NO determination, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is returned to the state before the power failure detection. If not, the main CPU 71 clears all work areas (S113).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of a work area that requires an initial value to be set when the main RAM 73 is initialized (S114). Next, the main CPU 71 transmits an initialization command for the main RAM 73 to the sub-control circuit 200 (S115). After the process of S115, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 interrupts the main process at a predetermined period and executes the system timer interrupt process even during execution of the main process. Specifically, the main CPU 71 executes a system timer interrupt process according to clock pulses generated from the clock generation circuit 74 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Now, with reference to FIG. 89, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 71 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 saves the data (information) of each register (S121). Next, the main CPU 71 performs random number update processing (S122). In this process, the main CPU 71 updates various random numbers extracted from a big hit determination counter, a symbol determination counter, a hit determination counter, a fall determination counter, a variation pattern determination counter, an effect pattern determination counter, and the like. . Note that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a timing determined at a cycle of 2 msec in order to ensure fairness.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs switch input detection processing (S123). In this processing, the main CPU 71 detects winning or passing to various start ports, various winning ports, and the ball passage detector 43. The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a timer update process (S124). Specifically, the main CPU 71 has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and a big winning opening opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening. Update processing is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs command output processing (S125). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various commands such as a winning command and a variation command to the host control circuit 210 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information output process (S126). In this process, the main CPU 71 outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 123, etc., to the hall computer of the game store.

  Next, the main CPU 71 restores the data in each register saved in S121 (S127). After the process of S127, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S123 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 89) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of switch input detection processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 performs a start opening winning detection process (S131). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered (passed through) the first start port 44 or the second start port 45. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not a game ball winning is detected by the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a or the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a. The details of the start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a general winning opening detection process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 51. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not a game ball winning is detected by the general winning ball sensor 51a. When the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 51 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening passing detection process (S133). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not a winning of a game ball has been detected by the first big prize opening solenoid 53b or the second big prize opening solenoid 54b. When the winning of the game ball to the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is detected, the main CPU 71 performs predetermined various processes corresponding to the prize.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a gate passage detection process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 43. That is, the main CPU 71 detects whether or not the passing of the game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 43a. Next, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball passage detector 43, the main CPU 71 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the passage. After the process of S134, the main CPU 71 ends the switch input detection process, and moves the process to S124 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 89).

[Start-up winning detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the start opening winning detection process performed in S131 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 90) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start opening winning detection process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected based on the output signal of the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (S141).

  In S141, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first start port 44 is not detected (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs the process of S149 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S141 that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 has been detected (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 71 pays out information corresponding to the first starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S142). In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S142, payout information for a predetermined number of game balls is set.

  After the processing of S142, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of reserved balls) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is less than “4” (S143).

  In S143, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of first start opening prizes held is not less than “4” (when S143 is NO), the main CPU 71 performs a process of S149 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S143 that the number of first start opening prizes to be held is less than “4” (when S143 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the number of first start opening prizes to be held. A process of adding “1” is performed (S144).

  After the processing of S144, the main CPU 71 acquires various random values used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S145). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires various random values such as a jackpot determination random number value, a design random number value, a fall determination random number value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 9) and the symbol determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 11), and acquires the jackpot determination disorder acquired in S145. Based on the numerical value and the design random number value, it is determined whether or not it is a “hit”, and in the case of “hit”, the jackpot design (determination identification design) to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 is determined. Make a selection (judgment).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process for determining whether or not there is a fall (S147). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a falling lottery based on the falling determination random value acquired in S145, and determines whether or not a falling has occurred. As a result, the main CPU 71 acquires the falling lottery information (“0”: no fall or “1”: with fall).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the pending addition command data at the time of winning the first start opening in the main RAM 73 (S148).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the jackpot random number determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 9), the symbol determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 11), and the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 16). ) And winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 17), the gaming state (“normal”, “probability”, “short time”), winning type (“big hit”, “small hit”, “losing” )), Starting addition number command based on information such as number of starting memories (first special symbol hold number), symbol designation command, jackpot selection symbol command, winning prize presentation information, jackpot determination result information, falling lottery information, etc. The information (transmission contents) to be included in is determined.

  At this time, the gaming state is acquired by referring to the values of the probability variation flag and the hourly flag, and the winning type is acquired by referring to the jackpot random number determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 9). The symbol designation command and the big hit selection symbol command are acquired by referring to the symbol determination table (first start port) (see FIG. 11), and the winning effect information is the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 17). Is obtained by referring to. Further, the result information of the jackpot determination is acquired in the process of S146, and the falling lottery information is acquired in the process of S147.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S148, a hold addition command at the time of winning the first start opening is transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210). Then, based on the hold addition command at the time of winning the first start opening, the sub-control circuit 200 selects the effect pattern of the hold effect and the prefetch effect.

  After the processing of S148, or when S141 or S143 is NO, the main CPU 71 detects a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 45 based on the output signal of the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a. It is determined whether or not (S149).

  In S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 is not detected (when S149 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the starting port winning detection process and performs the process. Is shifted to S132 of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines in S149 that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 45 is detected (when S149 is YES), the main CPU 71 pays out information corresponding to the second starting port winning. Is set in the main RAM 73 (S150). In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S150, payout information for a predetermined number of game balls is set.

  After the processing of S150, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of reserved balls) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is less than “4” (S151).

  In S151, when the main CPU 71 determines that the number of second start opening prizes held is not less than “4” (when S151 is NO), the main CPU 71 ends the start opening prize detection process and switches the process. The process proceeds to S132 in the input detection process (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines in S151 that the number of second start opening prizes to be held is less than “4” (S151 is YES), the main CPU 71 sets the number of second start opening prizes to be held. A process of adding “1” is performed (S152). After the processing of S152, the main CPU 71 acquires various random values used for the lottery and stores the acquired various random values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 (S153). Specifically, the main CPU 71 acquires various random values such as a jackpot determination random number value, a design random number value, a fall determination random number value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (S154). In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot random number determination table (second start port) (see FIG. 10) and the symbol determination table (second start port) (see FIG. 12), and acquires the jackpot determination disorder acquired in S153. Based on the numerical value and the design random number value, it is determined whether or not it is a “hit”, and in the case of a big win, selection of a jackpot symbol (effect identification symbol) to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 13 ( Judgment).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process for determining whether or not there is a fall (S155). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a falling lottery based on the falling determination random value acquired in S153, and determines whether or not a falling has occurred. As a result, the main CPU 71 acquires the falling lottery information (“0”: no fall or “1”: with fall).

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets the pending addition command data at the time of the second start opening winning in the main RAM 73 (S156).

  In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the jackpot random number determination table (second start port) (see FIG. 10), the symbol determination table (second start port) (see FIG. 12), and the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 16). ) And winning presentation information determination table (see FIG. 17), gaming state (“normal”, “probability”, “short time”), winning type (“big hit”, “losing”), starting memory Information to be included in the hold addition command based on information such as the number (the number of hold of the second special symbol), the symbol designation command, the jackpot selection symbol command, the winning effect information, the jackpot determination result information, the falling lottery information, etc. Determine what to send.

  At this time, the gaming state is acquired by referring to the values of the probability variation flag and the hourly flag, and the winning type is acquired by referring to the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) (see FIG. 10). The symbol designation command and the big hit selection symbol command are acquired by referring to the symbol determination table (second start port) (see FIG. 12), and the winning effect information is the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 17). Is obtained by referring to. Moreover, the result information of the jackpot determination is acquired in the process of S154, and the falling lottery information is acquired in the process of S155.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S156, the hold addition command at the time of the second start opening winning is transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210). The sub-control circuit 200 selects an effect pattern of the hold effect and the pre-read effect based on the hold addition command at the time of winning the second start opening. Then, after the process of S156, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening prize detection process, and moves the process to S132 of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 90).

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, contents of various processes executed by various control circuits in the sub board 202 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes based on the various commands.

[Sub control main process]
First, with reference to FIG. 92, the sub control main process executed by the host control circuit 210 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub control main process in the present embodiment. The sub-control main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

  First, the host control circuit 210 performs an initialization process (S201). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs various initial setting processes such as hardware initialization, device initialization, application (various processing) initialization, backup data restoration initialization, and the like. The details of the initialization process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 clears the counter of the watchdog timer (S202). At the time of activation, a reset time (for example, 200 msec) of the watchdog timer is set. After that, when the service pulse is not written (timeout), the power interruption process is started. In addition, the timing for clearing the watchdog timer counter is determined at the start of the main loop process (the processes of S202 to S212) in the sub-control main process, the device initialization process, the application initialization process, and the power interruption. At the start of processing.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs an operation unit input process (S203). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means such as the selection button 36 and the determination button 37 by the player, and an operation content information acquisition process. Details of the operation means input processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a main / sub-command control process (S204). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 performs command data reception processing (interrupt processing) when command data is received from the main CPU 71 and processing for storing command data in the sub work RAM 210a. Details of the main / sub command control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs command analysis processing (S205). In this process, the host control circuit 210 analyzes the contents of the command stored in the sub work RAM 210a and acquires various types of information included in the command. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs animation request construction processing (S206). In this process, the host control circuit 210 generates an animation request required when performing the presentation control using the display device 13, and responds to the animation request based on the animation request (corresponding to the animation request. Various requests (sound request, lamp request, and accessory) for operating various rendering devices (which can be expressed as, for example, corresponding to rendering control (display) in the display device 13 executed based on the animation request) Request). Details of the animation request construction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of command packets (number of bytes) differs depending on the type of command. When the host control circuit 210 receives a plurality of command data and the total number of packets of all the command data is equal to or less than the predetermined maximum number of packets, the command analysis process (S205) and animation described above are performed. The request construction process (S206) is performed on the received plurality of command data in the same frame. However, when the total number of packets of a plurality of received command data exceeds a predetermined maximum number of packets, command data corresponding to the predetermined maximum number of packets among the received plurality of command data is commanded in the same frame. Analysis processing (S205) and animation request construction processing (S206) are performed, and command analysis processing (S205) and animation request construction processing (S206) for the command data for the remaining number of packets are performed in the next frame.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the processes of S204 to S206 have been performed for the number of received commands (S207).

  In S207, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the processes in S204 to S206 have not been performed for the number of received commands (when S207 is NO), the host control circuit 210 returns the process to S204. The subsequent processing is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S207 that the processes in S204 to S206 have been performed for the number of received commands (S207 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs a drawing control process (S208). ). In this process, the host control circuit 210 generates a moving image command and a drawing request based on the animation request, and transmits the generated moving image command and the drawing request generated in the previous frame to the display control circuit 230. At this time, the display control circuit 230 performs various processes for displaying (drawing) the effect image on the display device 13 based on the received moving image command and the drawing request. Details of the drawing control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 107A and 107B described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs voice control processing (S209). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 transmits a sound request (command) to the voice / LED control circuit 220. At this time, the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs sound reproduction control processing by the speaker group 10 based on the received sound request. Details of the voice control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 114A and 114B described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs lamp control processing (S210). In this process, the host control circuit 210 transmits a lamp request (command) to the sound / LED control circuit 220. At this time, the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs light emission control of the lamp group 20 based on the received lamp request. Details of the lamp control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115A and 115B described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs an accessory control process (S211). In this process, the host control circuit 210 transmits excitation data for driving the accessory group 30 to the motor controller 270 (motor driver 271) via the I2C controller 261 based on the generated accessory request. In addition, the host control circuit 210 outputs the generated accessory request to the voice / LED control circuit 220 according to the determined content of the effect. Then, the motor driver 271 outputs the received excitation data to the corresponding motor 272 to drive the accessory group 30. Details of the accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the process of S202 described above is equal to or longer than a predetermined FPS period (S212). In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 210 executes the above-described series of processing (main loop processing) from S202 to S211 at a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to about 33 msec (30 FPS), for example.

  In S212, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the elapsed time from the start of the process of S202 is not equal to or longer than a predetermined FPS cycle time (when S212 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the determination process of S212. repeat. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S212 that the elapsed time from the start of the process in S202 is equal to or longer than a predetermined FPS cycle time (when S212 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process. It returns to S202 and repeats the process after S202.

[Initialization]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, the initialization process performed in S201 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation of the initialization process in the present embodiment, and FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initialization process in the present embodiment.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the initialization process, the host control circuit 210, as shown in FIG. 93, not only itself but also various control circuits connected to the host control circuit 210 and the hardware of the controller. Initialize the hardware. Next, each control circuit or controller performs initialization processing of the corresponding device (the lamp group 20, the speaker group 10, the display device 13, and the accessory group 30). A specific procedure of this initialization process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not power-on is detected (S221). If the host control circuit 210 determines in S221 that the power-on is not detected (S221 is NO), the host control circuit 210 repeats the determination process of S221. In the power-on detection process, it is determined whether or not the power supply voltage supplied to the host control circuit 210 is stable. Therefore, when the power-on is not detected, the power is actually on. Even if it exists, it represents that the power supply voltage supplied to the host control circuit 210 is not stable. Therefore, the power-on state detection process repeatedly performed in S221 is a standby process until the power supply voltage supplied to the host control circuit 210 is stabilized.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S221 that the host control circuit 210 has detected power-on (when S221 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs hardware initialization processing (S222). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 includes various control circuits (its own circuit, the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the display control circuit 230) provided in the sub-board 202, and a motor connected to the host control circuit 210. The controller 270 hardware is initialized. Specifically, register initialization processing, control ROM setting processing, and the like in each control circuit and motor controller 270 are performed.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 clears the counter of the watchdog timer (S223).

  Next, the various control circuits provided in the sub-board 202 and the motor controller 270 perform initialization processing of the corresponding devices (S224). In this processing, the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs initialization / setting processing (including ROM access setting processing) of the drivers (control programs) of the lamp group 20 and the speaker group 10. The display control circuit 230 also performs initialization / setting processing (including ROM access setting processing) of the driver of the display device 13. In addition, the motor controller 270 performs initialization / setting processing (including ROM access setting processing) of the motor driver 271 for driving each accessory in the accessory group 30. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in this processing, the host control circuit 210 also performs initialization / setting processing (including ROM access setting processing) of a driver of an operation means (not shown).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 clears the counter of the watchdog timer (S225).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs application initialization processing (S226). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 performs initialization processing of various setting values used in various processing performed in the main loop processing in the sub-control main processing described in FIG. Specifically, the host control circuit 210 performs an operation means input process (S203), a main / sub command control process (S204), an animation request construction process (S206), a drawing control process (S208), and a voice control process (S209). ) And initialization processing of various setting values used in each of the lamp control processing (S210).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs other various initialization processes (S227). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 performs backup restoration initialization processing, accessory control initialization processing, and LED registration processing. Details of the backup recovery initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 to be described later, and details of the accessory control initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 to be described later. Details of the registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Then, after the process of S227, the host control circuit 210 ends the initialization process and moves the process to S202 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

[Backup recovery initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the backup recovery initialization process performed in S227 during the initialization process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the backup recovery initialization process in this embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 performs a consistency check process for game data stored in the backup area of the SRAM 210b (S231). In this game data consistency check process, game data sum value determination, program version and magic code (generally called magic number) check, sum check, and the like are performed. The “game data” includes parameter information in the command and the like, and is a data structure (a storage area or a variable) referred to in various lottery processes and animation request construction processes performed by the host control circuit 210. (Aggregate). Further, as will be described later, in the “game data”, information on lottery results of various lottery processes (for example, production patterns) is also registered.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the game data stored in the backup area of the SRAM 210b is consistent (S232). In this process, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the game data is damaged.

  In S232, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the game data is consistent (when S232 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs a process of S236 described later.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S232 that the game data is not consistent (when S232 is NO), the host control circuit 210 matches the game data stored in the mirroring area in the SRAM 210b. A sex check process is performed (S233). Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the game data stored in the mirroring area in the SRAM 210b is consistent (S234).

  In S234, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the game data is consistent (when S234 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S236 described later.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S234 that the game data is not consistent (when S234 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs a game data initialization process (when the RAM is cleared) ( S235). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs an initialization process when clearing a RAM area in which game data is stored. Specifically, the host control circuit 210 initializes variables and the like to return the game data to the initial value (completely initializes the game data).

  After the process of S235, or when S232 or S234 is YES, the host control circuit 210 performs a game data initialization process (when the power is turned on) (S236).

  At this time, if the process of S236 is performed after the process of S232, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of restoring the game data stored in the backup area of the SRAM 210b. When the process of S236 is performed after the process of S234, the host control circuit 210 performs a restoration process of the game data stored in the mirroring area in the SRAM 210b. In addition, when the process of S236 is performed after the process of S235, the host control circuit 210 performs a process for restoring completely initialized game data (initial value).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 backs up the game data restored by the process of S236 in the SRAM 210b (S237). After the process of S237, the host control circuit 210 ends the backup restoration initialization process.

[Function control initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the accessory control initialization process performed in S227 during the initialization process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory control initialization process in the present embodiment. In this process, initialization processing of various settings used in the accessory control process (S211) in the sub-control main process described with reference to FIG. 92 is performed.

  First, the host control circuit 210 sets “0” to the number of operations of a predetermined movable accessory in the accessory group 30 (S241). Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the motor 272 that drives a predetermined movable accessory is in the initial position (S242). This determination process is performed based on the detection result of a sensor (not shown) provided to determine whether or not the motor 272 is in the initial position.

  In S242, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the motor 272 is in the initial position (when S242 is YES), the host control circuit 210 applies to all the motors 272 used in a predetermined movable accessory. It is determined whether or not the determination process of S242 has been performed (S243).

  In S243, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the determination process of S242 has not been performed for all the motors 272 to be used (when S243 is NO), the host control circuit 210 moves the process to S241. Return, and repeat the process after S241.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S243 that the determination process of S242 has been performed on all the motors 272 to be used (when S243 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the power-on process. (S244). In the process of S244, the host control circuit 210 performs an operation confirmation process for a predetermined movable accessory when the power is turned on. Specifically, the host control circuit 210 moves a predetermined movable combination to the maximum movable range or a predetermined movable range, and then returns the predetermined movable combination to the initial position. Then, after the process of S244, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of S249 described later.

  Here, returning to the processing of S242 again, in S242, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the motor 272 is not in the initial position (when S242 is NO), the host control circuit 210 has a predetermined movable It is determined whether or not the number of operations of the accessory is 10 or more (S245). In this process, it is determined whether or not an abnormality (error) has occurred so as to stop the operation of the motor 272 to be inspected. However, the number of operations serving as a threshold for this error determination is not limited to 10 times. It can be set arbitrarily.

  In S245, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the number of operations is 10 times or more (when S245 is YES), the host control circuit 210 stops the operation of the motor 272 in which an error has occurred (error motor). Setting is made (S246). After the process of S246, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of S249 described later.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S245 that the number of operations is not 10 or more (when S245 is NO), the host control circuit 210 drives the motor 272 to be inspected and moves to the initial position. (S247). Next, the host control circuit 210 adds “1” to the number of operations (S248). After the process of S248, the host control circuit 210 returns the process to S242 and repeats the processes after S242.

  After the process of S244 or S246, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the operation stop of the error motor has been detected (S249).

  In S249, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the operation stop of the error motor is not detected (when S249 is NO), the host control circuit 210 shifts the operation state to the command reception standby state (S250). ). Then, after the process of S250, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control initialization process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S249 that the host control circuit 210 has detected the operation stop of the error motor (when S249 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets a state in which an accessory request cannot be passed ( S251). In this process, the host control circuit 210 cannot pass the feature request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the accessory request from the host control circuit 210 to the sound / LED control circuit 220. Set the non-delivery.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 sets a state in which the motor is stopped until the power is turned on again and a predetermined movable accessory initialization process is performed (S252). After the process of S252, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control initialization process. Note that, as in the present embodiment, when the accessory group 30 includes a plurality of movable accessories (the first sword accessory 31, the second sword accessory 32, and the shutter accessory 33), the accessory control initialization is performed. In the process, the processes of S241 to S252 are repeated for each movable accessory.

[LED registration process]
Next, the LED registration process performed in S227 during the initialization process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure of LED registration processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 registers hardware information of the channel of the LED 281 to be used (S261). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 sets the channel start port number, channel end port number, and channel start address of each SPI used.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs information setting of the LED driver 280 to be used (S262). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 registers a data table (the total number of lighting patterns of the LED 281, an information table corresponding to the luminance value output to the LED driver 280) in the LED driver 280. Then, after the process of S262, the host control circuit 210 ends the LED registration process.

[Operating means input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the operation means input process performed in S203 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of operation means input processing in this embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the menu execution flag is on (S271). The menu execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the menu selection screen display process described with reference to FIGS. 74A and 74B is started. When the menu execution flag is on, the menu selection screen display process starts. Is done. Note that the menu execution flag is set to the on state when the player presses the enter button 37 for a long time during the non-fluctuating period of the special symbol in the operation input timer interruption process (described later in FIG. 101). Is done.

  In S271, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the menu execution flag is not in the ON state (when S271 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the operation means input process, and the process is sub-control main process ( The process proceeds to S204 in FIG. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S271 that the menu execution flag is on (S271 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs display setting processing for the menu selection screen (S272). . By this processing, the password input screen described with reference to FIG. 74A is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13, and a state in which the player can input the password is generated.

  After the processing of S272, the host control circuit 210 performs password confirmation processing (S273). In this process, a process for confirming whether or not the password input by the player's operation is correct is performed on the password input screen displayed in the process of S272. If it is determined that the password input by this process is correct, a menu selection screen (menu list screen) shown in FIG. 74B, for example, is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13, and the player selects a predetermined menu from a plurality of menus. A state in which a menu can be selected is generated.

  In the process of S273, when the input of the password by the player is confirmed, the menu selection screen described in FIG. 74B is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13, and the next process of S274 is performed. However, for example, when the player does not confirm the password input for a predetermined period, or when the player selects the “return” option on the password input screen shown in FIG. The display screen of the display device 13 returns to the normal game screen (normal screen).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a selection operation process (S274). In this process, the host control circuit 210 detects the player's operation on the selection button 36 (up / down / left / right movement buttons) and displays the menu being selected on the menu selection screen in response to the selection operation. A mode (for example, a display mode in which the character color and background color of the option are reversed) is moved and displayed between a plurality of options. In addition, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the player has pressed the determination button 37 on a predetermined option being selected.

  In the process of S274, when a predetermined option is selected by the player and the predetermined option is determined, the next process of S275 is performed. For example, the option “Return” in the menu selection screen shown in FIG. 74B is performed. "Is selected by the player, the display screen of the display device 13 returns to the password input screen (screen of FIG. 74A) (that is, returns to the processing of S273).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the operation of the speaker check function described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81 is selected in the process of S274 (S275). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the option “speaker check” has been determined by the player on the menu selection screen shown in FIG. 74B.

  In S275, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the operation of the speaker check function is selected (when S275 is YES), the host control circuit 210 turns on the speaker setting execution flag (S276). With this process, the speaker check function described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81 is activated, and the sound output condition check process and setting process of the speaker group 10 can be executed.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S275 that the operation of the speaker check function has not been selected (when S275 is NO), the host control circuit 210 turns on another individual setting execution flag. (S277). By this processing, for example, menu processing corresponding to a predetermined option (“game history confirmation”, “operation explanation”, or “liquid crystal brightness check”) other than “speaker check” in FIG. 74B can be executed.

  After the process of S276 or S277, the host control circuit 210 turns off the menu execution flag (S278).

  After the process of S278, the host control circuit 210 performs an individual setting execution process (S279). In this process, a process corresponding to the selected menu is executed. Details of the individual setting execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the process of S279, the host control circuit 210 ends the operation means input process, and moves the process to S204 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 92).

[Individual setting execution processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the individual setting execution process performed in S279 in the operation means input process (see FIG. 98) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the individual setting execution process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the speaker setting execution flag is on (S281).

  In S281, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the speaker setting execution flag is not in the on state (when S281 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S290 described later.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S281 that the speaker setting execution flag is on (when S281 is YES), the host control circuit 210 uses the speaker check function to satisfy the sound output (volume) condition. A selection process of a speaker to be set (sound output check target) is performed (S282).

  In the processing of S282, first, the host control circuit 210 controls the display device 13 to display the speaker selection screen as shown in FIG. 75A on the display screen. With this process, a state is generated in which the player can select a predetermined speaker to be a sound output check target from among a plurality of speakers. Next, in response to the player's operation on the selection button 36 (up / down / left / right movement buttons), the host control circuit 210 indicates a pointer indicating the speaker being selected (in the example shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, a white arrow). Image) and the like are moved and displayed among a plurality of speakers on the display screen. Further, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the determination button 37 has been pressed by the player while a predetermined speaker is selected. Then, the host control circuit 210 determines the speaker selected when the determination button 37 is pressed by the player as a speaker (a specific sound generator) that is a sound output check target. By this processing, for example, a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 76A is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  In the process of S282, for example, when the player selects the option “return” on the speaker selection screen shown in FIG. 75A, the host control circuit 210 ends the individual setting execution process and performs the process. Then, the process returns to the process of displaying the menu selection screen (screen of FIG. 74B) on the display screen of the display device 13 (the process of S274 in FIG. 98).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a sound volume setting process on the speaker to be checked for sound output selected in S282 (S283).

  In the processing of S283, for example, on the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 76A, the volume is adjusted by the player operating the selection button 36 (up / down or left / right movement buttons), and the player operates the decision button 37. Finally, the volume is determined. Then, the host control circuit 210 sets the sound volume determined by the player's operation to the sound output check target speaker. By this processing, for example, the tone color setting screen shown in FIG. 76B is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  In the process of S283, for example, when the player selects the option “return” in the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 76A, the host control circuit 210 returns the process to the process of S282. That is, in this case, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of displaying the speaker selection screen (the screen in FIG. 75A) on the display screen of the display device 13 again.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a tone color setting process on the speaker whose sound output is to be checked in S283 (S284).

  In the processing of S284, for example, on the timbre setting screen shown in FIG. 76B, the timbre (single sound, music, sound effect, error sound) is selected by the player operating the selection button 36 (up / down or left / right movement buttons). The timbres are sequentially displayed, and the timbre is finally determined by the player's operation on the determination button 37. Then, the host control circuit 210 sets the timbre determined by the player's operation to the speaker whose sound output is to be checked. Further, in the present embodiment, the tone color setting process of S284 may or may not be executed for the second and subsequent speakers whose sound output is to be checked.

  In the process of S284, for example, when the player selects the option “return” in the tone color setting screen shown in FIG. 76B, the host control circuit 210 returns the process to the process of S283. That is, in this case, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of displaying the volume setting screen (the screen of FIG. 76A) on the display screen of the display device 13 again.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs sound output data setting processing (S285).

  In the process of S285, first, the host control circuit 210 performs a confirmation process as to whether or not to generate sound from a speaker that is a sound output check target with the volume and tone set in S283 and S284. By this processing, for example, a confirmation screen for starting sound output shown in FIG. 77A is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13. Next, when the player presses the enter button 37, the host control circuit 210 starts outputting sound from the speaker whose sound output is to be checked. By this process, for example, a sound output screen shown in FIG. 77B is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13. Thereafter, when the determination button 37 is pressed again by the player, the host control circuit 210 stops the sound output from the speaker whose sound output is to be checked. By this processing, for example, a confirmation screen for stopping sound output shown in FIG. 78A is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13. After that, when a predetermined period has elapsed or when a predetermined operation button (selection button 36, determination button 37, etc.) is pressed by the player, the host control circuit 210 displays, for example, a diagram on the display screen of the display device 13. Processing for displaying a sound output condition storage screen shown in 78B is performed. By this process, the process after S286 described later can be executed.

  In the process of S285, for example, when the player selects the option “return” on the sound output stop confirmation screen shown in FIG. 78A (for example, when listening to the sound again), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of displaying the confirmation screen for starting sound output (the screen in FIG. 77A) on the display screen of the display device 13 again.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not to store the sound output condition data set in the process of S285 (S286). In this processing, for example, the host control circuit 210 determines which of the selection button 36 and the determination button 37 is pressed by the player on the sound output condition saving screen shown in FIG. 78B (after the processing of S285). Determine. Specifically, for example, when the player presses the selection button 36 on the sound output condition saving screen shown in FIG. 78B, that is, when other speakers are also subject to sound output check, the host control circuit 210. Determines not to store the sound output condition data set in the process of S285. On the other hand, for example, in the sound output condition saving screen shown in FIG. 78B, when the player presses the enter button 37, the host control circuit 210 uses the sound output condition data set in the process of S285. It is determined to be memorized.

  In the processing of S286, for example, when the player has not pressed any of the selection button 36 and the determination button 37 for a predetermined period, the host control circuit 210 activates one of the selection button 36 and the determination button 37. It is automatically determined that the pressing operation has been performed, and processing corresponding to the pressing operation is performed. At this time, which of the selection button 36 and the determination button 37 the host control circuit 210 selects is set in advance.

  In S286, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the sound output condition data is not stored (when S286 is NO), the host control circuit 210 returns the process to the process of S282 and repeats the processes after S282. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S286 that the host control circuit 210 stores the sound output condition data (S286 is YES determination), the host control circuit 210 sets the sound volume set for the sound output check target speaker. The process of storing the data is performed (S287). In this process, the host control circuit 210 rewrites the volume data before the setting process with the set volume data for the speaker for which the sound output is to be checked. , Do not rewrite the volume data. In addition, when there are a plurality of speakers subject to sound output check at the time of this processing, the host control circuit 210 performs setting processing with data of the set volume for all speakers subject to sound output check. Rewrite the volume data.

  After the process of S287, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the option “return” has been selected by the player (there is a “return button operation”) on the display screen of the display device 13 after the sound output data is stored. Is determined (S288). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 selects and returns the choice “return” by the player's operation to the selection button 36 on the sound output condition storage screen after the sound output data is stored. It is determined whether or not the button 31 has been pressed.

  In S288, when the host control circuit 210 determines that there is no “return button operation” by the player (when S288 is NO), the host control circuit 210 repeats the determination process of S288. That is, the host control circuit 210 stands by until the player selects and determines the option “return” on the display screen of the display device 13 after the sound output data is stored.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S288 that there is a “return button operation” by the player (when S288 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets the speaker setting execution flag to an OFF state. (S289). With this processing, the operation of the speaker check function is terminated, and a normal game screen (normal screen) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  Then, after the processing of S289, the host control circuit 210 ends the individual setting execution processing and also ends the operation means input processing (see FIG. 98).

  Here, returning to the processing of S281 again, if S281 is NO, the host control circuit 210 executes the setting corresponding to the option other than the option “speaker check” displayed on the menu selection screen (see FIG. 74B). Processing is performed (S290). Specifically, in the example illustrated in FIG. 74B, the host control circuit 210 performs a predetermined menu execution process corresponding to, for example, the options “game history confirmation”, “operation explanation”, or “liquid crystal brightness check”. In the process of S290, when a predetermined menu execution process corresponding to an option other than the option “speaker check” is completed, a normal game screen (normal screen) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13.

  Then, after the processing of S290, the host control circuit 210 ends the individual setting execution processing and also ends the operation means input processing (see FIG. 98).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the individual setting execution process is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200). In other words, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) also serves as means (sound output condition confirmation means) for controlling the operation of the speaker check function (the sound output conditions of each speaker can be checked individually). The host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) is a means (sound generator selection means) that makes it possible to select a speaker for sound output check from a plurality of speakers in the process of S282, and a sound output in the process of S283. Means for setting the volume of the speaker to be checked (volume setting means), and makes the sound output under the sound output conditions set from the speaker for sound output check in the process of S285 (the sound signal for viewing is output to the speaker for sound output check) (Output) means (sound signal output means) and means (sound volume storage means) for storing the sound output condition (volume) set for the sound output check target speaker in the process of S287.

[Operation input timer interrupt processing]
Next, an operation input timer interrupt process executed by the host control circuit 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation of the operation input timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the operation input timer interrupt process in the present embodiment, and FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the button switch input detection process performed in the operation input timer interrupt process.

  In the operation means input process according to the present embodiment, when a player performs a predetermined operation related to performance on various operation means (for example, the selection button 36 and the determination button 37) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. As shown at 100, a signal corresponding to the predetermined operation (input signal in FIG. 100) is output from the driver of the operation means to the host control circuit 210. Then, the host control circuit 210 acquires information on an input state by a predetermined operation of the player based on the input signal.

  The operation input timer interrupt process is performed as a timer interrupt process (measurement timer update process) with a period of 1 msec. Note that the operation means input process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed at a preset FPS cycle (for example, about 33 msec). The specific contents of the operation input timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(1) Operation Input Timer Interrupt Process First, the host control circuit 210 performs a timer update process (S301). Next, the host control circuit 210 saves the data (information) of each register (S302).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs button switch input detection processing (S303). In this process, the host control circuit 210 detects whether or not the player's long press operation (predetermined operation) on the determination button 37 has been performed. When the host control circuit 210 detects the player's long press operation on the decision button 37, the host control circuit 210 sets the operation of the display function of the menu selection screen described in FIGS. 74A and 74B. To do. Details of the button switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 restores the data of each register saved in S302 (S304). Then, after the processing of S304, the host control circuit 210 ends the operation input timer interrupt processing.

(2) Button Switch Input Detection Processing Next, the button switch input detection processing performed in S303 during the operation input timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of button switch input detection processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation (long press operation) on the enter button 37 by the player (S311).

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S311 that there is no predetermined operation on the enter button 37 (if S311 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the button switch input detection process and inputs the process to the operation input. The process proceeds to S304 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 101). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S311 that there is a predetermined operation on the enter button 37 (when S311 is YES), the host control circuit 210 is not executing the special symbol variation display. Whether or not (S312).

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S312 that the special symbol fluctuation display is not not being executed (NO in S312), the host control circuit 210 ends the button switch input detection process and operates the process. The process proceeds to S304 of the input timer interrupt process (see FIG. 101). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S312 that the special symbol variation display is not being executed (YES in S312), the host control circuit 210 turns the menu execution flag on ( S313). By this processing, the password input screen described with reference to FIG. 74A can be displayed on the display screen (display area 13a) of the display device 13.

  Then, after the processing of S313, the host control circuit 210 ends the button switch input detection processing, and moves the processing to S304 of the operation input timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 101).

[Command control processing between main and sub (command reception interrupt processing)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the main / sub command control process performed in S204 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of command reception processing (command reception interrupt processing) performed in the main / sub command control processing of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71) to the sub-control circuit 200 (host control circuit 210) and the host control circuit 210 receives the command, the host control circuit 210 • Inter-subcommand control processing is performed as interrupt processing.

  First, the host control circuit 210 saves data (information) of each register (S321).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not an error has occurred at the time of command reception (S322).

  In S322, when the host control circuit 210 determines that a command reception error has not occurred (when S322 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S324 described later. On the other hand, if the host control circuit 210 determines in S322 that a command reception error has occurred (S322 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs error information setting processing (S323).

  After the processing of S323 or when S322 is NO, the host control circuit 210 performs reception command storage processing (S324). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 stores the received command data in a ring buffer (see FIG. 29) in the host control circuit 210. When a command reception error occurs and error information is set in S323, the received command data and error information set information is stored in the ring buffer.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 restores the data of each register saved in S321 (S325). Then, after the process of S325, the host control circuit 210 ends the command reception process.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the command analysis process performed in S205 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of command analysis processing in the present embodiment. Note that the command analysis processing described below is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200). That is, the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200) also serves as a command analysis process (command analysis unit).

  First, the host control circuit 210 acquires received command data stored in the sub work RAM 210a (S331). At this time, if there is error information associated with the received command data, the host control circuit 210 discards the received command data.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 specifies the type of the received command (S332). In this process, the host control circuit 210 stores information on the specified command type in the sub work RAM 210a. Note that, as described above, the command type is specified based on the information (preset value) stored in the command type part (first byte area) of each command (see FIGS. 22 to 27). For example, if the received command is a demonstration display command, the command type “80H” is stored in the sub work RAM 210a in the process of S332.

  Next, when the host control circuit 210 determines that there is no command type corresponding to the command received in the command type specifying process of S332, the host control circuit 210 discards the received command data (S333). Next, the host control circuit 210 confirms the number of parameters included in the received command data, and when the number of parameters is different from the number of parameters corresponding to the specified command type, discards the received command data (S334). .

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a command parameter check process (S335). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 checks the contents of information (hereinafter referred to as command parameters) in various parameters (see FIGS. 23 to 27) set for each command. Specifically, the host control circuit 210, for example, always checks the zero area provided in a predetermined bit area in the parameter, checks the valid range of each data stored in the parameter, and stores the stored data Check the combination. Details of the command parameter check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the command parameter included in the received command is normal (S336). In this determination process, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the command parameter is normal (whether or not the command is valid) based on the result of the command parameter check process of S335.

  In S336, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the command parameter included in the received command is not normal (when S336 is NO), the host control circuit 210 discards the data of the received command (S337). Then, after the process of S337, the host control circuit 210 ends the command analysis process and moves the process to S206 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S336 that the command parameter included in the received command is normal (when S336 is YES), the host control circuit 210 determines the command parameter (information such as game status). Is reflected (registered) in the game data (S338). In this process, the game data reflecting the command parameters is stored in a predetermined area in the sub work RAM 210a.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a sub lottery process (S339). In this process, the host control circuit 210 obtains various random numbers for effects, and performs a lottery process related to the determination of effect contents corresponding to the command type of the received command.

  For example, when the received command is a special symbol effect start command, the host control circuit 210 performs a variable effect pattern (“EN00” to “EN44”) by a lottery process using the variable effect table (see FIG. 19). To decide. Further, for example, when the received command is a hold addition command, the host control circuit 210 performs an effect pattern related to the color change effect of the symbol for holding by a lottery process using the hold effect table (see FIG. 20). In addition to determining “HE00” to “HE19”), an effect pattern (“SE00” to “SE19”) related to the prefetch effect is determined by a lottery process using the prefetch effect table (see FIG. 21).

  In the process of S339, the host control circuit 210 stores the lottery result of the sub lottery process (for example, information on the various effect patterns described above) in a predetermined area in the sub work RAM 210a.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 reflects (registers) the lottery result obtained by the sub lottery process of S339 in the game data stored in the sub work RAM 210a (S340).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a backup process of the game data stored in the sub work RAM 210a (S341). By this processing, game data is stored in a predetermined area and its mirroring area in the SRAM 210b. The game data backed up in this process is referred to when the game data is damaged in the above-described backup recovery initialization process (see FIG. 95). Then, after the process of S341, the host control circuit 210 ends the command analysis process and moves the process to S206 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the command analysis process, the received command may be discarded. However, the command is completely transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the host control circuit 210 before the discarded received command. If not, no animation request is generated, and a black image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 13. On the other hand, if a command is transmitted from the main CPU 71 to the host control circuit 210 before the discarded received command, an animation request based on the discarded received command is not generated, and the display screen of the display device 13 displays the discarded request. The image generated by the animation request based on the command before the received command is maintained and displayed.

[Command parameter check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the command parameter check process performed in S335 in the command analysis process (see FIG. 104) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of command parameter check processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 acquires the command type stored in the sub work RAM 210a, and sets a check item (masking) corresponding to the command type of the received command (S351).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 checks information on all the always 0 areas included in the received command (S352). In this process, when the host control circuit 210 detects that information other than “0” is stored in one or more always 0 areas, the host control circuit 210 discards the received command. In addition, when a zero area is not always provided in the received command to be analyzed, the process of S352 is not performed.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 checks whether or not the value of each information included in the received command is a value within a corresponding predetermined range (S353). In this embodiment, the value of the information stored in the parameter field part of the received command is defined in advance to be a value within a predetermined range (effective range). For example, special stop symbol designating information is stored in the second parameter storage area (8-bit area “b0” to “b7”) of the first power failure recovery command (see FIG. 25). The valid range of the value of the special stop symbol designation information is set to “0x00” to “0x20”. In this process, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the value is not a value within a predetermined range corresponding to one or more pieces of information included in the reception command, the host control circuit 210 Discard the command.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 checks a combination of various information included in the received command (S354). In the present embodiment, even if the value of each information included in the received command is a value within the corresponding effective range, if there is a contradiction in the combination of various information included in the command, the host control circuit 210 The received command is discarded. For example, when the received command is a special symbol effect start command, the game status information included in the received command indicates “small hit”, and when the symbol designation command information is a big hit symbol, a combination of information in the command Therefore, the host control circuit 210 discards the received special symbol effect start command.

  After the process of S354, the host control circuit 210 ends the command parameter check process, and moves the process to S336 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 104).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the command parameter check process is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200). In other words, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) is a means (first command determination means) that constantly checks the 0 area in S352, and a validity check process for each information value included in the received command in S353. And a means for performing a check process of a combination of various types of information included in the received command in S354 (a third command determining means).

[Animation request construction process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the animation request construction process performed in S206 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the animation request construction process in this embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control circuit 70 (S361).

  In S361, when the host control circuit 210 determines that a command has not been received from the main control circuit 70 (when S361 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S372 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S361 that the command has been received from the main control circuit 70 (when S361 is YES), the host control circuit 210 executes the power failure recovery command (first power failure recovery command). And the second power failure return command) are determined (S362).

  In S362, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the power interruption return command has not been received (when S362 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S366 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S362 that the host control circuit 210 has received the power interruption return command (when S362 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets the power interruption return command (second power interruption return command). It is determined whether or not the status (internal control state) information included is in a fluctuating state (S363). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not “001” (special symbol variation state) is set in the storage area of the internal control state number included in the second parameter in the second power failure recovery command. Determine. If the state at the time of power failure detection is being displayed as a special symbol variation, “001” is stored in the storage area of the internal control state number in the second parameter of the second power failure recovery command at the time of the processing of S363. "(Special symbol variation state) is set.

  In S363, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the status information included in the power interruption return command is not in a fluctuating state (when S363 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs a process of S366 described later.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S363 that the status information included in the power interruption return command is in a fluctuating state (when S363 is YES), the host control circuit 210 generates a simple mode object. A process is reserved (S364). Next, the host control circuit 210 performs termination processing for all objects (including resident objects) other than the simple mode object (S365). Then, after the process of S365, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of S370 described later.

  Here, returning to the processing of S362 or S363 again, if S362 or S363 is NO, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not an object exists (S366).

  In S366, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the object does not exist (S366 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S370 described later. On the other hand, if the host control circuit 210 determines in S366 that the object exists (YES in S366), the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the simple mode object exists (S367).

  In S367, when the host control circuit 210 determines that there is no simple mode object (when S367 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S369 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S367 that a simple mode object exists (when S367 is YES), the host control circuit 210 uses a command (for example, a command indicating that the special symbol variation display is terminated) It is determined whether or not a special effect stop command, a special symbol end display command, or the like has been received (S368).

  In S368, when it is determined that the host control circuit 210 has not received the command indicating that the special symbol variation display ends (when S368 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S372 described later. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S368 that the host control circuit 210 has received a command indicating that the special symbol variation display is terminated (S368 is YES), that is, if the simple mode object is terminated, the host The control circuit 210 performs the process of S369 described later.

  When S367 is NO or when S368 is YES, the host control circuit 210 performs an end process on the already generated object (S369). With this processing, unnecessary production operations (production of commands indicating production image reproduction, accessory movement, voice reproduction, etc.) are completed. If the already generated object is a simple mode object, the rendering operation by the simple mode object is terminated by this process.

  After the process of S369 or S365, or when S366 is NO, the host control circuit 210 generates an object corresponding to the command type based on the command type information stored in the sub work RAM 210a (S370). When this process is performed after the process of S365, the host control circuit 210 generates a simple mode object in the process of S370. In addition, when the power is first turned on or when the simple mode object ends, the host control circuit 210 also creates a resident object in the process of S370.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs object initialization processing (S371). In this process, the host control circuit 210 initializes a storage area used by the object.

  After the processing of S371, or when S361 or S368 is NO, the host control circuit 210 refers to the information of the game data stored in the sub work RAM 210a, and the object (for example, a production object, a holding object, a simple mode object) Etc.) and the animation request is set in a predetermined area of the sub work RAM 210a (S372). By this process, an animation request corresponding to the command reception is generated.

  Next, based on the animation request, the host control circuit 210 generates a sound request, a lamp request, and an accessory request corresponding to the effect specified by the animation request (S373).

  If the content of the effect rendering specified by the animation request is controlled only in the control execution cycle (about 33 msec) of the host control circuit 210, the role for the host control circuit 210 is processed in the process of S373. Only product requests are generated. When the content of the effect rendering specified by the animation request is controlled only by the control execution cycle (about 12 msec) of the voice / LED control circuit 220, in the process of S373, the voice / LED control circuit Only a feature request for 220 is generated. Furthermore, the content of the effect rendering specified by the animation request includes both the content controlled by the control execution cycle of the host control circuit 210 and the content controlled by the control execution cycle of the voice / LED control circuit 220. In this case, in the process of S373, both an accessory request for the host control circuit 210 and an accessory request for the voice / LED control circuit 220 are generated.

  In the process of S373, the host control circuit 210 synchronizes the video display operation with the sound reproduction operation, the light emission operation, and the accessory driving operation, and generates the generated sound request, lamp request, and accessory request. The data is temporarily stored in a request buffer provided in the host control circuit 210. In the present embodiment, the request buffer is provided in, for example, the sub work RAM 210a, the SRAM 210b, etc., but the location where the request buffer is formed is not particularly limited.

  After the process of S373, the host control circuit 210 ends the animation request construction process, and moves the process to S207 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 92).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the animation request construction process is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200). That is, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) also serves as means for performing object generation processing in S370 (processing information generation means) and means for performing animation request generation processing in S372 (production start request creation means). .

[Drawing control processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107A and 107B, the drawing control process performed in S208 in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 107A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the drawing control process executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 107B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processing executed by the display control circuit 230 when a drawing request is output from the host control circuit 210 to the display control circuit 230 in the drawing control processing.

(1) Drawing Control Process Performed by Host Control Circuit First, the host control circuit 210 performs a moving image command creation process as shown in FIG. 107A (S381). The details of the moving image command creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a moving image playback state management process (S382). Next, the host control circuit 210 issues (outputs) a moving image command (moving image decoding start command) to the display control circuit 230 (S383). By this process, the process of the display control circuit 230 is started.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 issues (outputs) the drawing request generated in the previous frame (previous drawing control process) stored in the sub work RAM 210a to the display control circuit 230 (S384). The display control circuit 230 performs a rendering process based on the transmitted previous frame rendering request.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs all command list creation processing (S385). With this process, a drawing request used in a drawing process executed by the display control circuit 230 is generated in the next frame, and the drawing request is stored in the sub work RAM 210a. Details of the all command list creation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later.

  Next, based on the display start command output from the display control circuit 230, the host control circuit 210 confirms that the rendering result display process has been started (S386). Then, after the process of S386, the host control circuit 210 ends the drawing control process, and moves the process to S209 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of Display Control Circuit Performed During Drawing Control Process First, when a moving image command (moving image decoding start command) output from the host control circuit 210 is input to the display control circuit 230, the display control circuit 230 Then, the moving image decoding process is started (S391). In the present embodiment, this decoding process and a drawing process described later are performed over a period of two frames.

  Next, when a drawing request output from the host control circuit 210 (drawing request generated in the previous frame) is input to the display control circuit 230, the display control circuit 230 performs a drawing process based on the drawing request. (S392). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 starts display processing of the rendering result (drawing result) obtained by the drawing processing of S392 (S393). In this process, the display control circuit 230 switches the function of one frame buffer in the SDRAM 250 in which the rendering result is stored from the drawing function to the display function, and starts the rendering result display process.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 outputs a display start command indicating that display processing of the rendering result (drawing result) has been started to the host control circuit 210 (S394). Then, after the process of S394, the display control circuit 230 ends the series of processes performed during the drawing control process. In this way, since the drawing process is executed based on the drawing request generated in the previous frame, the function (use area) of the frame buffer executed after the drawing process ends is displayed from the drawing function (drawing storage area). In accordance with the timing of switching to the function (display storage area), the sound request and the accessory request are transmitted to the corresponding control circuits. For this reason, the sound request and the accessory request are transmitted to the corresponding control circuit two frames after each request is generated.

[Video command creation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the moving image command creation process performed in S381 during the drawing control process (see FIG. 107A) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the moving image command creation process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 refers to the animation request stored in the sub work RAM 210a, and acquires information for setting the root composition of the drawing data (S401). The root composition is main drawing data displayed at the time of production. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of root compositions that can be set is eight. Therefore, in this embodiment, up to eight drawing data set in the root composition can be reproduced simultaneously.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the animation request stored in the sub work RAM 210a and acquires information for setting the sub composition of the drawing data (S402). The sub-composition is drawing data that gives a secondary visual effect (such as an effect) to the root composition.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the processing of S404 to S407 described later has been executed in accordance with all layers corresponding to the drawing data specified by the animation request or all layers specified by the animation request. (S403). Here, “executed according to all layers” includes, for example, executed for all layers, executed a number of times corresponding to all layers, or executed based on all layers. The processes in S404 to S407 described later may be performed a number of times corresponding to the number of layers corresponding to the request or drawing data. Moreover, you may perform the process of below-mentioned S404-S407 under various preconditions, such as performing selection with respect to each layer even if it is not all the layers.

  In S403, the host control circuit 210 determines that the processes in S404 to S407, which will be described later, have not been executed in accordance with all layers corresponding to the drawing data specified by the animation request or all layers specified by the animation request. In this case (when S403 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs a process of reading animation data stored in the sub main ROM 205 (S404). Details of the animation data reading process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109A and 109B described later.

  After the process of S404, the host control circuit 210 acquires information related to the drawing data from the animation data (S405). Next, the host control circuit 210 rewrites the information related to the drawing data according to the effect content specified by the animation request (S406). In this process, for example, information on the footage, the effect, and the movement is rewritten according to the contents of the effect.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs processing for creating a moving image command (a command for starting image data decoding processing) (S407). After the processing of S407, the host control circuit 210 returns the processing to S403 and repeats the processing after S403.

  Here, returning to the process of S403 again, in S403, the host control circuit 210 performs the processes of S404 to S407 for all layers corresponding to the drawing data specified by the animation request or all layers specified by the animation request. If the host control circuit 210 determines that the process has been executed according to the image data (when S403 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the above-described processing of S401 to S407 according to the drawing data in which the route composition specified by the animation request is set. It is determined whether it has been executed (S408).

  In S408, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the processes in S401 to S407 described above are not executed according to the drawing data in which the route composition designated by the animation request is set (S408 is NO). ), The host control circuit 210 returns the process to S401, and repeats the processes after S401. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S408 that the above-described processing of S401 to S407 has been executed in accordance with the drawing data in which the route composition specified by the animation request is set (S408 is YES) ), The host control circuit 210 ends the moving image command creation process, and moves the process to S382 of the drawing control process (see FIG. 107A).

[Animation data read processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109A and FIG. 109B, the animation data reading process performed in S404 during the moving image command creation process (see FIG. 108) will be described. FIG. 109A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the animation data reading process in this embodiment. FIG. 109B is a diagram showing the configuration of various data included in the animation data stored in the sub main ROM 205 and the storage area of those data.

  First, the host control circuit 210 refers to the configuration designation table in the sub main ROM 205 and confirms the animation configuration data designated by the object (S411). Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires the address of the designated configuration data (S412).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the storage area for the designated configuration data in the sub main ROM 205 (S413). Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the configuration information included in the configuration data, and acquires drawing target information (S414). The configuration information mainly includes information such as the frame position, width, height, number of layers, start frame, end frame, number of data updates (every frame, 2 frames, etc.). Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the storage area for the configuration data and acquires the address of the layer data to be referred to (S415).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the storage area of the layer data at the address acquired in S415 (S416). Then, the host control circuit 210 acquires layer information included in the layer data (S417). Note that the layer information includes, for example, information such as a footage ID / component ID, a start frame, an end frame, and the number of parameters. Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires various data addresses (for example, a parameter address and an effect table address) that are referred to when acquiring various parameters of the layer (S418).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the parameter data storage area of the parameter address acquired in the process of S418 (S419). Next, the host control circuit 210 obtains layer parameter information and various layer parameters included in the parameter data (S420). The layer parameter information includes, for example, information such as the number of frames and the data type. Also, the various parameters of the layer are configured with parameters set for each frame, and a corresponding frame parameter is requested each time the sub-control main process is executed in units of frames.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the footage table corresponding to the footage ID included in the layer information acquired in the process of S417 (S421). Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires the footage information and information for each footage type stored in the footage table (S422). The footage information includes, for example, information such as a footage type, an image width, and a height. The information for each footage type includes information such as a decoding rate, for example.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the effect table designated by the layer data, that is, the effect table at the effect table address acquired in the process of S418 (S423). Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires the address of the effect data to be referred to (S424).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the effect data storage area at the address acquired in the process of S424 (S425). Then, the host control circuit 210 acquires effect information included in the effect data (S426). The effect information includes, for example, information such as the effect type and the number of parameters. Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires the address of the parameter data included in the effect data (S427).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 refers to the parameter data storage area of the parameter address acquired in S427 (S428). Next, the host control circuit 210 obtains effect parameter information and various effect parameters included in the parameter data (S429). The effect parameter information includes information such as the number of frames and data type, for example.

  After the process of S429, the host control circuit 210 ends the animation data reading process, and moves the process to S405 of the moving image command creation process (see FIG. 108).

[All command list creation processing (drawing request generation processing)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the all command list creation process performed in S385 in the drawing control process (see FIG. 107A) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a procedure of all command list creation processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the processes of S432 to S438, which will be described later, have been executed for all the root compositions of the drawing data (S431).

  In S431, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the processes of S432 to S438, which will be described later, have not been executed for all the route compositions of the drawing data (when S431 is NO), the host control circuit 210 During the processing of S433 to S438, which will be described later, for the second and subsequent root compositions, still image decoding processing and various commands (still image decoding, drawing commands, etc.) described later in the processing for the first root composition. The process waits until the generation process is completed (S432).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 creates a command for sprite buffer 0 (S433). Note that the sprite buffer 0 command is used when, for example, a rendering process described later is performed, for example, when the sprite buffer 0 is provided in the built-in VRAM 237 and a still image (sprite) is read from the CGROM substrate 204 and decoded. This command is used for.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 acquires texture information (S434). In this process, the host control circuit 210 acquires information on the designated texture source (SDRAM 250).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 creates an effect command (S435). The effect command is a command used when, for example, an effect buffer is provided in the built-in VRAM 237 and various processes are executed on the effect data using the effect buffer in a drawing process described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 creates a drawing command (S436). Note that the drawing command is a command used when rendering (drawing) processing is performed on various decoding results read into the built-in VRAM 237, for example, in drawing processing described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 creates a still image decoding command (S437). Note that the still image decoding command is provided by, for example, providing a sprite buffer 1 in a half area of the built-in VRAM 237 and reading a still image (sprite) from the CGROM substrate 204 into the sprite buffer 1 for decoding in a drawing process described later. This command is used when executing processing.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 creates a frame end command (S438). It should be noted that the frame end command is obtained by, for example, rendering a rendering result finally stored in a composition drawing buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237 in a drawing process to be described later. This command is used when executing a process of writing to a 1-frame buffer or a second-frame buffer. After the process of S438, the host control circuit 210 returns the process to S431, and repeats the processes after S431.

  Here, returning to the process of S431 again, in S431, the host control circuit 210 determines that the processes of S432 to S438 have been executed for all the root compositions of the drawing data (if S431 is YES) ), The host control circuit 210 generates a drawing request including all commands generated by the loop processing of S432 to S438 described above (S439). After the process of S439, the host control circuit 210 ends the all command list creation process, and moves the process to S386 of the drawing control process (see FIG. 107A). In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 210 in the above-described drawing control process (FIG. 107A), moving image command creation process (FIG. 108), animation data read process (FIG. 109A), and all command list creation process (FIG. 110). The display control circuit 230 may execute the process executed by. In this case, an animation request is transmitted from the host control circuit 210 to the display control circuit 230, and the display control circuit 230 performs these various processes based on the received animation request.

[Drawing process]
Next, the drawing process executed by the display control circuit 230 in S392 during the drawing control process (see FIG. 107B) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111A, FIG. 112A, and FIG. 113A are flowcharts showing the procedure of the drawing process in this embodiment. 111B, 112B, and 113B are diagrams showing input / output operations and storage operations of various data between the CGROM substrate 204 (CGROM 206), the built-in VRAM 237, and the SDRAM 250 performed in each processing step of the drawing process. is there.

  First, the display control circuit 230 decodes predetermined moving image data stored on the CGROM substrate 204 and stores it in a movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 250 (S441: see arrow T1 in FIG. 111B). The movie buffer is a buffer for storing the decoding result of the moving image data. The size of the movie buffer secured in the SDRAM 250 changes according to the size (capacity) of the moving image data to be used, the number of streams, and the like.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 determines whether or not the decoded moving image data is referred to in the effect drawing operation (S442).

  In S442, when the display control circuit 230 determines that the moving image data is not referred to in the effect drawing operation (when S442 is NO), the display control circuit 230 performs the process of S444 described later. On the other hand, when the display control circuit 230 determines in S442 that the moving image data is referred to in the effect drawing operation (when S442 is YES), the display control circuit 230 decodes the moving image data stored in the movie buffer. The result is transferred to the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250 (S443).

  In the process of S443, first, the display control circuit 230 expands the decoding result of the moving image data stored in the movie buffer in the SDRAM 250 in the movie blend buffer generated in the built-in VRAM 237 (arrow in FIG. 111B). T2). In this process, the entire area of the built-in VRAM 237 is used as a movie blend buffer. Next, the display control circuit 230 transfers the decoding result of the moving image data expanded in the movie blend buffer to the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250 and performs an alpha process on the decoding result using the alpha table (FIG. 111B). (See arrow T3 in the middle).

  The alpha table is a table that defines an alpha value (opacity) independent of the color data (RGB), and one alpha value is assigned to each dot of the pattern data. This alpha table is stored in the CGROM 206. Further, in the alpha conversion process of the decoding result, the luminance value of the R (red) component is converted into the value (alpha value) of the A (alpha) component, and the alpha conversion is performed. In the present embodiment, an alpha value that is a value of transparency (opacity) is provided as information other than RGB, and when dynamically changing the transparency (opacity) of a moving image, the alpha value is an RGB component. Of these, the luminance value of a predetermined color component is set (converted). A moving image that has been subjected to such alpha processing is used when the moving image is not expressed in three primary colors (RGB) (when expressed in black and white or the like).

  After the processing of S443 or when S442 is NO, the display control circuit 230 reads the sprite data stored in the CGROM board 204 and used in each route composition to the sprite buffer 0 in the built-in VRAM 237 (in FIG. 111B). (See arrow T4 in FIG. 11), and the decoded result is transferred to the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250 (S444: see arrow T5 in FIG. 111B). The “sprite data” here is image data obtained by expanding still image data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, reduction, enlargement, curvature, brightness change, etc. for still image data. It may have been processed. The sprite data decoded in the process of S444 is image data drawn a plurality of times, image data used for effects, and image data of a size that cannot be stored in the sprite buffer 1. In this process, the entire area of the built-in VRAM 237 is used as the sprite buffer 0.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 determines whether or not the buffer size (effect buffer size) used in the effect data drawing process is equal to or less than half the size of the built-in VRAM 237 (S445). Note that the effect buffer in the built-in VRAM 237 is the effect data (image data used in the effect) included in the sprite data transferred to the texture buffer in S444 in the decoding results of various images stored in the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250. Is a buffer for applying.

  In S445, when the display control circuit 230 determines that the buffer size used in the effect data rendering process is not less than half the size of the built-in VRAM 237 (when S445 is NO), the display control circuit 230 is stored in the SDRAM 250. Drawing processing (effect calculation drawing processing) for applying effect data to the decoding results of various images stored in the texture buffer is performed (S446).

  Specifically, in the process of S446, first, the display control circuit 230 reads the decoding results of various images and effect data stored in the texture buffer into the effect buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237 (arrow in FIG. 112B). (See T6). At this time, the entire area of the built-in VRAM 237 is used as an effect buffer. Next, the display control circuit 230 performs a drawing process (effect calculation drawing process) for applying the effect data to the decoding results of various images. Then, the display control circuit 230 transfers the result (effect result) of the effect calculation drawing process from the effect buffer in the built-in VRAM 237 to the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250 (see arrow T7 in FIG. 112B).

  On the other hand, when the display control circuit 230 determines in S445 that the buffer size used in the effect data rendering process is half or less than the size of the built-in VRAM 237 (when S445 is YES), the display control circuit 230 A half area of the built-in VRAM 237 is operated as an effect buffer, and the remaining half area is operated as a copy buffer (S447). Next, the display control circuit 230 reads the effect buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237 for the decoding results of various images and effect data stored in the texture buffer, and performs effect calculation drawing processing (S448).

  At this time, if the effect data decoding result (effect source image) has already been transferred to the copy buffer, the display control circuit 230 does not read the effect source image from the texture buffer of the SDRAM 250, and reads it from the copy buffer. The effect source image is directly read into the effect buffer (see arrow T8 in FIG. 112B), and effect calculation drawing processing is performed. On the other hand, if the effect source image has not been transferred to the copy buffer, the display control circuit 230 reads the effect source image from the texture buffer of the SDRAM 250 to the copy buffer (see arrow T9 in FIG. 112B). The effect source image is read from the copy buffer to the effect buffer and effect calculation drawing processing is performed. Then, the display control circuit 230 stores the result of the effect calculation drawing process (effect result) in the copy buffer (see arrow T10 in FIG. 112B), and transfers the effect result stored in the copy buffer to the texture buffer of the SDRAM 250. (See arrow T11 in FIG. 112B). When a plurality of effects are applied and the buffer usage of each effect is less than half the size of the built-in VRAM 237, the display control circuit 230 copies the result (effect result) for each effect calculation drawing process. After the effects are rendered to the end, the effect results are transferred from the copy buffer to the texture buffer of the SDRAM 250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, drawing processing is performed on all effects applied to layers used in each composition before composition drawing processing described later. In this embodiment, when the buffer capacity used in the effect is half or less than the capacity of the built-in VRAM 237, a half area in the built-in VRAM 237 is used as a copy buffer, and the buffer capacity used in the effect is built-in VRAM 237. If it is not less than half the capacity, the entire area of the built-in VRAM 237 is used as an effect buffer. That is, the area in the built-in VRAM 237 used as an effect buffer is appropriately changed according to the buffer capacity used in the effect. By performing such processing, it is possible to speed up processing when effect calculation drawing processing is applied to a plurality of effects.

  After the process of S446 or S448, the display control circuit 230 reads the sprite data that has not been decoded in S444 (not stored in the texture buffer) into the composition drawing buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237 and draws it (S449). . Specifically, first, the display control circuit 230 reads and decodes the sprite data not decoded in S444 from the CGROM board 204 to the sprite buffer 1 provided in the half area in the built-in VRAM 237 (in FIG. 113B). (See arrow T12). Note that “reading and decoding the sprite data into the sprite buffer 1” means to include a mode of reading the sprite data while decoding it into the sprite buffer 1. Therefore, in this process, the sprite data read process and the decode process may be performed at the same timing, or the sprite data decode process may be performed before the read process. That is, the process of “reading and decoding the sprite data into the sprite buffer 1” may include both processes regardless of the processing order of the sprite data reading process and the decoding process. Note that the process of “reading into the sprite buffer 1 and decoding” may include only the process of reading and decoding the sprite data.

  Next, the display control circuit 230 transfers the sprite data decoding result stored in the sprite buffer 1 to the composition drawing buffer and performs drawing processing (see arrow T13 in FIG. 113B).

  After the processing of S449, the display control circuit 230 reads out and decodes the decoding result of the moving image data stored in the movie buffer in the SDRAM 250 into the composition drawing buffer in the built-in VRAM 237 (S450). Specifically, first, the display control circuit 230 transfers the color component of the decoding result of the moving image data stored in the movie buffer in the SDRAM 250 to the movie blend buffer provided in the remaining half area in the built-in VRAM 237. At the same time, the decoding result is subjected to alpha processing (see arrow T14 in FIG. 113B). Next, the display control circuit 230 performs the drawing process by transferring the decoding result of the moving image data transferred to the movie blend buffer and subjected to the alpha conversion process to the composition drawing buffer (see arrow T15 in FIG. 113B).

  Next, the display control circuit 230 performs composition drawing processing (S451). In this process, the following various processes are performed.

  First, the display control circuit 230 stores various source images (moving image / still image decoding result, effect result, composition drawing result) of each layer stored in the texture source (texture source in the SDRAM 250, movie buffer) in the built-in VRAM 237. (See arrow T16 in FIG. 113B). Further, the display control circuit 230 transfers various source images stored in the texture buffer in the SDRAM 250 to a blend buffer provided in the SDRAM 250 and a copy buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 237 (an arrow T17 in FIG. 113B and T18).

  Next, the display control circuit 230 inputs / outputs various data between the blend buffer of the SDRAM 250 and the copy buffer of the built-in VRAM 237 (see arrow T19 in FIG. 113B), and performs blend calculation drawing processing. In the blend calculation drawing process, a calculation process for synthesizing moving image data and still image (sprite) data is performed. Then, the display control circuit 230 transfers the result of blend calculation drawing processing (blend result) to the composition drawing buffer (see arrow T20 in FIG. 113B).

  Next, the display control circuit 230 performs drawing processing using each source image (moving image / still image decoding result, effect result, composition drawing) and blend result read out to the composition drawing buffer. Apply.

  Then, the display control circuit 230 stores the drawing result (rendering result) constructed by the drawing (rendering) processing in the texture buffer of the SDRAM 250 or a predetermined frame buffer (first frame buffer or second frame buffer) of the SDRAM 250 ( (See arrow T21 or T22 in FIG. 113B). At this time, if the execution target of the drawing process is a sub-composition, the drawing result is saved in the texture buffer. If the execution target of the drawing process is the root composition, the drawing result is saved in the frame buffer. Is done. When the drawing result is saved in the frame buffer, the drawing result is saved in a frame buffer different from the frame buffer in which the drawing result is saved in the composition drawing process of the previous frame. The composition drawing process in S451 is performed as described above.

In the composition drawing process of S451, when all of the following conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied, the display control circuit 230 is stored in a texture source (a texture source in the SDRAM 250, a movie buffer). The various source images (moving image / still image decoding result, effect result, composition drawing result) of each layer are copied and drawn to the copy buffer in the built-in VRAM 237, and then the various source images are read to the composition drawing buffer. Drawing processing is performed.
(1) Upper left coordinate of texture does not match 8-dot alignment (2) Rotation, enlargement / reduction is present (3) Use bilinear filter (4) Blend drawing operation processing is multi-rendering processing.
(5) Various source images of each layer stored in the texture source fit within the size of the copy buffer.

  In addition, when the above-described composition drawing process is continuously performed on various source images in the same texture source, various source images cached in the copy buffer are used.

  Then, after the process of S451 described above, the display control circuit 230 ends the drawing process, and moves the process to S393 in the drawing control process (see FIG. 107B).

[Voice control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114A and FIG. 114B, the audio | voice control process performed by S209 in the sub control main process (refer FIG. 92) is demonstrated. FIG. 114A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the voice control process executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 when a sound request is output from the host control circuit 210 to the voice / LED control circuit 220 in the voice control processing.

(1) Audio control process executed by the host control circuit The host control circuit 210 outputs the sound request stored in the request buffer in the animation request construction process of FIG. 106 to the audio / LED control circuit 220 (S461).

  In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 210 sends a sound request after two frames have passed since the request generation of the effect control in order to synchronize the sound reproduction effect operation by the speaker group 10 with the effect operation by the display device 13. Output. This is because, as described above, in the image decoding process and the drawing process by the display control circuit 230 of the present embodiment, a period of two frames is required for the series of processes.

  Then, after the process of S461, the host control circuit 210 ends the voice control process and moves the process to S210 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of voice / LED control circuit executed during voice control processing First, a sound request output from the host control circuit 210 is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S471). Next, the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there is a free execution system capable of executing the process (code) among the four execution systems for sound reproduction (S472).

  In S472, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that there is no vacant execution system among the four execution systems for voice reproduction (when S472 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 is vacant. Wait until an execution system is generated (S473).

  After the processing of S473, or in S472, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that there is an empty execution system among the four execution systems for voice reproduction (when S472 is YES), the voice / LED The control circuit 220 sets an access number in a predetermined execution system that is free (S474).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 reads the access data associated with the access number from the CGROM board 204 based on the access number in the execution system in which the access number is set (S475).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sequentially sets each of a plurality of setting data defined in the access data to a corresponding address based on the access data, and starts a code (processing) execution process. (S476). With this process, the sound reproduction effect by the speaker group 10 is started. In the present embodiment, the audio reproduction control is executed by simple access control.

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there is a plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (S477). Specifically, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there is an access from another execution system with respect to a code (setting data) being referred to that is executed in the execution system in which the access number is set. To do. In S477, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that there is no plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (when S477 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the process of S479 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S477 that there is a plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (when S477 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 executes the code. Is executed based on the latest sound request (S478). Specifically, for example, code 1, code 2 and code 3 are executed in a predetermined execution system based on a predetermined sound request, and code 3 is executed in another execution system based on the next sound request. When executing the code 4 and the code 5, the sound reproduction of the code 3 having a plurality of accesses is executed based on the next sound request.

  After the processing of S478 or when S477 is NO, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets a simple access end code (S479). Then, after the processing of S479, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processing at the time of the voice control processing, and the processing is performed in a predetermined control state (for example, standby state, voice control). Control state before processing, control state of processing executed after voice control processing, etc.).

[Lamp control processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115A and 115B, the lamp control process performed in S210 in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing a procedure of lamp control processing executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 115B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processes executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 in the lamp control process.

  In the present embodiment, an example of processing when “NEXT” and “ODONLY” described above are not specified in the LED animation playback method will be described. The lamp control process considering the case where “NEXT” and “ODONLY” are designated as the reproduction method will be described in detail in Modifications 2 and 3 (see FIGS. 126 to 128, which will be described later).

(1) Lamp control processing executed by the host control circuit The host control circuit 210 outputs the lamp request stored in the request buffer in the animation request construction processing of FIG. 106 to the sound / LED control circuit 220 (S481). In this embodiment, in order to synchronize the effect operation by the lamp (LED) group 18 with the effect operation by the display device 13, the host control circuit 210 makes a lamp request after two frames have passed since the request for the effect control is generated. Output.

  Then, after the processing of S481, the host control circuit 210 ends the lamp control processing and shifts the processing to S211 of the sub control main processing (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of voice / LED control circuit executed during lamp control processing First, a lamp request output from the host control circuit 210 is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S491).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 designates the LED animation and data table information to be read from the CGROM 206 based on the lamp request (including the LED animation ID) (S492). If LED animation is designated by this processing, LED data to be output to each LED 281 can be designated. If data table information is specified by this processing, it is possible to specify the data of the playback method, playback channel, expansion channel, extinction data identification, control part, and LED data name (for debugging).

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 refers to the designated data table information and acquires data such as a reproduction channel (sequencer, layer) for executing the LED animation (S493). Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there are a plurality of lamp requests in the same reproduction channel (S494).

  In S494, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that there are a plurality of lamp requests in the same playback channel (when S494 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 is based on the last received lamp request. Then, the LED animation is set to the playback channel or the playback channel and the extension channel (the extension channel of the same channel as the playback channel) (S495). This process overwrites the data table information currently registered in the playback channel registration buffer or each of the playback channel and extension channel registration buffers with the data table information acquired based on the last received ramp request. Is done.

  On the other hand, if the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines that there are not a plurality of lamp requests in the same reproduction channel (S494 is NO), the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines that the reproduction channel or reproduction is not performed. The LED animation is set in the channel and the extension channel (S496). By this processing, the data table information acquired based on the lamp request received this time is registered in the reproduction channel registration buffer or each registration buffer of the reproduction channel and the extension channel.

  After the processing of S495 or S496, the sound / LED control circuit 220 sets the LED data (output data) to be set in a predetermined port of the control target (in the control part) in the predetermined channel based on the set LED animation to the CGROM 206. (S497). The processing after S497 is executed for each port.

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines whether there is an overlap of LED data (output data) between channels at a predetermined port, that is, whether it is necessary to synthesize LED data among a plurality of channels. Is discriminated (S498).

  In S498, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that there is no duplication of LED data between channels at a predetermined port (when S498 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the process of S500 described later. Process. On the other hand, if the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S498 that there is duplication of LED data between channels at a predetermined port (when S498 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 reads the channel in advance. LED data (luminance data) at a predetermined port is determined based on the execution priority of the LED data set to (S499).

  In the process of S499, for example, if the LED data is not set in the predetermined port to be processed before this process, the LED data acquired this time is set in the predetermined port. Further, for example, when the LED data of a predetermined port set before this processing is LED data of a channel whose execution priority is lower than that of the currently processed channel, the LED data acquired this time To overwrite the LED data of a predetermined port. Further, for example, when the LED data of a predetermined port set before this processing is LED data of a channel whose execution priority is higher than that of the channel to be processed this time, the LED data acquired this time And the LED data of a predetermined port is not overwritten (maintained). By repeating such processing for each channel, the LED data of a plurality of channels is synthesized at a predetermined port to be processed (the LED data of the channel having the highest execution priority among the plurality of channels is set). )

  After the processing of S499 or when S498 is NO, the audio / LED control circuit 220 has executed the processing of S497 to S499 for all the channels (eight channels in this embodiment) for the predetermined port. It is determined whether or not (S500).

  In S500, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that the processing of S497 to S499 for the predetermined port is not executed for all channels (when S500 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 returns the process to S497, changes the channel to be processed, and repeats the process after S497. On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S500 that the processing of S497 to S499 for the predetermined port has been executed for all the channels (when S500 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 220 determines whether or not port direct designation data for a predetermined port is included in the lamp request. If the port direct designation data is included in the lamp request, the voice / LED control circuit 220 The LED data of the port is overwritten with the port direct designation data (S501).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the processing of S497 to S501 described above has been executed for all ports (S502). Here, “all ports” means all ports set in the LED registration processing shown in FIG. 97, but the present invention is not limited to this. The “all ports” may be all ports that can be physically set regardless of the ports set in the LED registration process shown in FIG. 97, or set in the LED registration process shown in FIG. Some of the selected ports may be selected from the selected ports.

  In S502, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that the processing of S497 to S501 has not been executed for all the ports (when S502 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs the process. Returning to S497, the processing target port is changed, and the processing after S497 is repeated. On the other hand, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in S502 that the processing of S497 to S501 has been executed for all ports (when S502 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs lamp control. The above-described series of processing at the time of processing is ended, and processing is performed in a predetermined control state of the voice / LED control circuit 220 (for example, standby state, control state before lamp control processing, control state of processing executed after lamp control processing, ) Return to time processing.

[Accessory control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the accessory control process performed in S211 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory control process executed by the host control circuit 210 in the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the host control circuit 210 having a control execution cycle of about 33 msec and / or a sound having a control execution cycle of about 12 msec, depending on the contents of the effect effect. The operation of the effect effect is controlled by the LED control circuit 220. The control of the effect rendering by the voice / LED control circuit 220 is executed based on the accessory request output from the host control circuit 210 to the voice / LED control circuit 220. The accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122A and 122B.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the current operation status is a standby operation for receiving a command from the main control circuit 70 (S511).

  In S511, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the current operation status is not in a command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 70 (when S511 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the accessory control process. And the process proceeds to S212 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S511 that the current operation status is a command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 70 (when S511 is YES), the host control circuit 210 It is determined whether or not a command related to the effect is received from the control circuit 70 (S512). The commands related to the effects to be judged in this processing are, for example, commands related to the start of change of special symbols, stop of change, demonstration, and jackpot. When these commands are received by the host control circuit 210, the command The movable combination in the group 30 is driven.

  When the host control circuit 210 determines in S512 that the command related to the effect has not been received from the main control circuit 70 (when S512 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process, Is transferred to S212 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S512 that the command related to the effect has been received from the main control circuit 70 (when S512 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the change start command receiving feature processing. It performs (S513). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 mainly sets permission / non-permission of the accessory request. The details of the processing for receiving a change start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs an initial position restoration counter update process (S514). The initial position recovery counter is a counter that counts the number of continuous executions of the initial position return process of the motor 272 that is performed when the special symbol changes (when the change start command is received). That is, the initial position restoration counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the state where the motor 272 does not return to the initial position even when the initial position return process is performed continuously occurs. This initial position restoration counter is provided in the sub work RAM 210a. Details of the initial position restoration counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs a process for receiving a demo command (S515). Note that details of the processing for receiving a demo command will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the processing at the time of receiving various commands in S513 to S515 is performed in the accessory control processing has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when receiving a command related to performance, an interrupt is received. Each of these processes may be performed as a process, or each of these processes may be performed immediately after the above-described command analysis process (see FIG. 104).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs initial position restoration confirmation processing (S516). Details of the initial position restoration confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the current operation status is a standby operation for receiving a command from the main control circuit 70 (S517).

  In S517, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the current operation status is a command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 70 (when S517 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process in S512. Returning to step S512, the processes in and after S512 are repeated. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S517 that the current operation status is not in a standby state for receiving a command from the main control circuit 70 (when S517 is NO), the host control circuit 210 It is determined whether or not the request delivery permission is set (S518).

  In S518, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the delivery request for the accessory request is not set (when S518 is NO), the host control circuit 210 terminates the accessory control process and executes the process. The process proceeds to S212 in the control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S518 that the permission request delivery permission has been set (YES in S518), the host control circuit 210 makes a request in the animation request construction process of FIG. An acquisition process of the accessory request stored in the buffer and / or an output process to the voice / LED control circuit is performed (S519).

  If the contents of the effect rendering specified by the animation request are contents controlled only by the control execution cycle (about 33 msec) of the host control circuit 210, the host control circuit 210 makes a request in the process of S519. Only the process of acquiring the accessory request for the host control circuit 210 stored in the buffer is performed. If the content of the effect effect specified by the animation request is controlled only by the control / execution cycle (about 12 msec) of the voice / LED control circuit 220, the host control circuit 210 performs the process in S519. Only the process of outputting the object request for the voice / LED control circuit 220 stored in the request buffer to the voice / LED control circuit 220 is performed. Furthermore, the content of the effect rendering specified by the animation request includes both the content controlled by the control execution cycle of the host control circuit 210 and the content controlled by the control execution cycle of the voice / LED control circuit 220. In this case, in the process of S519, the host control circuit 210 performs a process of obtaining an accessory request for the host control circuit 210 stored in the request buffer, and the voice / LED control circuit 220 stored in the request buffer. The process which outputs the object request for to the voice / LED control circuit 220 is also performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S519, the host control circuit 210 starts the production control request generation in order to synchronize the production operation by each movable accessory in the accessory group 30 with the production operation by the display device 13. After two frames have elapsed, the above-described accessory request acquisition process and / or output process is executed.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 transmits excitation data to the motor driver 271 via the I2C controller 261 based on the acquired accessory request (S520). Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 261 (S521). In this process, the host control circuit 210 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 261 and the motor controller 270 or an error in the I2C controller 261 has been detected (obtained or input).

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S521 that the communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 261 (if S521 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets a communication controller error (S522). Then, after the process of S522, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process, and moves the process to S212 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S521 that the communication error signal has not been received from the I2C controller 261 (when S521 is NO), the host control circuit 210 accesses the address of each motor driver 271. It is determined whether or not it is possible (S523).

  In S523, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the address of each motor driver 271 cannot be accessed (when S523 is NO), the host control circuit 210 sets a connection error (S524). Then, after the process of S524, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process, and moves the process to S212 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S523 that the address of each motor driver 271 can be accessed (when S523 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs excitation time monitoring processing. In this process, the excitation after the stop (see FIGS. 72 and 73) set for each operation pattern in the excitation data of each movable combination and the movable combination is excited continuously after the operation of the corresponding operation pattern is completed. It is determined whether or not an error has occurred by comparing the measured value (excitation monitoring time). The details of the excitation time monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the operation of each movable accessory (each motor 272) has ended normally (S526).

  In S526, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the operation of each movable accessory (each motor 272) has ended normally (when S526 is YES), the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process. Then, the process proceeds to S212 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S526 that the operation of each movable accessory (each motor 272) has not ended normally (when S526 is NO), the host control circuit 210 receives a data error. Is set (S527). Then, after the process of S527, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process and moves the process to S212 of the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92).

[Function processing when variable start command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the change start command reception-use accessory process performed in S513 during the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) will be described. In addition, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a change start command receiving accessory process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a change start command has been received (S531). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command is received, for example.

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S531 that the change start command has not been received (if S531 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the change start command receiving accessory process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S514 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S531 that the change start command has been received (when S531 is YES), the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not all the motors 272 are in the initial positions. (S532).

  In S532, when the host control circuit 210 determines that all the motors 272 are in the initial position (when S532 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets the permission request delivery permission (S533). When the transfer request of the accessory request is set, the control state of each movable accessory in the accessory group 30 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request transfer permission state. In the present embodiment, in the processing of S533, the host control circuit 210 permits the transfer of the accessory request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the voice / LED from the host control circuit 210. The permission for passing the accessory request to the control circuit 220 is set.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 sets “0” in the initial position restoration counter (S534). Then, after the processing of S534, the host control circuit 210 finishes the change start command reception time object process, and moves the process to S514 of the object control process (see FIG. 116).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in step S532 that one or more motors 272 are not in the initial position (when the determination in step S532 is NO), the host control circuit 210 sets disapproval of the accessory request. (S535). In the present embodiment, in the processing of S535, the host control circuit 210 does not permit the transfer of the accessory request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the voice / The permission of handing over of an object request to the LED control circuit 220 is set.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 performs transition setting to the initial position restoration operation (S536). Then, after the processing of S536, the host control circuit 210 finishes the change start command reception-time object processing, and moves the processing to S514 of the accessory control processing (see FIG. 116).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the change start command reception time object processing is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200). That is, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) also serves as means (determination means) for executing the determination process of S532 (a process for determining whether or not at least a part of the movable body is present at the initial position).

[Initial position restoration counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the initial position restoration counter update process performed in S514 during the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial position restoration counter update process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a change start command has been received (S541). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command is received, for example.

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S541 that the change start command has not been received (if S541 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position recovery counter update process, and the process is performed as an accessory. Control proceeds to S515 in the control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, if it is determined in S541 that the host control circuit 210 has received the change start command (if S541 is YES), the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the transition to the initial position restoration operation is set. Is discriminated (S542).

  In S542, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the transition to the initial position restoration operation is set (when S542 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S546 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S542 that the transition to the initial position restoration operation is not set (when S542 is NO), the host control circuit 210 sets all the motors 272 to the initial position. It is determined whether or not there is (S543).

  In S543, when the host control circuit 210 determines that one or more motors 272 are not in the initial position (when S543 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position recovery counter update process, and the process Is transferred to S515 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S543 that all the motors 272 are in the initial position (when S543 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets permission to pass the accessory request (S544). ). In the present embodiment, in the process of S544, the host control circuit 210 permits the transfer of the accessory request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the voice / LED from the host control circuit 210. The permission for passing the accessory request to the control circuit 220 is set.

  After the processing of S544, the host control circuit 210 sets “0” in the initial position restoration counter (S545). After the process of S545, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration counter update process, and moves the process to S515 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116).

  Here, returning to the process of S542 again, if S542 is YES, the host control circuit 210 performs an initial position return process (S546). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs a process (recovery process: retry operation) for returning the movable accessory to the initial position. In this process, the host control circuit 210 may perform a process (recovery process) for returning all the movable accessories to the initial position, or an error has occurred (not returned to the initial position). You may perform the process which returns to an initial position only with respect to a movable accessory.

  Moreover, when it is necessary to perform a recovery process on a plurality of movable accessories in the process of S546, the recovery process is performed on a plurality of movable combinations simultaneously, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it the structure which performs a recovery process sequentially with a different timing with respect to each movable accessory.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 adds “1” to the value of the initial position restoration counter (S547). After the process of S547, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration counter update process, and moves the process to S515 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116).

  When the effect of the movable accessory (movable body) is an effect that does not return the movable accessory to the initial position (standby position) across a plurality of variations, It is not abnormal even if the movable accessory does not exist at the initial position at the end of the fluctuation). Therefore, when such an effect is performed, in the initial position restoration counter update process described above, even when the change disclosure command is received and the transition to the initial position restoration operation is set, The initial position return process in S546 and the initial position recovery counter addition process in S547 are not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the initial position restoration counter update process is controlled by the host control circuit 210 (sub control circuit 200). That is, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) also serves as means (recovery means) for performing the initial position return processing in S546. Further, the host control circuit 210 (sub-control circuit 200) is a means for adding “1” to the value of the initial position recovery counter in S546, that is, at least a part of the movable accessory is the initial position even if the initial position return processing is performed. It also serves as a means for counting the number of times that a state that does not return to (2) has occurred continuously (recovery count counting means).

[Function processing when receiving demo command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a demonstration command reception-use accessory process performed in S515 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) will be described. Note that FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the demo command reception-time object processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a demo command has been received (S551). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the above-described demonstration display command has been received, for example.

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S551 that the demo command has not been received (if S551 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the demo command receiving function processing, Control proceeds to S516 of the control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, if the host control circuit 210 determines in S551 that a demo command has been received (if S551 is YES), the host control circuit 210 determines whether an error due to a malfunction of the motor 272 or the like has been detected. A determination is made (S552). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs, for example, the process after S521 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) or the accessory control process (described later in FIG. 122B) executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 described later. It is determined whether or not various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processing after S583 in FIG.

  In S552, when the host control circuit 210 determines that an error due to a malfunction of the motor 272 or the like has been detected (when S522 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets the transition to the error operation during the accessory operation. (S553). Then, after the processing of S553, the host control circuit 210 ends the demo command reception-time object processing, and moves the processing to S516 of the accessory control processing (see FIG. 116).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S552 that an error due to a malfunction of the motor 272 or the like has not been detected (S552 is NO), the host control circuit 210 determines that all the motors 272 are at the initial positions. It is determined whether or not there is (S554).

  In S554, when the host control circuit 210 determines that one or more motors 272 are not in the initial position (when S554 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the demo command reception time object processing, The process proceeds to S516 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S554 that all the motors 272 are in the initial position (when S554 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs an accessory excitation release process (S555). In this process, the host control circuit 210 stops outputting excitation data to all the motors 272 (motor drivers 271).

  Next, the host control circuit 210 sets delivery permission of the accessory request (S556). In the present embodiment, in the process of S556, the host control circuit 210 permits the transfer of the accessory request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the voice / LED from the host control circuit 210. The permission for passing the accessory request to the control circuit 220 is set.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 sets “0” in the initial position restoration counter (S557). Then, after the process of S557, the host control circuit 210 ends the demo command reception-time object process, and moves the process to S516 of the object-control process (see FIG. 116).

[Initial position restoration confirmation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the initial position restoration confirmation process performed in S516 during the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial position restoration confirmation process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the permission request delivery permission is set (S561).

  In S561, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the delivery request for the accessory request is set (when S561 is YES), the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration confirmation process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S517 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S561 that the delivery request for the accessory request is not set (NO in S561), the host control circuit 210 shifts to the error operation during the accessory operation. Is determined (S562).

  In S562, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the transition to the error operation during the accessory operation is not set (when S562 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration confirmation process. The process proceeds to S517 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S562 that the transition to the error operation during the accessory operation is set (when S562 is YES), the host control circuit 210 sets the value of the initial position recovery counter. Whether or not is equal to or greater than “10” is determined (S563).

  In S563, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the value of the initial position restoration counter is “10” or more (when S563 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S566 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S563 that the value of the initial position restoration counter is not “10” or more (when S563 is NO), the host control circuit 210 determines that all the motors 272 are at the initial position. It is determined whether or not there is (S564).

  In S564, when the host control circuit 210 determines that one or more motors 272 are not in the initial position (when S564 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration confirmation process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S517 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S564 that all the motors 272 are in the initial position (when S564 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the transition setting to the command reception standby operation ( S565). After the process of S565, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration confirmation process, and moves the process to S517 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116).

  Here, returning to the processing of S563 again, if S563 is YES, the host control circuit 210 sets a delivery request non-permission permission (S566). In the present embodiment, in the process of S566, the host control circuit 210 does not permit the transfer of the accessory request between the processes related to the accessory control executed by the host control circuit 210, and the voice / The permission of handing over of an object request to the LED control circuit 220 is set.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 stops all the motors 272 until the initialization process is performed by turning on the power again (S567). After the process of S567, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position restoration confirmation process, and moves the process to S517 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the example in which the motor 272 is stopped when the value of the initial position recovery counter is “10” or more has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The threshold value of the initial position restoration counter for stopping the motor 272 (execution of the process at the time of error) can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the contents of the movable accessory, the performance of the motor 272, durability, and the like. .

[Excitation time monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the excitation time monitoring process performed in S525 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the excitation time monitoring process in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 210 checks the excitation state time of each motor 272 (S571). In this process, the host control circuit 210 mainly monitors (measures) the time during which each motor 272 is excited (excitation monitoring time) after the operation of each operation pattern constituting the rendering operation ends.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the excitation monitoring time measured for each operation pattern exceeds the corresponding post-stop excitation time (see FIGS. 72 and 73) in all the motors 272 (S572). ).

  In S572, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the excitation monitoring time measured for each operation pattern does not exceed the corresponding post-stop excitation time in all the motors 272 (when S572 is NO), the host The control circuit 210 ends the excitation time monitoring process, and moves the process to S526 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S572 that the excitation monitoring time measured for each operation pattern exceeds the corresponding post-stop excitation time in one or more motors 272 (if S572 is YES) ), The host control circuit 210 stops the operation of the motor 272 (S573). At this time, the host control circuit 210 may stop the operation of all the motors 272, or may stop only the operation of the motor 272 in which an error is detected. Then, after the process of S573, the host control circuit 210 ends the excitation time monitoring process, and moves the process to S526 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116). In the present embodiment, the configuration example has been described in which the occurrence of an error is determined when the excitation monitoring time exceeds the corresponding post-stop excitation time, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the excitation monitoring time is A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an error has occurred when a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin time (for example, 15 msec) to the excitation time after the stop is exceeded.

  In the present embodiment, the excitation time monitoring process shown in FIG. 121 is controlled by the sub control circuit 200 (at least one of the host control circuit 210 and the sound / LED control circuit 220). That is, the sub-control circuit 200 performs a determination process in S572 (a process for determining whether or not the value of the monitored predetermined parameter (excitation monitoring time) exceeds a threshold value (excitation time after stop)) (driving condition). Monitoring means) and means (error time processing means) for performing error time processing (motor stop processing) in S573.

[Function control process by voice / LED control circuit]
Next, the accessory control process executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122A and 122B. Note that FIG. 122A corresponds to the flow chart of the accessory control process executed by the host control circuit 210 (see FIG. 116), but here, in order to simplify the explanation, the accessory for the voice / LED control circuit 220 is used. Only the request output process (S519) is shown. FIG. 122B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory control process executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220.

  In this embodiment, the accessory control process by the host control circuit 210 shown in FIG. 122A (FIG. 116) is executed at a period of about 33 msec, but the accessory control by the voice / LED control circuit 220 shown in FIG. 122B is performed. The process is executed at a cycle of about 12 msec.

  First, in the process of S519 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) executed by the host control circuit 210, the accessory request for the voice / LED control circuit 220 stored in the request buffer is received from the host control circuit 210. It is output to the sound / LED control circuit 220. Thereby, the voice / LED control circuit 220 obtains an accessory request (S581).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 transmits excitation data to the motor driver 271 via the I2C controller 261 based on the accessory request (S582). Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not a communication error signal is received from the I2C controller 261 (S583). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 220 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 261 and the motor controller 270 or an error in the I2C controller 261 has been detected (obtained or input).

  In S583, when it is determined that the voice / LED control circuit 220 has received a communication error signal from the I2C controller 261 (when S583 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets a communication controller error (S584). ). At this time, the sound / LED control circuit 220 may output information on the communication controller error to the host control circuit 210. After the process of S584, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processes at the time of the accessory control process, and the process is performed in a predetermined control state of the voice / LED control circuit 220 (for example, a standby state, a role The control state before the object control process, the control state of the process executed after the accessory control process, etc.).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S583 that the voice / LED control circuit 220 has not received a communication error signal from the I2C controller 261 (when S583 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 receives each motor driver 271. It is determined whether or not the address can be accessed (S585).

  In S585, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that the address of each motor driver 271 cannot be accessed (S585 is NO), the host control circuit 210 sets a connection error (S586). At this time, the voice / LED control circuit 220 may output information related to the connection error to the host control circuit 210. After the processing of S586, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processing at the time of the accessory control processing, and the processing is performed in a predetermined control state (for example, standby state, role, etc.). The control state before the object control process, the control state of the process executed after the accessory control process, etc.).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S585 that the voice / LED control circuit 220 can access the address of each motor driver 271 (if S585 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the excitation time described in FIG. A monitoring process is performed (S587). At this time, each process in the excitation time monitoring process is executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220.

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the operation of each movable accessory (each motor 272) has ended normally (S588).

  In S588, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that the operation of each movable accessory (each motor 272) has ended normally (when S588 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 The above-described series of processes at the time of the control process is terminated, and the process is performed in a predetermined control state of the voice / LED control circuit 220 (for example, a standby state, a control state before the accessory control process, a process executed after the accessory control process) Control state).

  On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S588 that the operation of each accessory (each motor 272) has not ended normally (when S588 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 A data error is set (S589). At this time, the voice / LED control circuit 220 may output information on the data error to the host control circuit 210. After the process of S589, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processes at the time of the accessory control process, and the process is performed in a predetermined control state (for example, a standby state, a role, etc.). The control state before the object control process, the control state of the process executed after the accessory control process, etc.).

[Data communication processing between voice / LED control circuit and LED driver]
Next, communication processing performed between the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123A and 123B. FIG. 123A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of signal and data transmission processing executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 in the communication processing between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280. FIG. 123B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of signal and data reception processing executed by the LED driver 280 in the communication processing between the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280.

  In this embodiment, when a lamp request is input from the host control circuit 210 to the sound / LED control circuit 220, the sound / LED control circuit 220 converts the lamp output data (LED data) into a lamp group based on the lamp request. 20 is transmitted to each LED driver 280 included in 20. At this time, since the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280 are connected by the SPI bus as described above, signals and serial data are communicated between them by the SPI method. In this embodiment, the communication form between the sound / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver 280 is a form in which signals and serial data are unilaterally transmitted from the sound / LED control circuit 220 to the LED driver 280.

  The specific procedure of the signal and serial data transmission process executed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the data reception process executed by the LED driver 280 based on the lamp request will be described below with reference to FIG. 123A. This will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123B. In this embodiment, the configuration of the serial data transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 220 is the configuration described in FIG.

(1) Audio / LED Control Circuit Serial / Data Transmission Processing First, as shown in FIG. 123A, the audio / LED control circuit 220 transmits data “1” continuously to the LED driver 280 16 times or more ( S601). In other words, the audio / LED control circuit 220 transmits to the LED driver 280 the data (see FIG. 39) in the area where data “1” is stored continuously for 16 bits or more arranged at the head of the serial data.

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 transmits the device address to the LED driver 280 (S602). Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 transmits the register address to the LED driver 280 (S603).

  Next, the sound / LED control circuit 220 transmits lamp output data (LED data) to the LED driver 280 (S604). After the processing of S604, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the serial data transmission processing.

(2) LED driver reception processing (state transition processing based on received data)
First, the LED driver 280 sets the sleep state as shown in FIG. 123B (S611). “To enter the sleep state” means to set the operation state of the LED driver 280 to a sleep (pause) state and to a standby state. The set sleep state is canceled when the LED driver 280 receives (detects) the first data “1” from the sound / LED control circuit 220.

  Next, the LED driver 280 determines whether or not the data “1” has been received (detected) 16 times continuously from the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S612).

  If it is determined in S612 that the LED driver 280 has not received (detected) the data “1” 16 times continuously from the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S612 is NO), the LED driver 280 Is returned to S611, and the processing after S611 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S612 that the LED driver 280 has received (detected) data “1” 16 times continuously from the voice / LED control circuit 220 (when S612 is YES), the LED driver 280 starts. The standby state is set (S613).

  Next, the LED driver 280 determines whether data “0” has been received (S614). In this process, the LED driver 280 determines whether or not the data “0” (see FIG. 39) stored in the first bit of the device address has been received.

  In S614, when the LED driver 280 determines that the data “0” has not been received (when S614 is NO), the LED driver 280 returns the process to S613 and repeats the processes after S613. If the LED driver 280 has not received data “0” for a predetermined time and the start standby state continues, the LED driver 280 may perform a process of returning the operation state to the sleep state as a timeout process. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S614 that the LED driver 280 has received the data “0” (S614 is YES), the LED driver 280 sets a device address standby state (S615).

  Next, the LED driver 280 receives the device address transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 220 and determines whether or not the device address matches that set in the LED driver 280 (S616). In S616, when the LED driver 280 determines that the received device address does not match that set in the LED driver 280 (when S616 is NO), the LED driver 280 returns the process to S611, and after S611. Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the LED driver 280 determines in S616 that the received device address matches that set in the LED driver 280 (when S616 is YES), the LED driver 280 sets a register address waiting state. (S617).

  Next, the LED driver 280 receives the register address transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 220, and determines whether or not the register address is a register address (S618). In S618, when the LED driver 280 determines that the received register address is not a register address that exists (when S618 is NO), the LED driver 280 returns the process to S611 and repeats the processes after S611.

  On the other hand, if the LED driver 280 determines in S618 that the received register address is a register address that exists (if S618 is YES), the LED driver 280 sets the data reception state (S619). Thereby, the reception process of the lamp output data (LED data) transmitted from the sound / LED control circuit 220 is started. Next, the LED driver 280 determines whether or not the data “0FFH (1111111B)” (see FIG. 39) indicating the final data of the lamp output data (LED data) has been received (S620).

  In S620, when it is determined that the LED driver 280 has not received the data “0FFH” (when S620 is NO), the LED driver 280 returns the process to S619 and repeats the processes after S619. On the other hand, when it is determined in S620 that the LED driver 280 has received the data “0FFH” (S620 is YES), the LED driver 280 returns the process to S611 and repeats the processes after S611.

[Data communication processing between host control circuit and motor driver]
Next, communication processing performed between the host control circuit 210 and the motor driver 271 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124A and 124B. FIG. 124A is a flowchart showing a procedure of signal and serial data transmission / reception processing executed by the host control circuit 210 in communication processing between the host control circuit 210 and the motor driver 271. FIG. 124B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of signal and data transmission / reception processing executed by the motor driver 271 in communication processing between the host control circuit 210 and the motor driver 271.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when an accessory request for the host control circuit 210 is generated in the host control circuit 210, the host control circuit 210 sends excitation data to the motor driver 271 based on the accessory request. Output to. At this time, since the host control circuit 210 and the motor driver 271 are connected by an I2C bus, signals (data) are transmitted and received between them by the I2C method. In this embodiment, the communication direction between the host control circuit 210 and the motor driver 271 is bidirectional.

  Hereinafter, based on an accessory request for the host control circuit 210, specific processing of signal and data transmission / reception processing executed by the host control circuit 210 and signal / data transmission / reception processing executed by the motor driver 271 will be described. The procedure will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 124A and 124B.

(1) Data transmission / reception processing (serial data input / output processing) of the host control circuit 210
First, as shown in FIG. 124A, the host control circuit 210 issues a start condition and transmits a control byte to all the motor drivers 271 connected to the host control circuit 210 via the I2C bus (S631). . The control byte transmitted in this process includes address information for specifying a predetermined motor driver 271 as a data transmission destination, and whether the motor driver 271 receives data from the host control circuit 210 or the motor driver. A value of a transmission / reception bit (to be described later) that determines whether 271 transmits data to the host control circuit 210 is included.

  Next, the host control circuit 210 transmits / receives serial data to / from a predetermined motor driver 271 (S632). When the value of the transmission / reception bit included in the control byte transmitted to the motor driver 271 in S631 is a value corresponding to the operation in which the motor driver 271 receives data from the host control circuit 210, in the process of S632, the host For example, the control circuit 210 transmits excitation data or the like of the motor 272 to the motor driver 271. On the other hand, when the value of the transmission / reception bit included in the control byte transmitted to the motor driver 271 in S631 is a value corresponding to the operation in which the motor driver 271 transmits data to the host control circuit 210, the processing of S632 The host control circuit 210 receives, for example, error information from the motor driver 271.

  Next, when the data transmission / reception process is completed, the host control circuit 210 issues a stop condition (S633). Then, the host control circuit 210 ends the data transmission / reception process when the accessory request is acquired.

(2) Data transmission / reception processing of motor driver First, the motor driver 271 refers to the control byte information included in the start condition issued by the host control circuit 210 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the included address matches the address of the motor driver 271 (S641). Note that the configuration of the serial data transmitted from the host control circuit 210 to the motor driver 271 is not the same as the configuration of the serial data shown in FIG. 39, but the serial data transmitted from the host control circuit 210 to the motor driver 271 includes An area corresponding to the device address in FIG. 39 is provided, and the control byte information described above is stored in the area.

  When the motor driver 271 determines in S641 that the address included in the control byte does not match the address of the motor driver 271 (when S641 is NO), the motor driver performs the process of S644 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the motor driver 271 determines in S641 that the address included in the control byte matches the address of the motor driver 271 (when S641 is YES), the motor driver 271 is included in the control byte. Based on the transmitted / received bit value, predetermined data (such as error information) is transmitted to the host control circuit 210 or specific data (such as excitation data) is received (S642).

  Next, the motor driver 271 determines whether or not a stop condition issued from the host control circuit 210 has been received (S643). If it is determined in S643 that the motor driver 271 has received a stop condition issued from the host control circuit 210 (S643 is YES), the motor driver 271 performs the process of S644 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S643 that the motor driver 271 has not received the stop condition issued from the host control circuit 210 (when S643 is NO), the motor driver 271 returns the process to S642, The processes after S642 are repeated.

  If S641 is NO or S643 is YES, the motor driver 271 shifts the state to the standby state (S644). If S641 is NO, that is, if the motor driver 271 is not the motor driver 271 that transmits / receives data to / from the host control circuit 210, it is in a standby state at the time of the processing of S644. The motor driver 271 performs processing for maintaining the standby state.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the communication processing between the voice / LED control circuit 220 and the motor driver 271 that is performed when the accessory control is performed by the voice / LED control circuit 220 is also described above. This is performed in the same manner as the data communication process between the 210 and the motor driver 271.

<Various modifications>
The configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention and the control method of the rendering operation are not limited to the example of the above embodiment, and various modifications can be considered. Hereinafter, various modifications thereof will be described.

[Modification 1]
In the voice control process of the above embodiment (see FIGS. 114A and 114B), when the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets the access number to the sound playback execution system, it determines the availability of the four execution systems, Although an example in which an access number is set in an empty execution system has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution system to be set for each access number may be determined in advance. In the first modification, a processing example of the voice control processing in such a case will be described.

  In the first modification, processes other than the voice control process can be executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine in this example can be the same as that in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the voice control process will be described here.

  With reference to FIG. 125A and FIG. 125B, the voice control process of the modification 1 performed in S209 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 125A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the voice control process of this example executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 125B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processes executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 in the sound control process of this example.

(1) Audio control processing executed by host control circuit As shown in FIG. 125A, the host control circuit 210 sends the sound request stored in the request buffer in the animation request construction processing of FIG. 106 to the audio / LED control circuit 220. Output (S701). In this example as well, the host control circuit 210 outputs a sound request after two frames have elapsed since the request generation of the effect control in order to synchronize the effect operation using the LED data with the effect operation by the display device 13. .

  Then, after the processing of S701, the host control circuit 210 ends the voice control processing, and moves the processing to S210 of the sub control main processing (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of voice / LED control circuit executed during voice control processing First, as shown in FIG. 125B, the sound request output from the host control circuit 210 is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S711). . Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 identifies an access number based on the sound request (S712). Next, the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines a sound reproduction execution system for setting the access number based on the identified access number (S713).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the process is being executed in the determined execution system (S714).

  In S714, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that the process is not being executed in the determined execution system (when S714 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 accesses the determined execution system. A number is set (S715). On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S714 that the process is being executed in the determined execution system (when S714 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that the execution is determined. After the processing of the access number currently being executed in the system is completed, the access number specified in S712 is set in the execution system so that the processing of the access number specified in S712 is executed (S716). In this case, in the execution system determined in S713, the operation state of the voice / LED control circuit 220 is in a standby state until the processing of the currently executed access number is completed.

  After the processing of S715 or S716, the voice / LED control circuit 220 reads the access data associated with the access number from the CGROM board 204 in the execution system in which the access number is set (S717).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sequentially sets each of a plurality of setting data defined in the access data to a corresponding address based on the access data, and starts a code (processing) execution process. (S718). By this processing, the sound reproduction effect operation by the speaker group 10 is started. At this time, also in this example, the audio reproduction control is executed by simple access control.

  After the processing of S718, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there is a plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (S719). Specifically, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not there is an access from another execution system with respect to a code (setting data) being referred to that is executed in the execution system in which the access number is set. To do.

  In S719, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that there is no plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (when S719 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the process of S721 described later. Do. On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S719 that there is a plurality of accesses to the code being referred to (when S719 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 The code is executed based on the latest sound request (S720).

  After the process of S720 or when S719 is NO, the voice / LED control circuit 220 sets a simple access end code (S721). Then, after the processing of S721, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processing at the time of the voice control processing, and the processing is performed in a predetermined control state (for example, standby state, voice control) of the voice / LED control circuit 220. Control state before processing, control state of processing executed after voice control processing, etc.).

[Modification 2]
In the lamp control process (see FIGS. 115A and 115B) of the above embodiment, an example of processing when “NEXT” and / or “ODONLY” is not designated as the reproduction method of LED data (LED animation) has been described. Is not limited to this. In the second modification, a lamp control process that takes into account the case where “NEXT” and / or “ODONLY” is designated as the reproduction method of LED data (LED animation) will be described. In the second modification, a processing example using only the reproduction channel will be described.

  In the second modification, processes other than the lamp control process can be executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine in this example can be the same as that in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the lamp control process will be described here.

  With reference to FIGS. 126A and 126B, the lamp control process of Modification 2 performed in S210 in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 126A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the lamp control process of this example executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 126B is a flowchart showing a procedure of processes executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 in the lamp control process of this example.

(1) Lamp Control Processing Performed by Host Control Circuit As shown in FIG. 126A, the host control circuit 210 outputs the lamp request stored in the request buffer in the animation request processing of FIG. 106 to the audio / LED control circuit 220. (S731). In this example as well, the host control circuit 210 outputs a lamp request after two frames have elapsed since the request generation of the effect control in order to synchronize the effect operation using the LED data with the effect operation by the display device 13. .

  Then, after the processing of S731, the host control circuit 210 ends the lamp control processing of this example, and shifts the processing to S211 of the sub control main processing (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of voice / LED control circuit executed during lamp control processing First, as shown in FIG. 126B, the lamp request transmitted from the host control circuit 210 is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S741). .

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 designates a reproduction channel (sequencer, layer) for executing the LED animation based on the lamp request (S742). Specifically, the voice / LED control circuit 220 designates LED animation (various LED data) and data table information to be read from the CGROM 206 based on the lamp request, and executes the LED animation by referring to the data table information. Acquire data such as playback channels (sequencer, layer).

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not “NEXT” is designated as the LED animation reproduction method based on the data table information designated by the reproduction channel to be processed (referenced), that is, the input. It is determined whether or not the received lamp request is a request to immediately execute the lamp lighting operation (S743). Although not shown here, the processing of S743 to S745 described later is repeatedly executed for the number of channels.

  If the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in step S743 that “NEXT” is not designated as the playback method of the LED animation of the playback channel being referenced (YES in step S743), the sound / LED control circuit 220 Overwrites and updates the various information (data table information and LED data) currently stored in the reproduction channel registration buffer with the corresponding various information acquired when the lamp request is received this time (S744).

  On the other hand, if the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in step S743 that “NEXT” is designated as the playback method of the LED animation of the playback channel being referred to (when S743 is NO), the sound / LED control is performed. The circuit 220 adds and stores (additional updates) corresponding various information acquired when the lamp request is received after the various information (data table information and LED data) currently stored in the registration buffer (S745). ).

  After the process of S744 or the process of S745, the audio / LED control circuit 220 performs a reference process of the registration buffer of each reproduction channel (S746). Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 selects an SPI channel (physical system) to be used when transmitting LED data to the LED driver 280 based on the control part information included in the data table information stored in the registration buffer. Specify (S747).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the port to be processed (referenced) is the port to be controlled (within the control region) in the predetermined channel (S748). Note that the determination processing in S748 is executed based on the information on the control part included in the data table information stored in the registration buffer, and the processing after S748 is repeatedly executed for the number of ports.

  When the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S748 that the port being referred to is not a control target port (when S748 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the process of S752 described later. On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S748 that the port being referred to is a control target port (when S748 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 is based on the data table information. Then, it is determined whether or not “ODONLY” is designated as the playback method in the playback channel (control part) to be processed (S749).

  In S749, when the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines that “ODONLY” is designated as the playback method for the processing target (referenced) playback channel (when S749 is YES), the audio / LED control is performed. The circuit 220 performs port information (LED data) overwriting processing based on the execution priority set for the channel and the presence or absence of output data (S750).

  In the processing of S750, for example, the audio / LED control circuit 220 has a higher priority for execution of the channel to be processed than the channel corresponding to the LED data currently set in the port, and the port being currently referenced (control). If there is LED data (LED data other than the extinguishing data) output to the target port), the LED data is overwritten on the LED data currently set in the port. On the other hand, if the channel to be processed has a higher execution priority than the channel corresponding to the LED data currently set in the port and there is no LED data to be output to the port being referred to (the output data is turned off) ), The LED data overwriting process is not performed, and the LED data currently set in the port is maintained. If the channel to be processed has a lower execution priority than the channel corresponding to the LED data currently set in the port, the LED data is output regardless of the presence or absence of the LED data output to the port being referred to. The overwriting process is not performed, and the LED data currently set in the port is maintained.

  On the other hand, if the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines in S749 that “ODONLY” is not designated as the playback method for the playback channel being processed (referenced) (if S749 is NO), The LED control circuit 220 performs port information (LED data) overwriting processing based on the execution priority set for the channel (S751).

  In the processing of S751, for example, when the channel to be processed has a higher execution priority than the channel corresponding to the LED data currently set in the port, the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines that the LED data is The LED data currently set in the port is overwritten. At this time, overwriting processing of the LED data is also performed when the output data is LED data of the transparent definition (light-off data). On the other hand, if the channel to be processed has a lower execution priority than the channel corresponding to the LED data currently set in the port, the LED data is not overwritten, and the LED currently set in the port is not executed. Data is maintained.

  After the processing of S750 or S751, or when S748 is NO, the audio / LED control circuit 220 performs the above-described processing of S748 to S751 for all playback channels (for 8 channels) of the port being referred to. It is determined whether or not it has been executed (S752).

  In S752, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that the processes of S748 to S751 are not executed for all the reproduction channels (when S752 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 Is returned to S748, the playback channel to be processed is changed, and the processes after S748 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in S752 that the processes of S748 to S751 have been executed for all playback channels (when S752 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 refers to It is determined whether or not port direct designation data for the current port is included in the lamp request. If the port direct designation data is included in the lamp request, the voice / LED control circuit 220 The LED data is overwritten with the port direct designation data (S753).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the processing of S748 to S753 described above has been executed for all ports (S754). Here, “all ports” means all ports set in the LED registration processing shown in FIG. 97, but the present invention is not limited to this. The “all ports” may be all ports that can be physically set regardless of the ports set in the LED registration process shown in FIG. 97, or set in the LED registration process shown in FIG. Some of the selected ports may be selected from the selected ports.

  In S754, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines that the processing of S748 to S753 is not executed for all ports (when S754 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the process. Returning to S748, the processing target port is changed, and the processing after S748 is repeated. On the other hand, when the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S754 that the processing of S748 to S753 has been executed for all ports (YES in S754), the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs lamp control. The above-described series of processing at the time of processing is ended, and processing is performed in a predetermined control state of the voice / LED control circuit 220 (for example, standby state, control state before lamp control processing, control state of processing executed after lamp control processing, etc. ) Return to time processing.

[Modification 3]
In Modification 3, an example of processing in the case where not only the reproduction channel but also the extension channel is used in the lamp control process of Modification 2 will be described. In the third modification, processes other than the lamp control process can be executed in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine in this example can be the same as that in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the lamp control process will be described here.

  With reference to FIGS. 127A and 127B, the lamp control process of Modification 3 performed in S210 in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 127A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the lamp control process of this example executed by the host control circuit 210. FIG. 127B is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 in the lamp control processing of this example.

(1) Lamp Control Process Performed by Host Control Circuit As shown in FIG. 127A, the host control circuit 210 outputs the lamp request stored in the request buffer in the animation request process of FIG. 106 to the audio / LED control circuit 220. (S761). In this example as well, the host control circuit 210 transmits a lamp request after two frames have elapsed from the generation of the request for rendering control in order to synchronize the rendering operation using the LED data with the rendering operation by the display device 13. .

  After the process of S761, the host control circuit 210 ends the lamp control process of this example, and moves the process to S211 of the sub control main process (see FIG. 92).

(2) Processing of voice / LED control circuit executed during lamp control processing First, as shown in FIG. 127B, the lamp request transmitted from the host control circuit 210 is input to the voice / LED control circuit 220 (S771). .

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 designates a channel (sequencer, layer) for executing the LED animation based on the lamp request (S772). When an extension channel is used, in this process, the audio / LED control circuit 220 designates a sequencer and a layer to be used in the extension channel and the playback channel of the same channel. On the other hand, when the extension channel is not used, in this process, the audio / LED control circuit 220 designates a sequencer and a layer to be used in the reproduction channel.

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 is input based on whether or not “NEXT” is designated as the LED animation playback method based on the data table information designated in the channel to be processed (referenced). It is determined whether the lamp request is a request to immediately execute the lamp lighting operation (S773). Although not shown here, the processing of S773 to S775 described later is repeatedly executed for the number of channels.

  In S773, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that “NEXT” is not designated as the LED animation playback method of the channel being referred to (when S773 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 The various information (data table information and LED data) currently stored in the channel registration buffer is overwritten and updated with the corresponding various information acquired when the lamp request is received this time (S774).

  On the other hand, if the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in step S773 that “NEXT” is designated as the LED animation playback method of the channel being referred to (if S773 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 220 stores various additional information (data table information and LED data) currently stored in the channel registration buffer, and stores (additional updates) corresponding various information acquired at the time of the current lamp request reception ( S775).

  In the case of using an extension channel, in the processing of S774 or S775, the audio / LED control circuit 220 performs various types of information (data table information and information on the reproduction channel of the channel being referred to and each registration buffer of the extension channel). LED data) overwrite update processing or additional update processing is performed. On the other hand, when the extended channel is not used, in the processing of S774 or S775, the audio / LED control circuit 220 stores various information (data table information and LED data) with respect to the reproduction buffer registration buffer of the channel being referred to. Overwrite update processing or additional update processing is performed.

  After the processing of S774 or the processing of S775, the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs data setting processing for each port (S776). With this process, the combined LED data (output data) is set to each port to be controlled. Details of the data setting process for each port will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later. After the process of S776, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the above-described series of processes at the time of the lamp control process, and the process is performed in a predetermined control state (for example, standby state, lamp control) of the voice / LED control circuit 220. Control state before processing, control state of processing executed after lamp control processing, etc.).

(3) Data setting processing of each port Next, referring to FIG. 128, the data of each port performed in S776 in the processing of the sound / LED control circuit (see FIG. 127B) executed during the lamp control processing of this example The setting process will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the data setting process for each port executed by the sound / LED control circuit 220 in the lamp control process of this example.

  First, the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs a reference process of the registration buffer of each channel (S781).

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 uses the two sequencers in the predetermined channel based on the data table information stored in the registration buffer of the predetermined channel to be processed (referenced) (reproduction channel and extended channel). It is determined whether or not a channel is used (S782). Although not shown here, a series of processing from S782 to S784, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed for the number of channels.

  If the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines in step S782 that two sequencers are to be used for a predetermined channel (YES in step S782), the audio / LED control circuit 220 uses the registration buffers for the reproduction channel and the extended channel. The SPI channel (physical system) used in each control part controlled by each sequencer is designated based on the data table information stored in (S783). On the other hand, if it is determined in S782 that the audio / LED control circuit 220 does not use two sequencers in a predetermined channel (if S782 is NO), the audio / LED control circuit 220 is stored in the reproduction channel registration buffer. Based on the stored data table information, an SPI channel (physical system) to be used in a control part controlled by the playback channel sequencer is designated (S784).

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the port to be processed (referenced) is the port to be controlled (within the reproduction channel) in a predetermined channel (S785). Note that the determination processing in S785 is executed based on the data table information stored in the reproduction channel registration buffer, and a series of processing in S785 to S791 described later is repeatedly executed for the number of ports.

  In S785, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that the port being referred to is not a control target port (when S785 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs the process of S789 described later. On the other hand, if the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines in S785 that the port being referred to is the port to be controlled (if S785 is YES), the voice / LED control circuit 220 is based on the data table information. Then, it is determined whether or not “ODONLY” is designated as the reproduction method for the reproduction channel (control part) to be processed (referenced) (S786).

  In S786, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that “ODONLY” is designated as the playback method in the playback channel being referred to (when S786 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 Based on the channel execution priority and the presence / absence of output data, the port information (LED data) is overwritten (S787). In this process, the same process as S750 in the lamp control process (FIGS. 126A and 126B) of Modification 2 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in step S786 that “ODONLY” is not designated as the playback method in the reference playback channel (when S786 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 Performs overwriting processing of the port information (LED data) based on the execution priority set for the channel (S788). In this process, the same process as S751 in the lamp control process (FIGS. 126A and 126B) of the second modification is performed.

  After the processing of S787 or S788, or when S788 is NO, the voice / LED control circuit 220 performs the above-described processing of S785 to S788 for all playback channels (for eight channels) of the port being referred to. It is determined whether or not it has been executed (S789).

  In S789, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines that the processes of S785 to S788 are not executed for all the reproduction channels (when S789 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs the process. Is returned to S785, the playback channel to be processed is changed, and the processes after S785 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in S789 that the processes of S785 to S788 have been executed for all the reproduction channels (when S789 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 is referred to. It is determined whether or not port direct designation data for the current port is included in the lamp request. If the port direct designation data is included in the lamp request, the voice / LED control circuit 220 The LED data is overwritten with the port direct designation data (S790).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 220 determines whether or not the above-described processing of S785 to S790 has been executed for all ports (S791).

  If the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in S791 that the processes in S785 to S790 have not been executed for all ports (S791 is NO), the sound / LED control circuit 220 performs the process. Returning to S785, the processing target port is changed, and the processing after S785 is repeated. On the other hand, if the sound / LED control circuit 220 determines in S791 that the processes in S785 to S790 have been executed for all ports (S791 is YES), the sound / LED control circuit 220 is described later. The process of S792 is performed.

  In this example, when the extension channel is also used, the same processing as the processing of S785 to S791 performed for the reproduction channel is similarly performed for the extension channel. At this time, the processing of S785 to S791 for the reproduction channel and the processing of S785 to S791 for the extension channel are simultaneously performed in parallel processing. At this time, the processing of S785 to S791 for the playback channel is actually executed by the sequencer set for the playback channel, and the processing of S785 to S791 for the extension channel is performed by the sequencer set for the extension channel. Executed.

  If S791 is YES, the audio / LED control circuit 220 has executed a series of the processes of S785 to S791 using two sequencers (playback channel sequencer and extended channel sequencer) in a predetermined channel. It is determined whether or not (S792). Although not shown here, a series of processing from S792 to S794 described later is repeatedly executed for the number of channels.

  In S792, when it is determined that the voice / LED control circuit 220 has executed a series of processes of S785 to S791 using two sequencers (when S792 is YES), each of the voice / LED control circuit 220 The sequencer sets (reserves) clear data (light-out data) in the corresponding control part (S793). On the other hand, when it is determined in S792 that the voice / LED control circuit 220 has not executed the series of processes of S785 to S791 using two sequencers (when S792 is NO), the voice / LED control circuit 220 220 executes the playback channel clear function (S794). By this processing, clear data (light-out data) is set (reserved) in the control part of the reproduction channel.

  Then, after the series of processing of S792 to S794 described above is executed in all channels, the voice / LED control circuit 220 ends the data setting processing of each port.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, between the audio / LED control circuit 220 (master) and each LED driver 280 (slave) connected by the SPI bus, the LED data and the LED driver 280 are unilaterally transmitted from the audio / LED control circuit 220 to each LED driver 280. Although the configuration in which serial data including device address data is transmitted and the LED driver 280 for transmission is specified by the device address data included in the serial data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, when serial data is transmitted / received between the audio / LED control circuit 220 and the LED driver, an LED driver to be transmitted / received by a slave select signal may be designated. In the fourth modification, a configuration example in which an LED driver that is a transmission destination of serial data (LED data or the like) is specified using a slave select signal (SS signal) will be described.

  In the following, the connection configuration between the voice / LED control circuit and the LED driver, the communication principle, and the communication processing procedure in this example will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of this example, between the voice / LED control circuit and the LED driver The configuration other than the communication mode can be configured in the same manner as the above embodiment. Therefore, only the communication mode (configuration and communication control technique) between the voice / LED control circuit and the LED driver will be described here.

[Connection between voice / LED control circuit and LED driver]
First, a connection configuration between the sound / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 according to Modification 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a connection configuration between the voice / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 in this example.

  Also in this example, since the audio / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 are connected by the SPI bus, in each physical system (SPI channel), the serial clock (SCL) signal wiring and the serial data ( (SDO, SDI) signal wiring is provided separately. In each physical system (SPI channel) of the sound / LED control circuit 290 (master), each output terminal (SCL1, SCL2) of the serial / clock signal of the sound / LED control circuit 290 has a plurality of corresponding LED drivers 291. It is connected in parallel to the input terminal (SCL) of the (slave) serial clock signal. Further, the serial data output terminals (SDO 1, SDO 2) of the sound / LED control circuit 290 are connected in parallel to the serial data input terminals (SDI) of the corresponding LED drivers 291. Further, the serial data input terminals (SDI1, SDI2) of the audio / LED control circuit 290 are connected in parallel to the serial data output terminals (SDO) of the corresponding LED drivers 291.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 129, the audio / LED control circuit 290 (master) is provided with a plurality of slave select terminals (SS1, SS2, SS3), and each LED driver 291 (slave) is provided. Also, a slave select terminal (SS) is provided. The slave select terminal (SS) provided in each LED driver 291 is additionally provided, for example, in the terminal group 280d of the LED driver 280 of the above-described embodiment described with reference to FIG. Each slave / select terminal of the audio / LED control circuit 290 is connected to a slave / select terminal (SS) of the corresponding LED driver 291.

[Principle of communication]
Next, the communication principle of serial data between the audio / LED control circuit 290 (master) and the LED driver 291 (slave) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a serial data communication operation between the audio / LED control circuit 290 (master) and the LED driver 291 (slave).

  As shown in FIG. 130, the sound / LED control circuit 290 includes a buffer (first storage means), a shift register (first input / output means), and a shift / clock generator, and each LED driver 291 includes a buffer. (Second storage means) and a shift register (second input / output means). The shift register in the voice / LED control circuit 290 is an 8-bit shift register. The shift register in the LED driver 291 is also an 8-bit shift register.

  In the serial / data communication operation between the sound / LED control circuit 290 (master) and the LED driver 291 (slave), the operation of the shift register in the sound / LED control circuit 290 is input from the shift clock generator. Control is based on the serial clock signal. The operation of the shift register in the LED driver 291 is also controlled based on the serial clock signal output from the shift clock generator in the audio / LED control circuit 290. Note that the serial clock signal output from the shift / clock generator in the sound / LED control circuit 290 is the serial clock signal wiring (the SCL terminals (SCL1, SCL2) of the sound / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291). Are connected to the LED driver 291 via the connection wiring between the SCL terminals. In this example, data communication is performed in units of 8 bits.

  When the serial / data communication operation from the voice / LED control circuit 290 (master) to the LED driver 291 (slave) is started, the buffer in the voice / LED control circuit 290 (master) starts the voice / LED control circuit 290. The transmission data (8 bits) is transmitted to the shift register, and the data (M0 to M7) of each bit constituting the transmission data is stored in the corresponding register in the shift register. Also, transmission data (8 bits) is transmitted from the buffer in the LED driver 291 (slave) to the shift register in the LED driver 291, and the data (S0 to S7) of each bit constituting the transmission data is transmitted to the shift register. Stored in the corresponding register.

  Next, the 1-bit data M7 stored in the first register of the shift register in the voice / LED control circuit 290 is converted into serial data communication wiring (SDO terminal (SDO1 or SDO2) of the voice / LED control circuit 290) and the LED. The data is transmitted to the LED driver 291 via a connection wiring between the SDI terminals of the driver 291. At this time, the data (M0 to M6) stored in the shift register of the sound / LED control circuit 290 is shifted and stored in the first register.

  Simultaneously with the transmission processing of the data M7 of the voice / LED control circuit 290, the 1-bit data S7 stored in the head register of the shift register in the LED driver 291 is connected to the serial data communication wiring (voice / LED control). The signal is transmitted to the audio / LED control circuit 290 via the SDI terminal (SDI1 or SDI2) of the circuit 290 and the connection wiring between the SDO terminals of the LED driver 291. At this time, the data (S0 to S6) stored in the shift register of the LED driver 291 is shifted and stored in one leading register.

  Next, the data M7 transmitted from the voice / LED control circuit 290 to the LED driver 291 is stored in the last register in the shift register of the LED driver 291. At this time, the data S 7 transmitted from the LED driver 291 to the sound / LED control circuit 290 is stored in the last register in the shift register of the sound / LED control circuit 290.

  FIG. 131 shows the data storage state of the shift register in the voice / LED control circuit 290 and the data storage state of the shift register in the LED driver 291 when the above-described 1-bit data communication is completed. As shown in FIG. 131, in the data communication of this example, data is sequentially replaced from the last register of each shift register.

  When the 1-bit data communication described above is repeated 8 times, the data in the shift register of the voice / LED control circuit 290 and the data in the shift register of the LED driver 291 are interchanged, and the 8-bit data Communication ends. When the 8-bit data communication is completed, the 8-bit received data (S0 to S7) stored in the shift register of the voice / LED control circuit 290 is transmitted to and stored in the buffer in the voice / LED control circuit 290. Is done. The 8-bit received data (M0 to M7) stored in the shift register of the LED driver 291 is transmitted to and stored in a buffer in the LED driver 291.

[Communication between voice / LED control circuit and LED driver]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132A and FIG. 132B, the communication processing of this example performed between the audio / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the signal and data transmission / reception processing of this example executed by the sound / LED control circuit 290. FIG. 132B is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of signal and data transmission / reception processing executed by the LED driver 291 in the communication processing between the voice / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 in this example.

(1) Audio / LED Control Circuit Serial / Data Input / Output Processing First, the audio / LED control circuit 290 transmits a slave selector signal (SS signal) to all LED drivers 291 as shown in FIG. 132A. (S801). At this time, the slave select signal is received only by the LED driver 291 corresponding to the device address designated by the slave select signal (address designation signal).

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 290 performs serial data transmission / reception processing with the LED driver 291 of the device address designated by the slave select signal (S802). At this time, the voice / LED control circuit 290 transmits / receives serial data in units of 8 bits according to the communication principle described with reference to FIGS. Next, the voice / LED control circuit 290 completes the serial data transmission / reception processing (S803).

  Next, the voice / LED control circuit 290 stops the transmission of the slave select signal (S804). After the processing of S804, the voice / LED control circuit 290 ends the serial data input / output processing.

(2) LED Driver Serial Data Input / Output Processing First, as shown in FIG. 132B, the LED driver 291 determines whether or not a slave select signal has been received (S811). In this process, if the LED driver 291 is the LED driver 291 corresponding to the device address specified by the slave select signal, the result of the determination process in S811 is YES.

  If the LED driver 291 determines in S811 that the slave select signal has not been received (NO in S811), the LED driver 291 performs the process of S814 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in S811 that the LED driver 291 has received the slave select signal (YES in S811), the LED driver 291 shifts the operating state from the standby state to the activated state (S812).

  After the processing of S812, the LED driver 291 performs serial data transmission / reception processing with the audio / LED control circuit 290 (S813). At this time, the LED driver 291 transmits / receives serial data in units of 8 bits according to the communication principle described with reference to FIGS. Then, the LED driver 291 completes the serial data transmission / reception process.

  After the process of S813 or when S811 is NO, the LED driver 291 shifts the operation state to the standby state or maintains the standby state (S814). After the process of S814, the LED driver 291 ends the serial data input / output process.

  In this example, as described above, only a specific LED driver 291 can be specified by the slave select signal transmitted from the sound / LED control circuit 290, and data can be transmitted to the LED driver 291. In this case, the number of signal wirings between the sound / LED control circuit 290 and the LED driver 291 is larger than that in the above embodiment, but the processing load on the LED driver 291 can be reduced. The balance between the processing load and the processing load of the LED driver 291 can be adjusted.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, a configuration in which one LED 281 is connected to each port, that is, an example in which the LED 281 is a static LED (an example of static output control) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which a plurality of LEDs are connected to each port, that is, an LED in which the LEDs are dynamically controlled (hereinafter referred to as dynamic LEDs) may be used.

  In Modification 5, a configuration example (configuration example of dynamic output control) when the LED is a dynamic LED will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is an example showing an example of dynamic output control of LED data. The example shown in FIG. 133 shows an example in which three LEDs (red LED, blue LED, and green LED) are connected to one port 1. In this example, the reproduction time (lighting time) in the LED data is “12” (about 144 msec), and the red component luminance data, the green component luminance data, and the blue component luminance data are “0xFE”. An example will be described. That is, in this example, the data type (format) of the LED data is the same as that of the above embodiment (see FIG. 44).

  When the LED data of the above data type is input to the LED driver, the LED driver refers to the control part information (including the LED type information) and corresponds to the type of LED connected from the LED data. A drive signal corresponding to the luminance data is output to the LED via the port 1. Therefore, only red luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the red LED, and the red LED is lit for about 144 msec at a luminance corresponding to the red luminance data “0xFE”. Further, only the blue luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the blue LED, and the blue LED is lit for about 144 msec at a luminance corresponding to the blue luminance data “0xFE”. Further, only the green luminance data “0xFE” in the LED data is output to the green LED, and the green LED is lit for about 144 msec at a luminance corresponding to the green luminance data “0xFE”. In this case, white lighting is performed by three LEDs, a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED. In this example, since the LED is dynamically controlled, when the lighting period is about 144 msec, the LED driver supports the luminance data “0xFE” while switching the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED in this order at intervals of 2 msec. The drive signal to be output is output to each LED, and this series of drive signal switching operations is repeated 24 times.

  As described above, in this example, since the data type of the LED data is the same as that of the above embodiment, all static LEDs included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment may be replaced with dynamic LEDs. Some static LEDs may be replaced with dynamic LEDs.

  In this example, as described above, the data type (format) of the LED data output to the dynamic LED can be the same as that of the static LED in the above embodiment. In this case, even when a plurality of LEDs having different LED output control methods are used at the same time, LED data of the same data type can be transmitted, so for each type of output control executed by the LED driver, There is no need to prepare LED data of different data types. In this case, the LED data creation process and the LED data output process can be shared regardless of the type of LED output control. Therefore, even when multiple types of LEDs with different LED data output control methods are used in combination, it becomes easy to synthesize (overwrite, update, etc.) the LED data used in the playback channel, and easily control complex LED output. Can be executed.

  Furthermore, in this example and the above embodiment, the data type of the LED data is the same regardless of the type of LED output control. Therefore, regardless of the number of LEDs in the control part controlled by the LED driver, each LED data The synthesis process is facilitated, and more complicated LED control can be performed. In other words, in this example, the options for effect control using LEDs can be increased, and more advanced effect control can be realized.

[Modification 6]
Modification 6 further includes a function of detecting the excitation state (excitation duration time, etc.) of the motor 272 that drives each movable accessory in the accessory group 30 and detecting an error based on the detection result. Next, a configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine will be described. In Modification 6, the configuration other than the excitation state detection function of the motor 272 can be configured in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the configuration and processing for realizing the function of detecting the excitation state of the motor 272 will be described here.

(1) Configuration Example of Motor Excitation State Detection First, a configuration example of the excitation state detection function of the motor 272 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a schematic configuration diagram of a detection function unit for detecting the excitation state of the motor 272 in the sixth modification. In this example, an example in which four motors 272 are connected to the motor driver 271 will be described.

  In this example, the excitation state detection function unit 275 of the motor 272 (hereinafter referred to as the excitation state detection unit 275) includes three OR circuits (a first OR circuit 276, a second OR circuit 277, and a third OR circuit) as shown in FIG. 278).

  One input terminal of the first OR circuit 276 in the excitation state detection unit 275 is connected to the output terminal OUT0 among the four output terminals of the motor driver 271, and the other input terminal of the first OR circuit 276 is connected to the motor driver 271. Are connected to the output terminal OUT1. Also, one input terminal of the second OR circuit 277 is connected to the output terminal OUT3 of the motor driver 271 and the other input terminal of the second OR circuit 277 is connected to the output terminal OUT4 of the motor driver 271.

  One input terminal of the third OR circuit 278 in the excitation state detector 275 is connected to the output terminal of the first OR circuit 276, and the other input terminal of the third OR circuit 278 is connected to the output terminal of the second OR circuit 277. The The output terminal of the third OR circuit 278 is connected to a predetermined input terminal P for detecting the excitation state provided in the motor driver 271.

  In the pachinko gaming machine having the excitation state detection unit 275 (excitation detection means) configured as shown in FIG. 134, when excitation data is output from the motor driver 271 to at least one of the four motors 272, the excitation state detection unit 275. From the third OR circuit 278, data “1” is output to the motor driver 271 as an excitation detection signal (discrimination result signal). On the other hand, when excitation data is not output to any of the four motors 272 from the motor driver 271, the third OR circuit 278 in the excitation state detector 275 receives data “0” as an excitation detection signal. 271 is output.

  In this example, the host control circuit 210 determines whether at least one of the four motors 272 is in an excited state based on the excitation detection signal (“1” or “0”) input to the motor driver 271. To do. Then, the host control circuit 210 counts the time during which the motor 272 is continuously excited (the time during which the excitation detection signal “1” is continuously detected), and the continuous excitation time becomes not less than a predetermined value. If so, the driving of all the motors 272 is stopped. Here, “all motors 272” means all motors 272 connected to the motor driver 271, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is all motors that drive the movable accessory. Alternatively, a plurality of motors 272 connected to a plurality of motor drivers 271 may be used.

  Note that the configuration of the excitation state detection unit 275 is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 134, and may be any configuration as long as it can determine whether at least one of the plurality of motors 272 is in the excitation state. can do. For example, the number of OR circuits included in the excitation state detection unit 275 and the connection form between the OR circuits can be changed as appropriate according to, for example, the number of motors 272 connected to the motor driver 271. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the excitation state of a part of the motors 272 having a high operating rate among the plurality of motors 272 is determined. In this case, the excitation state detection unit 275 is connected only to output terminals corresponding to some motors 272 having a high operation rate to be monitored among a plurality of output terminals of excitation data provided in the motor driver 271. Is done. Further, in the configuration in which the excitation state of a part of the motors 272 to be monitored among the plurality of motors 272 is determined, a part of the motors 272 are arbitrarily selected regardless of the operation rate, and the part of the selected part is selected. The excitation state of the motor 272 may be monitored.

(2) Accessory Control Process Next, the accessory control process of this example executed by the host control circuit 210 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory control process of this example.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the I2C controller 261 is being reset (S821).

  In S821, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the I2C controller 261 is being reset (S821 is YES), the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S821 that the I2C controller 261 is not being reset (S821 is NO), the host control circuit 210 determines whether all the motors 272 are in the initial position. Is discriminated (S822).

  In S822, when the host control circuit 210 determines that all the motors 272 are in the initial position (when S822 is YES), the host control circuit 210, based on the accessory request for the host control circuit 210, Excitation data is output to each motor driver 271 (motor 272) (S823). Thereby, the presentation operation (drive operation of the motor 272) using the movable accessory is started. Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not an error has occurred during the rendering operation using the movable accessory (the driving operation of the motor 272) (S824).

  In S824, when the host control circuit 210 determines that an error has occurred (when S824 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S830 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S824 that no error has occurred (when S824 is NO), the host control circuit 210 determines the duration (continuous excitation time) of the excitation state of the motor 272. Measure (S825). In this process, the host control circuit 210 measures the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 based on the excitation detection signal input from the third OR circuit 278 in the excitation state detection unit 275 to the motor driver 271.

  After the process of S825, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the duration (continuous excitation time) of the excitation state of the motor 272 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (S826).

  In S826, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (when S826 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S830 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S826 that the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 is not longer than the predetermined time (when S826 is NO), the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not the motor 272 is being excited. Is determined (S827).

  If the host control circuit 210 determines in S827 that the motor 272 is being excited (YES in S827), the host control circuit 210 returns the process to S824 and performs the processes after S824. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S827 that the motor 272 is not being excited (NO in S827), the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process.

  Here, returning to the process of S822 again, in S822, when the host control circuit 210 determines that one or more motors 272 are not in the initial position (when S822 is NO), the host control circuit 210 Then, excitation data for moving (returning) the movable accessory to the initial position is output to the motor 272 (S828). Next, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the operation of moving the movable accessory to the initial position (drive operation of the motor 272) (S829).

  In S829, when the host control circuit 210 determines that an error has occurred (S829 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S830 described later. On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S829 that no error has occurred (S829 is NO), the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process.

  When S824, S826, or S829 is YES, the host control circuit 210 stops the driving operation of all the motors 272 (S830). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 releases the excitation of all the motors 272. Then, after the process of S830, the host control circuit 210 ends the accessory control process.

  In the process of S830, the host control circuit 210 further controls the display device 13 to display information indicating that a driving error of the movable accessory has occurred on the display screen. However, this error display is not canceled until the power is turned off.

  As described above, in this example, when the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 reaches a predetermined time or more, the driving operation of all the motors 272 is stopped. The threshold of the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 for determining whether or not to stop the driving operation of the motor 272 (the protection process of the motor 272) is arbitrarily set according to the effect contents by the movable accessory, for example. Can be set. In addition, the detection process of the excitation state (continuous excitation time) of the motor 272 and the protection process of the motor 272 based on the detection result are performed as an additional process of the accessory control process (see FIG. 116) performed in the above embodiment. Alternatively, the processing after S518 in the accessory control processing (see FIG. 116) of the above embodiment may be replaced with the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG.

  The excitation data output from the host control circuit 210 to the motor 272 (motor driver 271) based on the accessory request is composed of excitation data corresponding to one predetermined operation (operation pattern) of the movable accessory. In some cases, it may be composed of a plurality of excitation data respectively corresponding to a plurality of predetermined operations (operation patterns).

  In the latter case, a plurality of excitation data is output from the host control circuit 210 to the motor 272 (motor driver 271) in a predetermined order based on the accessory request. In this case, in the accessory control process of this example, the processing of S824 to S827 in FIG. 135 is repeated for each excitation data (each action of the accessory). Therefore, for example, in the output operation of excitation data corresponding to a predetermined operation in the middle of a series of driving operations of the movable accessory, the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 becomes a predetermined time or more (S826 becomes YES determination). ), The drive operation of the motor 272 is stopped at that time, and thereafter the excitation data output process for each operation scheduled to be output is also stopped.

(3) Various effects obtained by the configuration of this example As described above, in this example, the output state of excitation data (voltage signal) output from the motor driver 271 to the motor 272 (the excitation state of the motor 272) Is detected by the excitation state detection unit 275, and the continuous excitation time of the motor 272 (the continuous drive time of the movable accessory) is measured based on the detection result. Then, based on the measured continuous excitation time of the motor 272 (continuous driving time of the movable accessory), it is determined whether or not all the motors 272 are stopped (excitation release).

  By providing such a function for detecting the excitation state of the motor 272, for example, it is possible to detect when excitation data is excessively output to the motor 272 or when unintended motor excitation is performed. Can do. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory can be ensured, and the failure of the motor 272 can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the excitation state of the motor 272 is detected (managed) for each operation of the movable accessory, the driving of the motor 272 can be stopped at a timing that is good for the production operation. The stop process of the motor 272 can be performed.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality is detected in the excitation state of the motor 272, the error display is continued on the display screen of the display device 13 until the power is turned off. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prompt the process of forcibly releasing the motor 272 by turning off the power.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the movable combination (first sword combination 31 and second sword combination 32) mainly controlled by the host control circuit 210 having a control execution cycle of about 33 msec and the control execution cycle of about 12 msec. Although an example in which a movable accessory (shutter accessory 33) controlled by a certain sound / LED control circuit 220 is provided separately has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one movable accessory has a plurality of movable parts, and a plurality of movable parts include a movable part controlled with a long control execution cycle and a movable part controlled with a short control execution cycle. It may be.

  In the modified example 7, as an example of the movable combination having such a configuration, a configuration example in which the shutter combination 33 is provided inside the first sword combination 31 described in the above embodiment (the first sword combination 31 and the first combination) A configuration example in which the shutter accessory 33 is provided integrally will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. FIG. 136 is a schematic configuration diagram of the first sword object 300 used in the modification example 7. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating a control flow when executing the object control in the modification example 7.

  In this example as well, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, in addition to the first sword combination 300, the second sword combination 32 and the shutter combination 33 are included in the combination. In addition, the structure of the 2nd sword combination 32 and the shutter combination 33 in this example and its control method are the same as that of the said embodiment. The configuration other than the first sword object 300 is configured in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, only the configuration and control method of the first sword object 300 will be described, and description of other configurations will be omitted. In the following description, components other than the first sword object 300 will be described with the same reference numerals as those in the above embodiment.

(1) Configuration of the first sword combination As shown in FIG. 136, the first sword combination 300 includes a first sword-shaped member 301 (first movable body) imitating the shape of a sword and a rectangular surface shape. And a shutter accessory part 302 (second movable body) having a first panel member 302a and a second panel member 302b. In this example, the shutter accessory 302 is provided on the collar portion of the first sword-shaped member 301, but the configuration of the shutter accessory 302 is the same as the shutter accessory 33 of the above embodiment.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 136, the first sword object 300 is similar to the above-described embodiment, and includes a sword rotation mechanism for rotating the first sword-shaped member 301, the first panel member 30a, and the first panel member 30a. And a shutter rotation mechanism for rotating the two panel members 302b simultaneously.

  The sword rotation mechanism is configured in the same manner as the first rotation mechanism 31b (see FIG. 4) of the above-described embodiment, and at the end (handle) opposite to the sword tip of the first sword-shaped member 301. It is attached. Then, when an effect using the first sword object 300 is performed, the sword rotation mechanism unit is attached to the sword rotation mechanism unit by driving the motor included therein as in the above embodiment. The first sword-shaped member 301 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction or the normal rotation direction around the handle portion of the first sword-shaped member 301.

  On the other hand, the shutter rotation mechanism is configured in the same manner as the third rotation mechanism 33c (see FIG. 68) of the above embodiment, and is attached to one of the short sides of the panel members (right side in FIG. 136). Then, when an effect using the first sword object 300 is performed, the shutter rotation mechanism unit drives the motor included therein as in the above embodiment, and the first panel member 302a and the second panel member 302a. The panel member 302b is simultaneously driven to rotate (open / close drive) in one rotational direction or the opposite rotational direction.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 136, the first sword combination 300 is provided therein, and a plurality of LEDs are provided on the back side of the shutter combination unit 302, and the shutter combination unit 302 is used. When each panel member (shutter) is driven to open and close, the light from the LED is emitted to the outside or shielded from the area (saddle) of the shutter accessory portion 302 of the first sword accessory 300. To do.

  In this example, although not shown in FIG. 136, a detection device (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting whether or not the first sword object 300 (first sword-shaped member 301) is present at the initial position. Is provided outside the first sword combination 300, but a detection device for detecting whether or not the shutter combination portion 302 (the first panel member 302a and the second panel member 302b) is in the initial position is provided. , Provided inside the first sword object 300.

(2) Control flow of first sword object In this example, when an effect using the first sword object 300 is performed, the first sword member 301 is moved from the initial position to the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13. The operation of the operation pattern that rotates and moves to the front surface of FIG. 5 and the operation of the opposite operation pattern are controlled by the host control circuit 210 with a long control execution cycle (about 33 msec). Further, when the first sword-shaped member 301 is swung (see FIG. 67A) in the effect using the first sword object 300, as in the special effect H described in the above embodiment, the swing is performed. The operation is controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220 with a short control execution cycle (about 12 msec).

  Further, in the effect using the first sword object 300, when the rotation drive effect (the shutter opening / closing effect or the shutter swing effect described above) of the shutter object part 302 is executed, the effect operation is performed in the control execution cycle. Is controlled by the voice / LED control circuit 220 (about 12 msec).

  Therefore, in the production control process of the first sword object 300 in this example, as shown in FIG. 137, the first sword object 300 has excitation data from both the host control circuit 210 and the voice / LED control circuit 220. Is entered. The excitation data input from the host control circuit 210 is supplied to the motor in the sword rotation mechanism unit that rotationally drives the first sword-shaped member 301. The excitation data input from the voice / LED control circuit 220 is mainly Then, it is supplied to a motor in a shutter rotation mechanism unit that rotationally drives the shutter accessory unit 302.

  Note that, as in the special effect H described in the above embodiment, in the effect including an operation pattern (see FIG. 67A) for swinging the first sword-shaped member 301, the first sword-shaped member 301 is displayed from the initial position. Excitation data is input from the host control circuit 210 to the motor in the sword rotation mechanism unit during the production period of the motion pattern rotated to the front of the 13 display areas 13a (display screen) and vice versa. In the production period of the operation pattern in which the first sword member 301 is swung, excitation data is input from the voice / LED control circuit 220 to the motor in the sword rotation mechanism.

  As described above, in this example, in the production control of the movable combination (first sword combination 300) including a plurality of movable sections (the first sword-shaped member 301 and the shutter combination section 302), The control of the rendering operation is executed using a control circuit having an appropriate control execution cycle from a plurality of control circuits having different control execution cycles based on the structure of the movable portion and the content of the rendering operation executed by the movable portion. That is, in the production control of a movable accessory including a plurality of movable parts, each of the movable part that requires fine operation control and the movable part that does not require fine operation control, as in the above embodiment. In contrast, it can be controlled individually by a control circuit having an appropriate specification.

  Therefore, also in the accessory control method of this example, it is possible to maintain the quality of the production and reduce the control burden on the host control circuit 210. Further, when a movable accessory having a configuration as in this example is used, a movable part that requires fine operation control and a movable part that does not require fine operation control are provided as separate movable accessories. Since it is not necessary, the number of movable objects to be installed can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

[Modification 8]
In the above-described embodiment, in the initial position return process of the movable combination (S546 in FIG. 118), the example of the process of simultaneously returning a plurality of movable combinations to the initial position regardless of the type of the movable combination has been described. Is not limited to this.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the sword tip portions of the first sword bonus 31 and the second sword bonus 32 are brought close to each other as in the special effect H using the sword bonus described above. Then, an effect operation (oscillation operation) is performed in which the first sword accessory 31 and the second sword accessory 32 scramble each other (see FIG. 67A). In such a staging operation in which the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 interfere with each other, a part of the movement path of the sword portion of the first sword combination 31 is the sword portion of the second sword combination 32. Since it overlaps with a part of the movement path, if one sword object breaks down and stops, the movement of the other sword object may be obstructed by one sword object and an error may occur . Therefore, in the present invention, in consideration of such a case, when errors occur at the same time in a plurality of movable actors capable of performing a production operation that interferes with each other, each movable accessory is moved at a different timing. You may perform the process which returns to an initial position one by one.

  In the modified example 8, as an example, when the first sword combination 31 and the second sword combination 32 are in an error state at the same time, the process of returning the first sword combination 31 to the initial position, and the second sword combination A description will be given of an example of the initial position return process of the movable accessory that performs the process of returning 32 to the initial position at different timings.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 138, the initial position return processing of this example for the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32 executed by the host control circuit 210 will be described in more detail. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial position return process in this example. Note that the initial position return process of this example is executed in S546 during the initial position recovery counter update process shown in FIG. 118 of the above embodiment. In this example, the process of returning the shutter accessory 33 to the initial position is the same as in the above embodiment, and therefore the description of the initial position return process of the shutter accessory 33 is omitted here. Therefore, also in the flowchart of the initial position return process of this example shown in FIG. 138, the illustration of the initial position return process of the shutter accessory 33 is omitted.

  Further, in this example, the timing of returning the first sword object 31 to the initial position is different from the timing of returning the second sword object 32 to the initial position according to the value of the initial position restoration counter. explain. Specifically, when the value of the initial position recovery counter is an even number, a process of returning the first sword combination 31 to the initial position is performed, and when the value of the initial position recovery counter is an odd number, the second sword combination An example of performing processing for returning the object 32 to the initial position will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the initial position restoration counter is an odd number, the process of returning the first sword object 31 to the initial position is performed, and the value of the initial position restoration counter is an even number. In addition, the second sword object 32 may be configured to return to the initial position.

  First, the host control circuit 210 determines whether or not a plurality of error states have occurred in a plurality of movable actors that can perform presentation operations that interfere with each other (S851). Specifically, the host control circuit 210 determines whether an error state has occurred in both the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32.

  In S851, when the host control circuit 210 determines that a plurality of error states have not occurred (when S851 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the process of S855 described later. On the other hand, if the host control circuit 210 determines in S851 that a plurality of error conditions have occurred (if S851 is YES), the host control circuit 210 determines whether the initial position recovery counter value is an even number. It is determined whether or not (S852).

  In S852, when the host control circuit 210 determines that the value of the initial position restoration counter is an even number (when S852 is YES), the host control circuit 210 performs the initial position return processing of the first sword object 31. This is performed (S583). In this processing, the host control circuit 210 performs processing (recovery processing) for returning the first sword object 31 to the initial position. After the process of S583, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position return process of this example, and moves the process to S547 in the initial position recovery counter update process (see FIG. 118).

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 210 determines in S852 that the value of the initial position restoration counter is not an even number (when S852 is NO), the host control circuit 210 performs the initial position return process of the second sword object 32. Is performed (S584). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs a process (recovery process) to return the second sword object 32 to the initial position. After the process of S584, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position return process of this example, and moves the process to S547 in the initial position recovery counter update process (see FIG. 118).

  Here, returning to the process of S851 again, if S851 is NO, the host control circuit 210 performs the initial position return process of the movable subject to be errored (S585). In this process, the host control circuit 210 performs a process (recovery process) of returning the movable object to be errored (one of the first sword object 31 and the second sword object 32) to the initial position. After the process of S585, the host control circuit 210 ends the initial position return process of this example, and moves the process to S547 in the initial position recovery counter update process (see FIG. 118).

  As described above, in this example, in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with two movable actors that can perform a production operation that interferes with each other, an error occurs only in one of the movable actors. When an error occurs in a combination at the same time (for example, when a situation occurs in which the other movable combination that does not originally generate an error has stopped due to movement of one movable combination that has generated an error) The timing (the special symbol variation display period) for performing the recovery process (initial position return process) on the movable accessory is different from that of the other movable accessory. Therefore, by adopting the initial position return process of this example, it is possible to reliably eliminate the error of the movable accessory even if the above situation occurs.

[Modification 9]
In the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, an example in which the post-stop excitation time defined for each operation pattern of the excitation data of the sword is fixed regardless of the operation history of the sword However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the operation history of the sword. In the modified example 9, as an example, an operation pattern (for example, the operation pattern 1 in FIGS. 72 and 73) for rotating the sword object from the initial position to the front surface of the display area 13a (display screen) of the display device 13 is set. An example will be described in which the post-stop excitation time is changed according to the most recent number of rendering operations of the sword.

  FIG. 139 shows the post-stop excitation time set in the operation pattern (for example, operation pattern 1 in FIGS. 72 and 73) for rotating the sword object from the initial position to the front surface of the display area 13a of the display device 13, and the latest. Relationship between the number of movements of the sword object in the ten game periods (game period in which the change display of the special symbol was executed ten times immediately before the current game: hereinafter simply referred to as “the last ten game periods”) An example is shown. In this example, when the number of movements of the sword actor is 1 or less in the last 10 game periods, “4” (124 msec) is set as the excitation time after the stop, and the number of movements of the sword actor is 2 If it is 4 times, “3” (60 msec) is set as the excitation time after stop, and “2” (28 msec) is set as the excitation time after stop when the number of operations of the sword is 5 times or more. Is set.

  That is, in this example, the excitation time after the stop is shortened as the operation frequency of the sword object increases (the possibility that the sword object deteriorates increases) in the last 10 game periods. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the relationship between the post-stop excitation time and the most recent operation history of the sword object is, for example, the contents of the effect, the configuration of the sword object (for example, weight, motor characteristics and durability). Etc.) can be set as appropriate.

  In addition, although the example which changes the excitation time after a stop of the operation pattern 1 in FIG.72 and FIG.73 based on the operation | movement log | history of a sword object was demonstrated here, for example, this invention is not limited to this. For example, for example, the post-stop excitation time set in each of the operation patterns 2 to 10 in FIGS. 72 and 73 may be appropriately changed based on the operation history of the sword. Further, in the excitation data of the shutter accessory, the post-stop excitation time set for each operation pattern may be changed as appropriate based on the operation history of the shutter accessory.

  Furthermore, in this example, although the example which uses the frequency | count of an operation | movement of a movable combination as the information of the movement history of a movable combination was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. As information on the movement history of the movable accessory, other than the number of operations, for example, information such as the control time (excitation time) of the movable accessory, the control content (effect content), or the like may be used. May be used.

  The information related to the operation history of the movable accessory (control history information) is stored in the sub work RAM 210a (storage means) under the control of the host control circuit 210, and is updated every time the special symbol is changed and displayed. Then, in the excitation time monitoring process (see FIG. 121), the host control circuit 210 refers to the information related to the movement history of the movable accessory and the data table as shown in FIG. 139 before the determination process in S572. Determine the appropriate post-stop excitation time.

  As in this example, by appropriately changing the excitation time after stopping set for each operation pattern of excitation data according to the operation history of the movable accessory (e.g., operation start, excitation time, production contents, etc.), The threshold value of the excitation monitoring time of the movable accessory can be set more appropriately. As a result, in this example, the failure rate of the movable accessory can be further reduced.

[Modification 10]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment and the above-described various modifications, an accessory request is generated by the host control circuit 210, and based on the accessory request, the host control circuit 210 and / or the voice / LED control circuit 220 is movable. Although the structural example which controls the production | presentation operation of a thing was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this.

  For example, a control circuit dedicated to a movable accessory having a control execution cycle longer than that of the voice / LED control circuit 220 is separately provided, and based on the accessory request generated by the host control circuit 210, a control circuit dedicated to the movable accessory and / or Alternatively, the voice / LED control circuit 220 may be configured to control the rendering operation of the movable accessory. In this case, the rendering operation of the movable accessory is not directly controlled by the host control circuit 210. Even if it is such a structure, the effect similar to the said embodiment is acquired. In the case where a control circuit dedicated to the movable accessory is provided, the control execution cycle of the control circuit dedicated to the movable accessory may be the same as the control execution cycle of the host control circuit 210 or the control execution of the host control circuit 210. It may be different from the period.

[Modification 11]
In the embodiment and the various modifications described above, the initial position return process of the movable accessory (see S546 in the initial position recovery counter update process shown in FIG. 118) is performed when the special symbol fluctuation display starts (when the fluctuation start command is received). Although an example of a configuration that can be executed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

  The initial position return process of the movable accessory is an arbitrary timing as long as it is a timing that can be executed at the occurrence interval of the special symbol variation display (variable display) and the effect by the movable accessory is not executed. Can be done with. For example, the configuration may be such that the initial position return processing of the movable accessory can be executed when the special symbol variation display is finished. In this case, the same effect (unnecessary error) as in the above embodiment is also possible. Does not occur).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the above-described various modifications, the configuration example in which the initial position return process of the movable accessory can be executed once in one special symbol variable display period has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. Not. For example, the initial position return process of the movable accessory may be configured to be executed a plurality of times a specific number of times during one special symbol variable display period.

  In this case, it may be determined whether or not the movable accessory has returned to the initial position every time the initial position return process is executed during the specific multiple times of the initial position return process. It may be determined whether or not the movable accessory has returned to the initial position after the execution of the initial position return processing for the number of times. When the former determination process is employed, when it is determined that the movable accessory has returned to the initial position before the initial position return process is performed a plurality of times, the initial position return process is terminated at that point. .

[Modification 12]
In the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of the movable accessory of the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the time during which the motor is continuously excited (excitation monitoring time) after the operation of each operation pattern is monitored has been described. Is not limited to this. As a parameter indicating the excitation state of the motor used in this error detection function, any parameter can be used as long as it is a parameter indicating the excitation state of the motor. For example, outside the above-described excitation monitoring time, the current value, voltage value, power value, and the like during the excitation operation may be used as parameters indicating the excitation state of the motor, or these parameters may be used in combination.

  In the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of the movable accessory, when the current value, voltage value, or power value during the excitation operation is used as a parameter indicating the motor excitation state, a predetermined threshold value (setting) corresponding to these parameters is set. Value) is set for each excitation data operation pattern. In this case, for example, the threshold values of these parameters can be set in consideration of the contents of the operation pattern (for example, strong excitation, weak excitation, etc.), motor characteristics, durability, and the like.

  In the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of the movable accessory in this example, for example, it is determined that an error has occurred when the current value, voltage value, or power value during the excitation operation exceeds a corresponding threshold value. . As an error process at this time, similarly to the above embodiment, the motor may be stopped (power supply is stopped), or the current value, voltage value, or power value is reduced (adjusted). Also good.

  Further, in the error detection function based on the excitation monitoring process of the movable accessory in this example, when the current value, voltage value, or power value during the excitation operation is used as a parameter indicating the excitation state of the motor, it is the same as in the above-described modification 9. In addition, the host control circuit 210 may appropriately change the threshold values of these parameters based on information related to the operation history of the movable accessory within the accessory control process.

[Other variations]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment and the various modifications described above, the example in which the player uses the speaker check function described above during the game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-described speaker check function may be configured to be operable not only during a game but also at a stage of inspection performed before the shipment of the pachinko gaming machine, or an inspection performed before the shipment of the pachinko gaming machine. It may be configured to be operable only in

  In the embodiment and the various modifications described above, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, various gaming machines such as a ball game machine, a pachislot gaming machine, a gaming machine, an enclosed gaming machine, and a rotating gaming machine. It can also be applied.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 2 ... Main body, 3 ... Base door, 4 ... Glass door, 10 ... Speaker group, 11 ... Speaker, 12 ... Game board, 13 ... Display device, 15 ... Launching device, 16 ... Dispensing device, 20 ... lamp (LED) group, 30 ... actor group, 31 ... first sword accessory, 32 ... second sword accessory, 33 ... shutter accessory, 36 ... selection button, 37 ... decision button, 43 ... ball passage detector, 44 ... first start port, 45 ... second start port, 46 ... normal electric accessory, 51,52 ... general winning port, 53 ... first big winning port, 54 ... second big winning port 55 ... Out port, 56 ... Game nail, 61 ... Special symbol display device, 62 ... Normal symbol display device, 63 ... Normal symbol hold display device, 64 ... First special symbol hold display device, 65 ... Second special symbol hold Display device, 70 ... main control circuit, 71 ... main CPU, 72 ... main ROM 73 ... Main RAM, 77 ... One-chip microcomputer, 123 ... Discharge / launch control circuit, 200 ... Sub control circuit, 201 ... Relay board, 202 ... Sub board, 203 ... Control ROM board, 204 ... CGROM board, 205 ... Sub main ROM 206 206 CGROM 210 Host control circuit 210 a Sub work RAM 210 b SRAM 220 and 290 Audio / LED control circuit 230 Display control circuit 234 Video decoder 235 Still image decoder 236 ... SDRAM controller, 237 ... Built-in VRAM, 238 ... First display controller, 239 ... Second display controller, 240 ... 3D geometry engine, 241 ... Rendering engine, 250 ... SDRAM, 260 ... Built-in relay board, 261 ... I2C controller, 70 ... motor controller, 271 ... motor driver, 272 ... motor, 275 ... excited state detection unit, 276 ... first 1OR circuit, 277 ... first 2OR circuit, 278 ... first 3OR circuit, 280,291 ... LED driver 281 ... LED

Claims (4)

Main control means capable of executing a lottery transition from a normal gaming state disadvantageous to the player to a special gaming state advantageous to the player;
Sub-control means capable of controlling the production based on the result of the transition lottery,
An effect device driven at the time of execution of the effect,
The main control means includes
Game information transmission means capable of transmitting game information from the main control means to the sub-control means;
The sub-control means is
Rendering device control means capable of controlling the rendering device;
Based on the game information transmitted from the main control means, setting the effect data used for the control of the effect, the effect control means capable of outputting the control command of the effect device to the effect device control means, Have
The effect device control means includes:
A first rendering device control circuit unit capable of controlling the rendering device in a first cycle when a control command for the rendering device is acquired;
When the control command for the rendering device is acquired, the rendering device can be controlled in a second cycle shorter than the first cycle, and the first rendering device control circuit unit is provided separately from the first rendering device control circuit unit . 2 production device control circuit units ,
The effect device includes at least a first movable body and a second movable body capable of executing a predetermined effect operation,
In the execution period of the predetermined rendering operation, the first rendering device control circuit unit controls the operation of the first movable body, and the second rendering device control circuit unit operates the second movable body. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the game machine. The second movable body is configured integrally with the first movable body,
Wherein according to the second effect device control circuit portion and the second operation control of the movable body, wherein, characterized in that it is performed simultaneously with the operation control of the first movable body by the first effect device control circuit unit Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1. The rendering operation of the first movable body at the time of execution of the specific rendering operation by the rendering device includes a first rendering operation and a second rendering operation in which the operation contents of the first movable body are different from each other,
The second production operation is a production operation finer than the first production operation,
When the first movable body is driven by the first presentation operation during the execution period of the specific presentation operation, the first presentation device control circuit unit controls the operation of the first movable body. When the first movable body is driven by the second effect operation, the second effect device control circuit unit controls the operation of the first movable body. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2. The sub-control means is capable of controlling the first movable body in a first specific control period that is a minimum control period of the first movable body in a specific performance operation, and the second movable body The second movable body can be controlled in a second specific control period that is a minimum control period of
When executing the specific performance operation,
A first period that exceeds the first specific control period and is closest to the first specific control period in a period obtained by multiplying the first period in the first rendering device control circuit unit by an integer; and Of the second period that is longer than the first specific control period and is closest to the first specific control period in the period obtained by multiplying the second period in the second rendering device control circuit unit by an integer, The first movable body can be controlled using an effect device control circuit unit that can obtain a period closer to the first specific control period,
A third period that exceeds the second specific control period and is closest to the second specific control period in a period obtained by multiplying the first period in the first rendering device control circuit unit by an integer; and Of the fourth period that exceeds the second specific control period and is closest to the second specific control period in a period that is an integral multiple of the second period in the second rendering device control circuit unit , The second movable body can be controlled using an effect device control circuit unit that can obtain a period closer to the second specific control period. The gaming machine described in 1.

Images